JP7248078B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, game machines are known in which an effect is executed to move a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position by a player operating operating means (effect buttons, etc.). Patent document 1).

JP 2015-097827 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, an operation means operable by a player, and a predetermined effect when the operation means is operated. If it is a first state that can be executed in a mode, it can be set so that the performance is executed in a first pattern, and when the operation means is operated, the performance is executed in the predetermined mode. an effect control means that can be set to execute the effect in a second pattern different from the first pattern until a predetermined condition is established, if the second state is impossible, and the effect is provided. The executing means is capable of executing a plurality of effects, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect for any of the plurality of effects based on the operation of the operating means. At least two effects out of the plurality of effects that can be executed by the effect execution means are set so that execution periods of the effects are different from each other, and the first pattern is the operation means. It is executed in a predetermined manner regardless of the number of times of operation, and the second pattern is set to be executable at a predetermined timing after the performance is started in the first pattern. It is a thing .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect, the operating means operable by the player, and the effect executing in a predetermined manner when the operating means is operated. is possible, it is possible to set the performance to be executed in the first pattern, and it is impossible to execute the performance in the predetermined mode when the operation means is operated. If it is a second state, it has a production control means that can be set to execute the production in a second pattern different from the first pattern until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the production execution means includes a plurality of production execution means. and a specific effect can be executed for an arbitrary effect among a plurality of effects based on the operation of the operation means , and the effect execution At least two effects out of the plurality of effects that can be executed by the means are set so as to have different execution periods of the effects, and the first pattern is set regardless of the number of times the operation means is operated. It is executed in a predetermined manner, and the second pattern is set to be executable at a predetermined timing after the performance is started in the first pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a swing motion unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing motion unit; (a) is a front view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit. (a) is a front view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit. (a) is a front view of the rocking motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit. (a) is a front view of the rocking motion unit, (b) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the rocking motion unit. (a) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swing motion unit on the base end side of the arm member. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a first slide operation unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit; It is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit. (a) is a front view of a first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (a) is a front view of a first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26(a); FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the reversing motion unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit; (a) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). (a) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. ), and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. 32(b). (a) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. FIG. 4 is a partial side view of a reflecting member and a transmitting member; (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a second slide operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second slide operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second slide operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second slide operation unit; (a) to (c) are front views of a second slide operation unit. (a) to (c) are front views of a second slide operation unit. FIG. 11 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit; It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever in a 2nd embodiment. Fig. 2 is a front view of the drive gear, transmission and L-shaped lever; (a) and (b) are front views of the swing motion unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the swing motion unit. (a) is a front view of a first slide operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit. (a) to (c) are partial front views of the second slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along La-La, (b) is a cross-sectional view along Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (a)-(b) are rear views of a part of the first variable winning device. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first control example and the hit in the normal symbol, and (b) is a main control device in the first control example 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in , and (c) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM in a main controller in a first control example. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a long press effect lottery table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; (a) to (b) are examples of notification modes displayed by the third pattern display device. (a) to (b) are an example of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) to (b) are an example of a long press effect displayed on the third symbol display device. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing ending processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. It is the flowchart which showed the long press effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device in a second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the second control example; It is a block diagram showing, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a capture effect lottery table. (a) ~ (b) is an example of the display mode of the capture effect displayed on the third pattern display device. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device; It is the flowchart which showed the SW production|presentation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 10 is a flowchart showing display setting processing 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing SW effect display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller in the third control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows variation processing during time saving performed by MPU in a main control unit. (a) to (b) are an example of the display mode of the temporary stop effect displayed by the third symbol display device. 4 is a flow chart showing display setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pattern temporary stop setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifth control example; (a) to (b) are rear views of part of the V winning device in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the fifth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fifth control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the fifth control example, (b) is the first random number counter C1 in the fifth control example and the jackpot judgment in the first special symbol (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the fifth control example and the jackpot determination value in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in the 5th control example, and the hit in a normal design. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is the first per type counter C2 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth control example and the jackpot type in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a small hit type counter C5 in the fifth control example and the small in the first special symbol It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the hit type, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type in the second special symbol. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big hit in the fifth control example FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship, and FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal) in the fifth control example, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in time saving in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in an audio ramp control device in a fifth control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in an audio ramp control device in a fifth control example; It is a schematic diagram showing. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the fifth control example; (a) is a time chart showing the occurrence of a jackpot based on the passage of the game ball to the second winning hole to the occurrence of the big hit based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control. It is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning hole in the example to the occurrence of a big hit by special symbols. (a) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 2 unvaried state out of the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the special figure 2 variation state out of the special figure 2 game state. (a) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a small hit game state out of the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is the second A display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the 5 control example, and a schematic diagram showing a state in which a big hit based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch is shown among the special figure 2 game states is. (a) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the state at the start of the jackpot in the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a time-saving game is given after a big hit in the special figure 2 game state, ( c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a model showing that it is a state of transitioning to the special figure 1 game state after the big hit out of the special figure 2 game state It is a diagram. (a) is a display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125(b), and is a schematic diagram showing that a jackpot D has occurred, and (b) is at the timing of FIG. 125(b). It is a display screen to be displayed, and is a schematic diagram showing a state departure in which there is a jackpot C in the reserve. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing prefetching process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the small winning end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing 3V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; 10 is a flowchart showing 2V effect command processing; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of a modification of the fifth control example; FIG. 21 is a perspective enlarged view of a detour member in a sixth control example; It is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning device in the sixth control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of a channel opening device in a sixth control example; (a) to (c) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing a continuous chance effect execution system. (a) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (a) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of the display mode of the continuous chance effect. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the seventh control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of the big hit in the seventh control example, and (b) is the time of loss (normal) in the seventh control example is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type in (c) is the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (probability variation) in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table of the number of consecutive chances when winning in the seventh control example, and (b) is the contents of the table of the number of consecutive chances when losing in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a number-of-latency lottery table in the seventh control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing prefetching process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing winning information processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a post-herald setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first win type table in the eighth control example It is a diagram. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller in the eighth control example; (a) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the variable probability switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the jackpot game is executed in the eighth control example. It is a timing chart. (a) and (b) are the game state, the passage state of the game ball to the variable probability switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. It is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller in the ninth control example; (a) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the variable probability switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal plate when the jackpot game is executed in the eighth control example. It is a timing chart. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a character A in the tenth control example. (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a role object B in the tenth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a character C in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a character object arrangement in a tenth control example. (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the action of the character product in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the standby position of the role object A in the tenth control example. (b) is a diagram showing the operation of the normal drive pattern of the role object A in the tenth control example. (c) is a diagram showing the operation of the shortened drive pattern of the role object A in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the flow of the action of the role object during the repeated button-hit effect in the tenth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a repeated hitting effect selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of an action scenario table in the tenth control example. is. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a role product A scenario table in the tenth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a role product B scenario table in the tenth control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the role object C scenario table in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing repeated-press button processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing button timer subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing character A operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a character B operation setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the role thing C operation|movement setting process performed by MPU. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing character product operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the operation of delay processing in the eleventh control example. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the flow of the action of the role object during the repeated button-hit effect in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing repeated press button processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing delay timer subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a character A action setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a role product B operation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing character object C operation setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing role product operation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the flow of repetitive motions in the twelfth control example. 29 is a timing chart showing the flow of the action of the role object during the repeated button-hit effect in the twelfth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing repeated button process 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a character A action setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a role object B operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; 10 is a flowchart showing a role product C operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU of . (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the action of the character in the thirteenth control example. 29 is a timing chart showing the flow of the action of the role object during the repeated button-hit effect in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated press button processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a character A operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a role product B operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a character C action setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a weak action of a role object in the fourteenth control example. (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the strong action of the character in the fourteenth control example. 29 is a timing chart showing the flow of the role object action during the repeated button-hit effect in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing details of a drive motor in a fourteenth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a second action scenario table in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a role object A second scenario table in the fourteenth control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated press button processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing interval timer subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing role A action setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing role product operation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a solenoid drive circuit in a fifteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the operation of a general electric solenoid in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of a general electric solenoid in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifteenth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing normal electric operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a general electric switching process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a general electric timer subtraction process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a solenoid drive circuit in a modification of the fifteenth control example. (b) is a timing chart showing output signals in a modification of the fifteenth control example. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the flow of operation of a general electric (electric accessory) 640a in a modification of the fifteenth control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the flow of actions of the driven actor.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start It is configured by assembling a port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 Triggered by the passage of the ball, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board. is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during probability variation and time saving, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since the state is easy to win, the ball is shot toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate ) 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640, which is more advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive devices 340 , 464 , 560 and drive motors 441 , 771 , 772 , 773 , 774 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the structure for accommodating the units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is disassembled and viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 200, a swing operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reversal operation unit 500, a decoration operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210. configured as a unit.

Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an external shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and while contacting the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212, the second sliding operation unit 700 moves toward the outer wall portion 212. is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 so as to be surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 700 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

7, the rocking motion unit 300, the first sliding motion unit 400, the reversing motion unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second sliding motion unit 700, respectively. It is arranged and housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700) is superimposed on the front side of another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) in a stacked state. Since it is arranged, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. 8 to 10, FIG. 5 to FIG. 7 will be referred to as needed.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 8, the upright member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 are arranged at the overhanging position. ) is arranged in the extended position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are arranged in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 8, the rocking motion unit 300 includes an arm member 320 pivotally supported at its proximal end, and rocking toward the rocking end opposite to the proximal end of the arm member 320 . 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the standing member 330 is arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 is swayed by a suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) that slides obliquely downward and a bent arm portion 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A tilting member 460 is movably pivoted, and the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operable between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 9, the suspension member 430 is arranged at the end of the slide direction (left side), and the tilting member 460 is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, at the front of the third pattern display device 81). , see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740 that are slidably formed, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. position and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the left and right outside of the opening 211a of the back case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the back case 210. It is retracted to the outside and invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the slide members 720 and 740 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2).

In addition, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of a “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the respective slide members 720 and 740 are projected.

As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the surface of the reflecting member 520 that is viewed by the player can be reversed (turned over). be. The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member projecting to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81) like the other operation units 300, 400, 700 are equipped with. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated to the left of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

These operation units 300 to 700 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the motion units 300 to 700 can be operated individually, and these motions can be combined, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. The operation units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operation units 300 to 600 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the extended position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between the device 81 and the device 81 . Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visually recognized from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 from an oblique direction (for example, a direction tilted to the left or right from the front view).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, both the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in the protruded position, so that the player can can be filled with the respective slide members 720, 740. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the presentation effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the rocking motion unit 300 is arranged at the extended position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are arranged at the extended position.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the swing operation unit 300 and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing operation unit 300 and the third pattern display device 81 A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is generated between the . Therefore, when only the upright member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visually recognized from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 from an oblique direction (for example, a direction tilted to the left or right from the front view).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the upright member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are both arranged at the overhanging positions, so that the player can The respective slide members 720 and 740 can fill the gaps seen obliquely. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the rendering effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

The swing motion unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. FIG. 13(a) and 13(b) are front perspective views of the swing motion unit 300. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 13(a), the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13(b), the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 is swung around the swing shaft 312, and the posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is changed (tensioned) before and after the swing. Stand up as you move toward the start position). Next, the overall configuration of the swing motion unit 300 will be described.

14 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rocking motion unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing motion unit 300 includes a plate-shaped base member 310, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base member 310 at the base end side, and the arm member 320 A standing member 330 internally fitted and pivotally supported on the rocking end side, which is the end opposite to the base end side of the base member 310, and a driving device arranged on the rear surface of the lower right portion of the base member 310 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and connected to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 that applies a biasing force to the arm member 320, and the lower right portion of the base member 310 in a front view. and a cover member 370 attached to the front of.

The base member 310 is a member that makes the thickness direction coincide with the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing motion unit 300. The base member 310 is a fitting hole 311 drilled in the thickness direction and fixed to the fitting hole 311. A cylindrical swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 projecting in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a driving gear insertion hole 314 drilled adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole. A guide hole 315 which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with 311 and formed to the left of the guide hole 315 in a front view (see FIG. 14), and bent to the left and right opposite side of the guide hole 315 It has an upright hole 316 that is an elongated hole and a hook portion 317 that protrudes in a hook shape toward the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 when viewed from the front.

The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swing operation unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and is composed of a main body portion 321 formed in a long plate shape and its A penetrating tubular portion 322 disposed on the base end side of the main body portion 321, a sliding ring portion 323 opened in the same direction as the tubular portion 322 on the swing end side of the main body portion 321, A plate-shaped front abutment portion 324 raised and disposed on the front side of the main body portion 321, a long hole-shaped release hole 325 extending along a straight line drawn radially from the tubular portion 322, and a main body. A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the back side of the portion 321 and protruding toward the base member 310, and a pair of sliding portions 326 protruding toward the front side on the left side of the tubular portion 322 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14). and a projecting portion 327 .

The cylindrical portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported on the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310 . That is, the arm member 310 is swung around the tubular portion 322 pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that internally fits and supports the standing member 330 . It is formed with a large diameter and suppresses the shaking of the upright member 330 .

The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the pivot end side. Therefore, a gap is formed between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion 321, and in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the protruding end side portion of the upright member 330 is positioned between the front contact portion 324 and the main body portion. 321 (see FIG. 16).

The release hole 325 is an elongated hole that is connected to the regulating slide portion 351 of the transmission device 350 , and the positional relationship between the transmission device 350 , the cylindrical portion 322 and the release hole 325 restricts the swinging motion of the arm member 320 . The details of the holes will be described later.

Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted through the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 can be slid in the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 is swinging. suppresses rattling of the arm member 320 and stabilizes swinging of the arm member 320 . Since a ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling out of the guide hole 315 and the swinging motion of the arm member 320 is stabilized. can be made

The projecting portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked and to which the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

The upright member 330 is arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the upward direction. A protruding ring portion 332 protruding in a large diameter ring shape from the rear side of 331 , a variable sliding portion 333 protruding toward the rear side on the proximal end side, and a larger diameter than the outer diameter of the protruding ring portion 332 . and a retainer portion 334 which is formed in the shape of a disc and is fastened and fixed to the variable sliding portion 333 .

The body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

The projecting ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 . Therefore, the standing member 330 is pivotally supported so that the outer surface of the projecting ring portion 332 contacts the inner surface of the sliding ring portion 323 over a wide range (large area). Therefore, even when the large standing member 330 is pivotally supported at one point, it is possible to suppress the shaking of the standing member 330 due to the swinging motion of the arm member 320 .

The changing sliding portion 333 is inserted through the standing hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the standing member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, the details of which will be described later. A ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened to the tip of the changeable slide portion 333, so that the changeable slide portion 333 is prevented from falling out of the upright hole 316 and the arm member 320 swings. can be stabilized.

The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, and is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the standing member 330. abutted on the side. Therefore, the upright member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334 .

The driving device 340 is a motor that is arranged on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320. The driving device 340 includes a driving gear 341 that is rotationally driven. It is arranged on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the drive device 340 is first transmitted. be. In addition, a regulating sliding portion 351 protruding toward the front side is provided at the swinging end, which is the end on the opposite side to the base end.

The regulation slide portion 351 is inserted through the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 , and the regulation slide portion 351 slides into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 while the arm member 320 is swinging. Further, especially when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmission device 350 .

The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source when the arm member 320 swings, particularly when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. It has a base end side arm portion 361 that is supported (pressed downward) and a moving end side arm portion 362 that is supported (pressed downward) by the projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320 .

Next, the swinging motion of the swinging motion unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. FIG. 16(a), 17(a), and 18(a) are front views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. 16(b), 17(b), and 18(b) are rear views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in chronological order. 16 shows the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 18, the arm members 320 are respectively illustrated in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the upright member 330 takes a posture in which the major diameter direction D1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the projecting end side portion of the standing member 330 is housed between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 .

That is, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the upright member 330 can be shielded from the player by using the space necessary to shield the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 can be effectively utilized.

Also, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315 , and the variable sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at the lower end of the standing hole 316 . As a result, the pair of sliding portions 326 and changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 swings toward the extended position, the upright member 330 changes its posture (upright posture) so that the major axis direction D1 faces the vertical direction.

The dimension (plate thickness) along the thickness direction of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (the wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) is larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. be. In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is slightly shorter than the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the gap is formed in such a manner that the gap is gradually changed.

The gap formed between the body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 when starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed of the arm member 320 when starting can be secured.

In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is greater than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly shorter dimension (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed to be approximately the same). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 arranged near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310 .

In this embodiment, the upright member 330 is arranged above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 falls forward due to the weight of the upright member 330 (falls toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum of the forward fall. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be supported by being brought into surface contact with the base member 310, and the resistance to forward tilting of the arm member 320 can be improved.

Here, the standing hole 316 has a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed toward the tubular portion 322 (see FIG. 14) that is the pivot shaft of the arm member 320. As shown in FIG. When the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides along the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized. This is because the posture changing portion 316a is perpendicular to the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323. As shown in FIG.

As a result, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed in a short period of time after starting, and the posture change of the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the standing member 330 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the shielding space in the vertical direction of the erecting member 330 is suppressed at the retracted position, and the effect of visually recognizing the erecting member 330 and the arm member 320 as a unit can be improved at the extended position.

Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance associated with the upright member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the standing member 330 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 rotates about the cylindrical portion 322 is perpendicular to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work of the rotating force around the cylindrical portion 322 on the variable sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force×distance=0). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance applied to the arm member 320 when starting from the retracted position. Thereby, it is possible to secure a high speed when the arm member 320 is started.

The concentric circle portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. As shown in FIG. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides along the concentric circle portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. , the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. As a result, the erecting member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as an integral unit, and an effect in which the erecting member 330 and the arm member 320 are integrally formed can be easily realized.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the upper ends of the guide holes 315 and the changing sliding portions of the standing member 330 are arranged. 333 is positioned at the upper end of the upright hole 316 . This allows the pair of sliding portions 326 to function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung upward. In particular, as will be described later, since the arm member 320 is swung upward by the biasing force of the torsion spring 360, the need for a stopper at the terminal end is greater than when driven by a motor or the like. Moreover, since the sliding portions 326 are formed as a pair, the force generated when the sliding portions 326 function as stoppers can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the sliding portion 326 can be improved.

Although the variable sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can be made to function as a stopper, the upright member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, so a strength problem arises. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position, the extended end side of the standing member 330 (the upper side in FIG. 18) projects above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. formed by Therefore, even if the swinging angle of the arm member 320 is small, it is possible to secure the action of projecting the upright member 330 toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The degree of freedom in designing the dynamic angle can be improved.

In addition, a large moving distance of the upright member 330 on the overhanging end side can be ensured while the swing angle of the arm member 320 is kept small. can. This effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position (see FIG. 16) where the degree of posture change of the upright member 330 with respect to the swinging of the arm member 320 is large. can be

Next, referring to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the upright member 330 is retracted between the arm member 320 and the front contact portion 324 will be described. 19(a) is a front view of the rocking motion unit 300, FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the rocking motion unit 300, and FIG. 19(c) is a bottom view of the rocking motion unit 300. It is a diagram. 19(a) to 19(c) illustrate a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. The drawing shows a state in which the protruding end side of the standing member 330 begins to be accommodated between the main body portion 321 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the front contact portion 324 is arranged on the front side of the standing member 330 (upper portion in FIG. 19(c)). As a result, even when the upright member 330 wobbles around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum (swings vertically in FIG. 19(c)) when the arm member 320 swings, the upright member 330 is brought into contact with the front contact portion 324. , wobble of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

Here, the position A where the standing member 330 and the front part 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap when viewed from the front is above the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81. formed in Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the standing member 330 is at a pre-stage where the wobble of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage where it is arranged inside the display area P of the third pattern display device 81). Thus, the movement trajectories of the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 can overlap in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 can be brought into contact with the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress the shaking of the standing member 330. can.

20(a) to 20(d) are diagrams for explaining in chronological order the process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position. 3 is a partial front enlarged view of the rocking motion unit 300 on the end side. FIG. FIG. 20(b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 has been swung from the retracted position to the extended position by a predetermined amount, and FIG. A state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the extended position is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 370 is omitted in FIGS. 20(a) to 20(d).

First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (posture change from FIG. 20(d) to FIG. 20(a)) will be described. When the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) is rotated from the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. When the regulating sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, the arm member 320 moves through the states shown in FIGS. 20(a)). That is, when arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of drive device 340 .

In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the driving device 340 can be suppressed. For example, if it is an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

Further, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 extend vertically downward (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, the resistance applied to the arm member 320 and the upright member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the upright hole 316 at the start of swinging from the extended position can be suppressed.

Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20(a) to FIG. 20(d)) will be described. A biasing force of a torsion spring 360 is applied to the arm member 320 . When the arm member 320 is placed at the retracted position (see FIG. 20(a)), the base end arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from above by the hook portion 317 of the base member 310, 362 is pressed downward and to the right by projecting portion 327 of arm member 320 .

Thus, in the torsion spring 360, the distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 is shortened with the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the elastic force is directed in the direction (upper left direction) in which the arm member 320 is lifted. It is in its most accumulated state of power. Swinging of arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between release hole 325 of arm member 320 and transmission device 350 . The mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotating shaft of the arm member 320 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is , perpendicular to the direction Y connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 pivotally supporting the transmission device 350 and the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 .

In this case, the restricting sliding portion 351 can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 . As a result, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the retracted position even if the drive force from the drive device 340 is not required, so the energy consumption of the drive device 340 can be suppressed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, even when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 is positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 . As a result, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held at the extended position even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is not required, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

An operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20(a)), the driving device 340 is operated to release the regulation sliding portion 351 from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. drive gear 341 is rotated (ON state) by a predetermined amount clockwise when viewed from the front. Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the regulation slide portion 351 is released from the dead center in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20(b)).

Here, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the cylindrical portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the distance between the base end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 is shortened. It is in a state where the elastic force directed in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is most accumulated.

From this state, when the regulating slide portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350, the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 causes the arm member 320 to swing. As a result, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

For example, in a mode such as a drive motor that gradually increases the driving force, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the starting speed of the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration of the arm member 320 can be ensured at the time of starting. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

After the driving gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the driving device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the driving gear 341 is put in a state of being able to idle. The arm member 320 is swung upward by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20(c)).

When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the overhanging position (see FIG. 20(c)), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount (ON state), and the regulating slide portion 351 is moved to the arm position. It is located at dead center in relation to member 320 and transmission device 350 .

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not always applied to the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 is moved in the vicinity of the retracted position and the extended position. The driving device 340 is driven (ON state) only when it is arranged in the retracted position and the extended position, and the driving device 340 is stopped (OFF state). As a result, compared to the case where the driving force of the driving device 340 is constantly applied to the arm member 320, the driving period of the driving device 340 can be reduced, so that the life of the driving device 340 can be extended.

As shown in FIGS. 20( a ) and 20 ( d ), when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position, the transmission shaft 313 that supports the regulating slide portion 351 and the transmission device 350 is connected. The direction perpendicular to the straight line is aligned with the extending direction of the release hole 325 .

As a result, when the arm member 320 is rotated from the retracted position or the extended position, the rotation direction of the regulating sliding portion 351 and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are aligned, so that the movement is started. In this case, the resistance that the regulation slide portion 351 receives from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. 21(a) and 21(b) are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. FIG. 21(a) shows a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 21(b) shows the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 at the extended position. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 21, the suspending member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid obliquely downward (from upper right to lower left when viewed from the front) from the retracted position. It changes (it tilts toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape when viewed from the front, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side. 420 and the base member 410 and is slidably moved along the front side surface of the base member 410; A driving device 440 that generates a force, a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 that has one end pivotally supported on the base end side of the hanging member 430 and the other end connected to the base member 410, It mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is pivotally supported on the projecting end side, which is the end opposite to the base end side of the suspension member 430, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. consists of

The base member 410 is formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front and is a member forming the skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400. The base member 410 includes a plate-shaped main body laterally elongated portion 411 and the vicinity of the right end portion of the main body laterally elongated portion 411. A plate-shaped main body vertically elongated portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body 411, and a guide rib portion extending slightly inclined with respect to the left and right direction on the front side of the main body horizontally long portion 411 and protruding in the shape of a straight rib. 413, an insertion hole 414, which is drilled in a substantially central part of the horizontally elongated main body and through which the drive shaft of the driving device 441 is inserted, and a lower part of the vertically elongated main body 412, extending from the lower right to the upper left in the front view. It mainly includes a guide hole 415 drilled in an elongated shape and a pair of rotary shafts 416 on which various gears of the driving device 440 are supported.

The main body laterally elongated portion 411 is provided with outer frames 411a protruding in the form of walls toward the front side from the upper and left and right edges. The outer frame 411a is a portion with which the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length in the thickness direction of the slide body portion 431 of the suspension member 430 (perpendicular to the slide plane of the suspension member 430). formed long.

The slide plane of the suspension member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410 .

The guide hole 415 extends from the bottom right to the top left of the base member 410 .

The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap with the base member 410, and is formed in a plate shape that is substantially the same shape as the main body laterally elongated portion 411 when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 drilled in an elongated shape along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 .

Since the main body portion 421 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the main body laterally elongated portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the suspension member 430 is swayed in the front-rear direction when the suspension member 430 is slid, the suspension member 430 does not move in the front-rear direction. The contact area between the main body laterally elongated portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420 can be equally secured regardless of the contact area.

The suspension member 430 is a member that is disposed in a gap formed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and slides along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and has a rack gear on its upper side surface. A horizontally elongated plate-shaped slide main body portion 431 engraved, a recessed groove 432 formed in a groove shape on the back side of the slide main body portion 431 and abutting against the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410, and a slide A plate-shaped bent arm portion 433 that hangs down from a substantially central portion of the main body portion 431 and is bent toward the overhang position side in the middle, and a slide main body portion 431 at a portion where the bent arm portion 433 of the slide main body portion 431 starts to hang down. A swing shaft 434 protruding toward the front side from the bottom, and a cylindrical suspension tube 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (overhanging end) of the bent arm portion 433. .

The slide body portion 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 . Therefore, the suspending member 430 can slide between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the fastening direction of the cover member 420 to the base member 410).

The recessed groove 432 is formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413 , and the suspension member 430 slides obliquely downward as the recessed groove 432 slides on the guide rib portion 413 . be moved.

The bent arm portion 433 extends along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, and extends along the base member 410 when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. A portion formed below the body laterally elongated portion 411 of is provided with an increased thickness portion 433a formed by increasing the thickness toward the front side. The thickness of the bent arm portion 433 closer to the slide main body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a is formed to be thinner than the slide main body portion 431 and the thickened portion 433a. As a result, deformation in the thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is locally generated in the bent arm portion 433 closer to the slide main body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a. Also, the thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction in which the rack gear is engraved (sliding direction).

The swing shaft 434 is a shaft that passes through the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and protrudes toward the front side of the cover member 420 , and is inserted through the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450 .

The suspension tube 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450 . As a result, the auxiliary member 450 can be stored between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIGS. 21(a) and 25(a)). Become.

The driving device 440 is a device that is formed in such a manner that each member sandwiches the base member 410 from the front and back and generates a driving force necessary for moving the suspension member 430 . A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft penetrating therethrough, a drive gear 442 supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and arranged on the front surface of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442. and a pair of transmission gears 443 that are supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416 respectively.

One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper surface of the slide body portion 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshing with the transmission gears 443 is slid.

The auxiliary member 450 is a member arranged on the front side of the cover member 420 , one end of which is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 and the other end of which slides into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 . A main body portion 451 formed in a long plate-like shape, a swing hole 452 drilled in one end, and a slide shaft 453 projecting in the rearward direction at the other end, A suspending shaft 454 protruding from an intermediate position of the body portion 451 toward the rear side is mainly provided.

The auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the suspension member 430, and the other end thereof is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 25). formed in Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed in such a manner that it approaches (swings) the distal end of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides to the retracted position. As a result, even if the suspension member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the suspension member 430 abuts against the auxiliary member 450 to suppress the wobble of the suspension member 430 .

The swing hole 452 is externally fitted and pivotally supported on the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 . Thereby, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be able to swing around the swing shaft 434 . That is, as the suspension member 430 slides, the auxiliary member 450 swings (tilts) about the swing shaft 434 .

The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 . As a result, the other end of the auxiliary member 450 (lower right end in front view) is slid along the extension direction of the guide hole 415 . Incidentally, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is arranged at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). , the slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415 .

The tilting member 460 is pivotally supported by the hanging tube 435 of the hanging member 430 and has an independent drive source (driving device 464). , a first cover member 462 fastened to the lower part of the base member 461 from the front side and forming a gap between the base member 461 and the first cover member 462 and the base member 461 , a driving device 464 for generating a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463 , a driving device 464 connected to the transmission device 463 and the longitudinal direction of the base member 461 . It mainly includes a moving base member 465 formed to be slidable in a direction, and a second cover member 466 disposed on the front side of the moving base member 465 and fastened and fixed to the moving base member 465 .

The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a suspension shaft 461 a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the rear side and is internally fitted and pivotally supported in the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430 . , a connecting shaft 461b juxtaposed with the suspension shaft 461a, a storage portion 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and formed in a box shape with an opening directed toward the back side, and a front side above the storage portion 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d protruding to the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461. As shown in FIG.

The housing portion 461c forms a space for housing the drive device 464, and has a hole formed in the bottom thereof for allowing the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 to pass therethrough.

The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a supported by a drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and supported by a pair of rotation shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears. 463b, mainly includes a crank pin 463c protruding at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b arranged on the moving base member 465 side.

The crankpin 463c is rotated around the rotary shaft 461d by rotating the drive gear 463a and the transmission gear 463b.

The moving base member 465 is a member formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) protruding from the back side and posture maintaining pins 465a that are inserted through a plurality of slide holes 461e. , an elongated slide hole 465b extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a pair of bulky portions 465c protruding from the front side.

Since the crankpin 463c of the transmission gear 463b is connected to the slide hole 465b, the moving base member 465 moves along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crankpin 463c is changed. is slid.

The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in a state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 is also slid as the moving base member 465 is slid.

The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is made of a resin material. A suspension hole 471 to be supported, and a tubular portion 472 formed in a tubular shape at the lower end portion and fitted and pivotally supported on the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be swingable are provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 with the suspension member 430 arranged at the extended position. The state in which the first cover member 466 is slid upward is shown by broken lines, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

The tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is driven by the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23), so that the second cover member 466 is slid, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in the front view (see FIG. 24) is changed. You can perform a production that changes.

Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspending member 430, vibration and wobbling are likely to occur when the tilting member 460 changes its outer shape. Since this embodiment has a plurality of structures for suppressing the vibration and wobble, these will be described below.

With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspending member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 21(a)) will be described in detail. 25(a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25(b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. 25(a) and 25(b) illustrate a state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the upper end position (retracted position) of the movement path along which the suspension member 430 slides, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), the suspending member 430 is arranged at the retracted position, so that the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 pivotally supported by the suspending member 430 are shifted to the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 25(a)). 2) is moved to the right outside of the display area P.

At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is housed at a position on the front side of the hanging member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460 . That is, since the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 25(a)), the thickness direction view of the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 can be compactly arranged compared to the total area of the individual members in the Therefore, the space on the right outer side of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and a large display area P can be secured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspending member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and the base member 433 is located on the rear surface of the protruding end side (tip side). A body longitudinal portion 412 of member 410 is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 at the retracted position.

Further, in this embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity of the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430, and the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bent arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases the length of the bent arm portion 433 as the suspension member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. It is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

Therefore, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the projecting margin (extending length ) is shortened. As a result, even if the suspension member 430 wobbles due to the tilting member 460 being driven, the length from the contact position between the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the suspension member 430 is formed short. Therefore, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the suspension member 430 in the thickness direction (wobble of the distal end of the bent arm portion 433) at the retracted position.

Here, the sliding movement of the suspending member 430 will be described. Since the hanging member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with a recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back side, the hanging member 430 is slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 . As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends in a straight line obliquely downward (from the upper right in FIG. 25(a) to the lower left in FIG. 25(a)).

The suspension member 430 is slid when the driving force of the driving device 440 is transmitted. For example, when the suspending member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the driving force of the drive motor 441 moves the driving gear 442 from the state where the suspending member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). is rotated clockwise in a front view, the rotation rotates the pair of transmission gears 443, and the rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (the left side in FIG. 25(a)) is moved. , the hanging member 430 having the rack gear on its upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspending member 430 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 21(b)) will be described in detail. 26(a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26(b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. FIG. 26(a) and 26(b) show a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (overhanging position) of the movement path along which the suspension member 430 slides, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially shown. abbreviated to

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the lower end of the slide main body 431 in the moving direction (lower left end in FIG. 26( a )) is positioned on the outer frame of the base member 410 . 411a. Further, as described above, since the suspension member 430 moves downward toward the extended position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the suspension member 430 is canceled, the position of the suspension member 430 can be changed. It can be reliably maintained in the extended position.

For example, when the direction of sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is the horizontal direction, even if the suspension member 430 is arranged in the overhang position, gravity is not applied in the direction of sliding movement, so the suspension member 430 can be extended. A separate force must be applied to keep it in position.

On the other hand, according to the suspending member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the driving device 440 to the suspending member 430 is canceled, the component force of gravity acts in the direction of the slide movement. Lower member 430 can be maintained in the extended position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the portion where the bent arm portion 433 is accommodated between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 is a position where the suspension member 430 is retracted. It becomes smaller than when it is arranged at the position (see FIG. 25(b)). Therefore, it is difficult for the base member 410 and the cover member 420 to suppress the wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 .

On the other hand, the root side of the bent arm portion 433 extends in the extending direction of the auxiliary member 450 (lower left direction in FIG. 26(b)) in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position. As a result, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the overhang position, the overlapping area between the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430 is widened.

As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is separated from the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420, and when the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, is formed so as to be able to abut on the When the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the thin portion of the bending arm portion 433 (the portion closer to the slide body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a) protrudes from the base member 410 and the cover member 420. In addition, it is possible to make the bending arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 wobble in the thickness direction due to the driving of the tilting member 460 (wobble in the thickness direction becomes dominant). As a result, the suspension member 430 can be prevented from wobbling in the sliding direction.

In addition, the thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (the portion closer to the slide body portion 431 than the thickened portion 433a) extends in the lateral direction (sliding direction) of the slide body portion 431 that is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and slides. direction). As a result, the wobble caused by driving the tilting member 460 can be absorbed by the bending of the bending arm 433, and the wobble of the slide main body 431 in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 26) can be suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide main body portion 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, thereby suppressing abrasion of the slide main body portion 431 in the thickness direction.

For example, an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431 may extend in the lateral direction of the slide body portion 431, and the distal end side of the arm portion may be formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the deflection, the tip of the arm having the same thickness as the slide main body 431 wobbles, and the wobble of the arm is transmitted to the slide main body 431. As a result, the slide main body 431 may wobble.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the base of the bent arm portion 433 extending from the slide main body portion 431 is made thin from its base, the wobble generated at the tip of the bent arm portion 433 is used to flex the thin portion, and the slide body The effect of preventing the portion 431 from shaking can be enhanced.

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26(a). As shown in FIG. 27, since the bent arm portion 433 includes the thickened portion 433a that increases in thickness toward the auxiliary member 450 side, when the bent arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the suspension member 430, the wobbling The bending arm portion 433 can be easily brought into contact with the auxiliary member 450 from when the amplitude of is small.

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the suspension member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, its movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 serves as a stopper that prevents the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 from moving forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the suspension member 430 in the thickness direction when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is higher than the lower end of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2). placed slightly above. Here, when the tilting member 460 does not change its posture with respect to the suspension member 430 (when it is fixed), the suspension member 430 is tilted downward toward the extended position and slid. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the hanging member 430 must be arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be arranged at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the downward tilt.

As a result, extra space is required on the right side of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 is reduced.

However, in this embodiment, as the hanging member 430 moves toward the extended position, the tilting member 460 changes its posture so that it is lifted by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is hung. It is lifted against member 430 . As a result, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 25(a)) and the lower end position of the hanging member 430 when it is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 26(a)) )) is located at substantially the same height (the vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

Therefore, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position, there is no need to arrange the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the downward inclination, and the tilting member 460 is not required to be arranged to the right of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the driving device 464 is arranged. Therefore, when the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is lifted and tilted, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is the fulcrum of the wobble of the suspension member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. Wobble of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of 430 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the drive device 464 (see FIG. 22), a force R in the direction of rotation about the suspension tube 435 is applied downward by gravity. This force R pulls the auxiliary member 450 to the connecting member 470 . At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives force in the direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415 . Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved, and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented. can.

As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450 . As a result, a resistance force against wobble that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the suspension member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so that wobble of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the suspension member 430, all vibrations and wobbles generated in the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the suspension member 430. The power can be transmitted separately to the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 . As a result, it is not necessary to set the rigidity of the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 excessively, and the degree of freedom in designing the hanging member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be improved.

Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing motion unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be able to form a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33(b)) by rotating the reflecting member 520 . Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 forming a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 pivotally supported in shaft supporting grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and a reflecting member 520. A first lid member 530 having a shaft support hole 531 into which a rotating shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted, and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the driving portion side of the reflecting member 520. , a transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 that meshes with the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engraved, a driving device 560 that generates driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and transmission of the driving device 560 and a cover member 570 arranged on the back side of the gear group 562 and fastened and fixed to the base member 510 .

The base member 510 includes a bottom portion 511 having a rectangular opening in the center and formed in the shape of a plane frame, and vertically extending from the right end of the bottom portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom portion 511. and a second wall portion 513 extending vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511 . The opening of the bottom portion 511 is an opening for disposing a substrate (not shown) having a light source such as an LED. be.

The bottom surface portion 511 extends vertically on the right side of the bottom surface portion 511 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 30), and has an elongated slide hole 511a for guiding the transmission member 550 .

The slide holes 511a are arranged in a plurality (four places in this embodiment) in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30) of the bottom surface portion 511 in such a manner that the extending directions of the slide holes 511a are arranged in a straight line. The slide hole 511a has an elongated hole extending from the lower end thereof in the direction in which the slide hole 511a extends. A rib slide hole 511b is formed.

Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a plurality of rotation shafts 511c protruding toward the rear side below the opening and on which a transmission gear group 562 of the driving device 560 is supported.

The first wall portion 512 is formed with a plurality of shaft supporting grooves 512a which are U-shaped grooves cut from the front side to the rear side and have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member. The intervals between the axial support grooves 512a are equal and shorter than the width dimension of the reflecting member 520 (longitudinal dimension when viewed in the rotation axis direction).

The second wall portion 513 includes a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a arranged to face the shaft support grooves 512a and formed in the same manner as the shaft support grooves 512a, and adjacent shaft support grooves 513a among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. An extending portion 513b is formed between the grooves 513a and extends from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (front side in FIG. 29).

The extending portion 513b is formed in a stepped shape whose width dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 29) becomes smaller toward the front side. mated to.

The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source. a pair of rotating shafts 522 projecting from each other, and a rotating gear 523 fastened and fixed by aligning the shafts with the rotating shaft 522 on the side of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is arranged. Prepare.

The body portion 521 has a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) chamfered on the end surface in the width direction.

The rotating shaft 522 is formed at the center position in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29) of the body portion 521 . In addition, since the rotating shaft 522 on the side of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on which the transmission member 550 is arranged is extended longer, the second wall portion between the rotating gear 523 and the main body portion 521 is provided. 513 is formed to be deployable.

The rotary gear 523 has an expanded tooth 523a, in which adjacent teeth are connected and whose diameter from the center of rotation is longer than the other teeth. Excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented by the expansion tooth 523a.

The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (horizontal direction in FIG. 29), and includes a plurality of shafts through which the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is inserted. A support hole 531 and a portion vertically extending toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface of the first lid member 530 (surface on the near side in FIG. 29), and the front side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531 an extended lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the .

Here, for example, when the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, as in the present embodiment, if the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, the first wall The thickness of the portion 512 is an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the rendering of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 as one.

On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed from the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (horizontal direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the wall on the right side of the reflecting member 520 can be adjusted regardless of the diameter of the fastening screw head. can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not become an obstacle, and the reversing operation unit 500 and the presentation in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 can be easily visually recognized as one. You can improve the effect.

At least two methods of assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530 can be used. For example, firstly, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first cover member 530 to the base member 510 in a state in which the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is fitted in the shaft support grooves 512 a and 513 a of the base member 510 . With this method, the reflecting member 520 can be inserted through the pivot hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at once.

Secondly, in a state where the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 , the rotating shaft 522 on the opposite side of the reflecting member 520 to the drive unit side is inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 . There is a method of inserting the rotating shaft 522 on the driving part side into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall part 512 after inserting it in an oblique direction (direction diagonally from the front side to the right back).

Referring to FIG. 31, the fitting relationship among the axial support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530 and the reflecting member 520 will be described. 31(a) is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31(b) is a partial sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31(a). Note that FIG. 31(a) shows the side surface to which the first lid member 530 is fastened.

As shown in FIG. 31( a ), the depth of the axial support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 is formed substantially equal to the diameter of the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 . Therefore, even if the first lid member 530 is not formed with the shaft support hole 531 , the reflecting member 520 is positioned between the shaft support groove 512 a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530 . is positioned and pivoted between

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the depth of the axial support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the axial support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is pivotally supported between the shaft supporting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530 as described above, and It is also pivotally supported in the pivot hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31(b)).

Therefore, a large area for supporting the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 can be secured. This is particularly effective in the configuration of this embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may become difficult to secure a sufficient area of the shaft support groove 512a that supports the reflection member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first cover member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. As shown in FIG. As a result, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflecting member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for supporting the reflecting member 520 can be secured.

Returning to FIG. 30, description will be made. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the driving portion side of the reflecting member 520 on the base member 510. The extended shaft support portion 542 protrudes from the base member 542 toward the back side and extends in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30), and the extended shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541 are protrudingly connected. and a positioning projecting portion 543 .

The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . 32(a) is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32(b) is a partial sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc of FIG. 32(b), and FIG. It is a sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the plurality of positioning protrusions 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extensions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. As a result, the second lid member 540 can be precisely aligned with the base member 510 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32(b)).

Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low. force is applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(c), in this embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 abuts from the thickness direction of the extended portion 513b of the base member 510 (horizontal direction in FIG. 32(c)). touched. Thereby, the rigidity in the thickness direction of the second wall portion 513 can be improved.

The extending direction end of the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 and the end of the base member 510 where the shaft support groove 513a is formed are in contact with each other to close the open end of the shaft support groove 513a ( See FIG. 32(d)). As a result, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is supported by the hole formed by the shaft support groove 513a and the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32(b)).

Returning to FIG. 29, description will be made. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflecting member 520, and is formed in a long plate shape and is a body portion that abuts against the rear surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, a long plate-shaped extended wall portion 552 extending from the end face (the left end face in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 551 to the front side, and intermittently on the front end face of the extended wall portion 552 A first rack gear 553 is engraved and meshed with the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) are arranged on the front side of the main body portion 551 and slide the base member 510. The slide shafts 554 connected to the holes 511a and the slide shafts 554 at the upper and lower ends of the slide shafts 554 extend downward from the width dimension of the rib portion slide holes 511b (see FIG. 30) of the base member 510. and a second rack gear 556 engraved on the side surface of the main body 551 and meshing with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 .

In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously arranged are arranged at intervals slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. Due to this space, over-rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented, as will be described later in detail.

The driving device 560 is a device for generating a driving force, and includes a driving gear 561 supported by a driving shaft, a gear meshing with the driving gear 561 and a second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550 . and a transmission gear group 562 that is a plurality of gears including a gear that engages with the plurality of rotating shafts 511c.

When the driving gear 561 of the driving device 560 rotates, the transmission gear group 562 rotates and the driving force of the driving device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 through the second rack gear 556 . The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511 a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560 . Since the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 meshes with the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 , the transmission member 550 is slid to rotate the reflection member 520 about the rotation shaft 522 .

FIGS. 33(a), 33(b) and 33(c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in chronological order, and FIGS. 33(d) and 33. 33(e) and 33(f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 illustrating the rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 in chronological order, and FIG. 5 is a partial side view of a transmission member 550; FIG.

33, the illustration of the second lid member 540 is omitted, and FIGS. 33(a) and 33(d) show a state (closed state) in which the body portions 521 of the reflecting member 520 are brought into contact with each other. 33(b) and 33(e) show a state (open state) in which the reflecting member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIGS. 33(a) and 33(d), and FIG. ) and FIG. 33(f), the surface of the reflecting member 520 opposite to the surface facing the front in FIGS. A state (closed state) in which the 521 are in contact with each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 33(d), in the closed state, the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is meshed with the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 and its rotation is restricted.

A rotation operation of the reflecting member 520 will be described. 33(d), when the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33(d)) by the driving device 560 (see FIG. 29), the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated, the body portion 521 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated (see FIG. 33(e)). Further, the first rack gear 553 is slid leftward, so that the reflecting members 520 are rotated until their surfaces in the thickness direction contact each other, and the transmitting member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33(f)).

Here, at the terminal position of the slide movement of the transmission member 550, the reflecting member 520 is brought into contact with the end to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 are not meshed with high precision, the posture of the reflecting member 520 in the state where the transmitting member 550 is arranged at the terminal position of the slide movement is can be stabilized.

In the closed state, the reflection member 520 abuts on the end of the body portion 521 in the thickness direction. At this time, since the area between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the reflecting member 520. can.

Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-like shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, while the shutter member is sliding from a state in which the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player sees the entire light becomes longer.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflecting member 520 suppresses leakage of light in the closed state, and allows the light emitted to the player to pass through when the reflecting member 520 rotates from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflective members 520 can serve the same role as the single shutter member described above by way of example. That is, each reflecting member 520 can be made smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, the time required for the player to see the entire light can be shortened by rotating the reflecting member 520 compared to the case of sliding the shutter member.

In addition, in this embodiment, by rotating the reflecting member 520, the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in the front view (see FIG. 32A) is reduced, so that the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member becomes visible. Therefore, the installation space of the reflection operation unit 500 can be saved.

The chamfered portions 521a of the reflecting member 520 are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). As a result, the distance between the reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members 520 can be made flatter.

For example, when a pattern that is recognized integrally on the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction is formed on the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction, the boundaries between the adjacent reflecting members 520 are made inconspicuous, and the pattern is formed. deviation can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more beautifully.

The distance from the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 to the outer end of the expansion tooth 523 a is formed longer than the distance from the rotating shaft 522 to the body portion 551 of the transmission member 550 . 33(a), the rotation gear 523 cannot be rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. As a result, excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented, and damage to the reflecting member 520 due to excessive pressure generated on the contact surface of the reflecting member 520 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the first rack gear 553 is arranged with an interval slightly shorter than the interval in the case where one tooth is omitted from the group of teeth in which four teeth are continuously arranged. ), the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Get stuck in. In this case, the rotation gear 523 cannot be rotated any more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflecting member 520 from being damaged at the chamfered portion 521a, which is the contact surface, due to excessive rotation of the reflecting member 520. FIG.

Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. FIG. 35(a) and 35(b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. 35(a) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 35(b) shows the pair of first slide members 720 and a pair of second slide members 740 are arranged in the extended position (the front side of the display area P of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2).

In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display region P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display region It is formed so that P can be divided into a lattice. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. 36 and 38 show the disassembled state of the base member 710 and members arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and FIGS. A state in which the members arranged on the side are disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second sliding operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening forming the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third pattern display device 81 in the center. 710, a first slide shaft S1 fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710 and having its longitudinal direction aligned with the horizontal direction, and sliding along the first slide shaft S1. A pair of first slide members 720 to be moved, and a front side cover member 730 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and formed as a pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 are mainly used. Prepare.

The second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 with a predetermined gap from the rear surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft S2 whose longitudinal direction coincides with the vertical direction, and a second slide shaft S2. A pair of second slide members 740 slidably moved along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 provided with a plurality of gears meshing with the second slide members 740, and a pair of second slide members 740. and rear side cover members 760 which are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the rear side of the transmission device 750 and which are formed on the left, right, and upper portions, and the first slide members 720 and and a driving device 770 that generates driving force for sliding the second slide member 740 .

As shown in FIG. 36, the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, so one of them (the left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

The first slide member 720 includes a body portion 721 formed in an L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front, a carriage portion 722 fastened and fixed to the body portion 721, and extending downward from the lower end of the carriage portion 722. A decoration part 723 is provided.

The body portion 721 has a rack portion 721a which is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the left-right direction and has a rack gear engraved on the top surface thereof, and a rack portion 721a which is continuously provided below the rack portion 721a and which is connected to the rack portion 721a. and a plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b disposed on the left side in a front view.

The carriage part 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the carriage receiving part 721b with its left end aligned with the left end of the carriage receiving part 721b. The carriage portion 722 is arranged inside the carriage body portion 722a, which is formed in a U-shaped cross section by wall portions projecting from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface toward the front side. and a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed having a rotating shaft perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged as a left and right pair.

The rotating body group 722b includes a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is formed slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to protrude slightly outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body portion 722a.

The first slide shaft S1 has a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends thereof, and is made of a metal material such as stainless steel.

An arrangement mode of the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body groups 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. As a result, the carriage portion 722a is disposed between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft S1. Further, the base member 710 is thereby reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft S1.

Next, the truck receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the truck portion 722 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the first slide member 720 is slidably supported by the first slide shaft S1.

In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 meshes with the transmission gear that meshes with the driving gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the drive device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, thereby causing the first slide member 720 to slide left and right.

When the first slide member 720 slides, the rotor group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft S1, so that the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft S1 can be reduced, thereby reducing friction. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged on the left and right sides and are brought into contact with the first slide shaft S1, wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft S1 can be stabilized.

The front side cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is arranged on the base member 710 . The lower cover member 730 is arranged on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723 . As a result, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (front left direction in FIG. 36) around the first slide shaft S1, the wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 includes transmission cylinders 711 and 712 which are arranged to penetrate in the front-rear direction and which are axially rotatable. A fixed gear portion 713 extending vertically and having gears engraved on a wall surface facing inward (rightward in FIG. 38), and a rack gear 754 (see FIG. 38) meshing with the fixed gear portion 713 39)), and a guide wall portion 715 projecting from the rear surface of the base member 710 on the right side of the rear view and extending in the vertical direction. and are mainly provided.

The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 have drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed, and are members that transmit the driving force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720 .

The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a engraved on a wall surface facing inward (to the left in FIG. 38).

As shown in FIG. 37, the second slide member 740 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, so one of them (upper part of FIG. 37) will be explained here, and the explanation of the other will be omitted.

The second slide member 740 includes a main body portion 741 formed in a long plate shape, a carriage portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and a left end of the carriage portion 742 extending leftward from the front view. A decoration part 743 is provided.

The body portion 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface thereof.

The carriage part 742 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body part 741 with its upper end aligned with the upper end of the main body part 741 . The carriage portion 742 includes a carriage body portion 742a formed with a U-shaped cross section by wall portions projecting from the left and right ends of the plate-shaped bottom surface to the front side, and a carriage body portion 742a formed perpendicular to the bottom surface inside the carriage body portion 742a. and a rotating body group 742b in which a pair of left and right rotating bodies formed with such rotating shafts are arranged as a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies.

The rotor group 742b includes a pair of left and right rotors arranged vertically in parallel, and the length of the left-right interval is slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft S2.

The decorative portion 743 has a pair of upper and lower deflection suppression gears 743a pivotally supported by a shaft protruding toward the rear at the left end in front view.

The second slide shaft S2 has a pair of fastening plate portions S2a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

The manner in which the second slide member 740 is arranged on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage portion 742. As shown in FIG. As a result, the second slide member 740 is slidably supported by the second slide shaft S2. Moreover, the base member 710 is thereby reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft S2.

Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the body portion 741 is arranged between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft S2.

Here, the rack gear carved from the body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 meshes with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710 . Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

When the second slide member 740 slides, the rotor group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft S2, so the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft S2 can be reduced, reducing friction. In addition, since a pair of right and left rotating bodies are arranged vertically and abut against the second slide shaft S2, the second slide member 740 can be restrained from wobbling at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft S2 can be stabilized.

Here, the body portion 741 having a rack gear that meshes with the rolling gear 714 (drive portion side) and the carriage portion 742 that sandwiches the second slide shaft S2 are arranged in the same direction in the extension direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the bending of the second slide member 740 with the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state between the rack gear and the rolling gear 714 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the disengagement of the meshing state.

As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 770 to the second slide member 740, and includes a long plate-shaped body portion 751 and a rear side of the body portion 751. A drive gear 752 to which drive shafts 773a and 774a of a drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752, and teeth meshed with the transmission gear. and a rack gear 754 that is a long plate-shaped member that extends in the direction and that is slidably moved up and down along the long slide hole 751 a of the main body 751 .

In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one (upper) of the pair of upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

The body portion 751 is provided with a long slide hole 751a formed in a long hole shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

The rack gear 754 has a cylindrical shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) projecting vertically from the front surface and penetrating through the long slide hole 751a of the main body portion 751. As shown in FIG. The shaft support portion 754 a is inserted through the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714 .

Here, the manner in which the driving force is transmitted to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated through the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It slides up and down along the longitudinal direction of the long slide hole 751a.

Since the shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, when the rack gear 754 is slid up and down, the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down. .

At this time, the rolling gear 714 meshes with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710 and also meshes with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713 . That is, the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the body portion 741 form a double rack and pinion mechanism, and the second slide member 740 moves with respect to the rack gear 754 at double speed.

The rear side cover member 760 includes a rear drive section cover member 761 arranged on the drive section side of the second slide member 740 , a rear upper cover member 762 arranged above, and a rear drive section cover member 761 . and a rear retaining cover member 763 arranged facing the direction.

The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the transmission device 750 , and driving motors 773 and 774 of the driving device 770 for driving the second slide member 740 are fastened and fixed to the rear surface.

The rear upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the base member 710 , and driving motors 771 and 772 of the driving device 770 for driving the first slide member 720 are fastened and fixed to the rear surface.

The rear retaining cover member 763 is formed on the rear surface of the decorative portion 743 on the extended end side, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating rearward about the second slide shaft S2 and falling out.

The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740 . These drive motors 771, 772, 773, 774 are provided with drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, 774a, respectively.

An example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 . FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 40(a), the state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are respectively arranged at the retracted positions is shown in FIG. 40(b). FIG. 40(c) shows a state where the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position shown in FIG. 40(b) to the right in front view by a predetermined amount. 40(a) to 40(c), illustration of the upper front side cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front side cover members 730 is omitted.

Here, transmission of driving force to the driving gears 711a and 712a when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid will be described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in front view) from the retracted position shown in FIG. are slid toward the overhanging position and abutted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 40(b)).

A drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side in the front view of the pair of first slide members 720 is in the state shown in FIG. 40(b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force just before reaching. In this embodiment, since the contact between the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722, it is unnecessary to consider the bending of the decoration portion 723 in the sliding direction. Therefore, the contact positions of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

The pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b projects slightly outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body portion 722a, so that the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact with each other. At this time, the rotating bodies protruding outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the carriage receiving part 721b and the carriage body part 722a of the carriage part 722 are pressed. be done. That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies of the rotating body group 722b projecting outward from the contact surface side. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked while the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, so that the impact when the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact can be reduced.

After the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, a driving motor 771 generates a driving force for sliding the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side of the pair of first slide members 720 when viewed from the front. (see FIG. 35) (by pushing the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side in front view against the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side in front view). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40(c)).

That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without causing the drive motors 771 and 772 to cooperate. As a result, the power consumption of the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35) as a whole can be suppressed.

Further, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 are driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load increases more than when only one of the first slide members 720 is driven. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, there is no need to consider the gravitational load as in the case of vertical movement. occur equally in each.

Therefore, it is easy to adjust the motor life of the drive motors 771 and 772 (see FIG. 35), and it is possible to easily adjust the replacement timing of the drive motors 771 and 772 . As a result, the frequency of maintenance of the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

An example of a movement mode of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 . FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in chronological order.

In FIG. 41(a), the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted positions. FIG. 41(c) shows a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 are moved upward by a predetermined amount from the position shown in FIG. 41(b).

Here, transmission of driving force to the driving gear 752 (see FIG. 39) when the pair of second slide members 740 slide will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41(a), the drive gear 752 is rotated by the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive motor 774 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are slid toward the overhanging position and abutted at the overhanging position (see FIG. 41(b)).

A driving motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates a driving force for sliding the second slide member 740 arranged on the upper side in the front view of the pair of second slide members 740 reaches the state shown in FIG. 41(b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before.

After the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, a drive motor 774 ( 35) (by pushing the second slide member 740 arranged on the upper side in the front view against the second slide member 740 arranged in the lower side in the front view), the pair of second slide members 740 It is slid upward (see FIG. 41(c)).

That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without cooperatively operating the drive motors 773 and 774 (see FIG. 35). As a result, the power consumption of the drive motors 773 and 774 as a whole can be suppressed.

Here, when the member moving downward changes its moving direction upward, the load on the driving motor increases due to the influence of gravity, which may shorten the life of the motor. In addition, since it takes a long deceleration time to change the direction, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of performance may be reduced.

However, in this embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes its moving direction from the downward movement to the upward movement, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. You can use the momentum of movement. As a result, it is possible to reduce the motor load that occurs when the direction of the second slide member 740 is changed due to the influence of gravity, and it is possible to prolong the life of the motor. Also, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of presentation can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the action of the bending suppression gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. It should be noted that illustration of the back retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back side cover member 760 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, the end portion of the second slide member 740 opposite to the end portion supported by the second slide shaft S2 contacts the receiving gear portion 715a of the base member 710 via the deflection suppression gear 743a. touched.

Here, when the second slide member 740 is started, the meshing relationship between the deflection suppression gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the deflection suppression gear 743a rotates smoothly. The resistance generated between the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required when starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other by the carriage portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decoration portion 743, and the side of the decoration portion 743 on which the deflection suppression gear 743a is arranged is transferred. is slanted with respect to the guide wall 715 . As a result, the load from the deflection suppression gear 743a to the receiving gear portion 715 is increased. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) with the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppression gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppression gears 743a becomes the receiving gear. It is pressed against part 715 .

As a result, a force is applied to the second slide member 740 in the direction of restoring the inclination of the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

Further, the contact surface between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 can be increased by forming the contact between the gears. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage between the second slide members 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 abut against each other. can improve the effect of

<Regarding the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
Details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable prize winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b to form a first variable prize winning device. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. A LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening and closing for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that protrudes to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear cover body 65j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g, and its rear cover A channel solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the channel solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. consists of

50 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 50(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 50(b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 50(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51(b).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter, by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning hole 65a.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the second winning port 640 side. configured to be induced. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately after the big hit game, the game method is changed to left-handed. It can reduce the time and effort required to make changes. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 50(b). As shown in FIG. 50(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration for distributing game balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 51(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball passing through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability variable switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a high probability game state (variable probability game state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h has a configuration for distributing the game state after the jackpot to a low-probability game state (normal game state) or a probability variable game state.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is changed by the flow-down route of the game balls that have entered the first variable winning port 65 during the big win game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the big win game. can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable prize winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. . The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Further, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the winning game ball of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. It is Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variable grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantage and disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 51(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 51(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 13th round in a state in which the game ball that won before the 13th round is not discharged, and wins even if the jackpot B is the variable probability switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting variable probability game states separately from the first variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, referring to FIG. 110, the relationship between the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second prize winning port 640 will be described. An opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the right side of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A guideway leading to the general prize winning opening 65b1 is formed. When game balls enter the general winning hole 65b1, 10 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray. Here, when the game ball is played in a right-handed game method in which the game ball is shot to pass the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, it does not roll on the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning device 65 pass through this opening and enter the general winning opening 65b1. A plurality of game nails are provided on the upper part of the first variable winning device 65 for changing the rolling direction of the game ball.

Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angles of the game nails K2 and K3 are adjusted as means for adjusting the proportion of the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval between them is narrowed. or wider. Here, the game shop reduces the number of game balls that enter the specific prize winning port 65a at the time of the big win, so that the number of game balls to be launched increases even though 10 balls are entered in one round, thereby increasing profits. It is conceivable that However, in the configuration of this embodiment, if the game peg K2 is tilted to the left to make it difficult to enter the specific prize-winning port 65a, the gap between the adjustment pegs K1 and K2 becomes wider, and the opening on the right side of the opening/closing door 65f1 Easier to enter. Further, if the game nail K1 is narrowed in order to narrow the space between the game nails K1 and K2, the passage on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the opening on the right side of the opening/closing door 65f1 through the passage. It becomes easier to hit the ball. Therefore, even when the jackpot game is not in progress, the probability of winning the general prize-winning port 65b1 increases, and the damage to the game parlor increases. Nails can be restrained from being adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the interest of the game is remarkably reduced due to the adjustment on the amusement arcade side.

Further, by tilting the game nail K1 in the right direction, the gap between the game nails K2 and K3 is narrowed to reduce the winning rate of the specific winning hole 65a. becomes easier to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning port 640 becomes high, and the ratio of winning to the second winning port 640 during the time-saving game or the probability variable game state becomes high, and the damage on the game parlor side becomes large. , it is possible to prevent the winning rate of the specific winning hole 65a from being set low. A plurality of game pegs are arranged between the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second prize winning port 640, and the game ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 in the left direction. All of them are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640 . The game nail disposed between the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second prize winning port 640 is arranged so that all the game balls are guided to the second prize winning port 640 even if adjusted.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. FIG. First, a swing motion unit 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed. A state in which the drive gear 2341 is engaged (engaged state) and a state in which the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are disengaged (disengaged state) can be formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 showing the swinging motions of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in the second embodiment in chronological order. It is a diagram.

Note that the body portion 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated by imaginary lines. FIG. 43(c) shows the state in which the arm member 320 has been swung from the extended position to the retracted position by a predetermined amount, and FIG. In FIG. 44(b), the state where the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c), and in FIG. ) shows a state in which the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 so that the arm member 320 is arranged in the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the driving gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed so as to engage with each other.

The drive gear 2341 includes a body portion 2341a that is axially viewed from the drive shaft and formed in a fan shape in a front view, and an ejector pin 2341b that protrudes toward the front side in the vicinity of the peripheral surface of the body portion 2341a.

The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 that protrudes toward the front side at the end of the regulating sliding portion 351 opposite to the front view.

The base member 2310 is provided with a swing shaft 2318 projecting to the front side at the lower right side of the support position of the driving gear 2341 when viewed from the front.

The L-shaped lever 2380 includes a first main body portion 2381 which is formed in a long rod shape and whose one end is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310, and one end of the first main body portion 2381. A second main body portion 2382 which is swingably pivotally supported at the other end on the opposite side and formed into a long bar shape, and a long hole-shaped hole extending along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382. and a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. In addition, the L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so that the front side of the driving gear 2341 can swing, and is formed so as to contact the pushing pin 2341b when the driving gear 2341 rotates.

A case in which the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. The arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position when the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 is swung to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled through the pull slide hole 2383 by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350 and tilted toward the transmission device side.

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 43(c), the meshing between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44(a)). Next, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

When the arm member 320 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 43(c)), the regulating slide portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center. and the drive gear 2341 are released, the arm member 320 is maintained at the retracted position.

44(a), the drive gear 2341 is further rotated to push the L-shaped lever 2380 outward (to the right in FIG. 44). release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

By slightly rotating the transmission device 2350, the dead center formed by the regulating sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 is rotated by the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) is swung toward the extended position (see FIG. 44(b)).

When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the ejector pin 2341b is positioned to the right of the rotation axis, the L-shaped lever 2380 pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350 again. As a result, the regulating slide portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead center, and the arm member 320 can be maintained at the extended position (see FIG. 44(c)).

That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be disengaged, and the arm member 320 can be disengaged. can reduce the resistance applied to Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the effect of swinging the arm member 320 at high speed from the time of starting can be enhanced.

Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position. swings from the retracted position to the extended position, it does not affect the swinging of the arm member 320 .

Therefore, by setting the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 to be large, a large force is required to swing the arm member 320 from the extended position to the retracted position. , it is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

FIGS. 45(a), 45(b), 46(a), and 46(b) show in time series the motion of swinging the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the extended position in the second embodiment. Fig. 23 is a front view of the swing motion unit 2300 in the form; 45(a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 45(b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 has been swung from the retracted position by a predetermined amount. 46(a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 45(b), and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position. be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the erecting member 330 is gently erected has been described, but in the rocking motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the erecting member 330 is rapidly erected.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the upright hole 2316 of the base member 2310 has a posture changing portion 2316a formed above the bending point and a concentric circle portion 2316b formed near the lower end.

Posture changing portion 2316 a is a portion in which the extending direction of the long hole is oriented toward tubular portion 322 that is the swing axis of arm member 320 . When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides along the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45(b) and 46). (a)). This is because the attitude changing portion 2316a is perpendicular to the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 322 of the arm member 320. As shown in FIG. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides along the concentric circle portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. , the posture of the upright member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

In this embodiment, since the concentric circle portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the erecting hole 2316, it is possible to raise the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. 45(b). The relative orientation of members 330 is maintained.

45(b) to the position shown in FIG. 46(a). When the arm member 320 is swung to the position where the arm member 320 is positioned, the standing member 320 is abruptly raised.

As a result, it is possible to make the posture change abruptly after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the speed of the motion of the swing motion unit 2300 felt by the player.

A first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the connection member 470 is made of resin material, but in the first slide operation unit 2400 of the second embodiment, the connection member 2470 is made of elastic rubber material. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

47(a) is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47(b) is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. FIG. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 has a mass portion 2466m arranged at the upper end.

The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

The connecting shaft 461 b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by a connecting member 2470 .

The connecting member 2470 is an elongated member made of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed so as to be able to expand and contract as the tilting member 2460 swings.

Here, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a, so the tilting member 2460 is formed unstable. Therefore, in a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged at the extended position, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts, the tilting member 2460 swings about the suspension shaft 461a. be moved.

In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 causes the connecting member 2470 to expand and contract, the tilting member 2460 is loaded with elastic force. As a result, a force is applied to the tilting member 2460 in a direction opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 . In this case, the time required for the tilting member 2460 to swing back is shortened, and the motion of the tilting member 2460 is speeded up. Therefore, the speed of the swing motion of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and the effect of the swinging (vibration) of the tilting member 2460 can be effectively performed. be able to.

A second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and is brought into contact with the other first slide member 720. However, the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and one first slide member 2720 is controlled to travel in reverse according to the detection results. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 according to the second embodiment showing an example of the operation of sliding the first slide member 2720 from the retracted position to the extended position in chronological order. 48, illustration of the upper front side cover member 730 is omitted, FIG. 48(a) shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 48(c) shows a state in which the right first slide member 2720 of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount, and FIG. A state in which the member 2720 has been slid a predetermined amount is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is bored in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 48) and extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721c is provided.

The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor arranged on the front side, and is a detection device arranged at a position where transmitted light can pass through the detection hole 2721c by sliding the first slide member 2720. 2716. Note that the detection device 2716 is arranged substantially in the center of the base member 2710 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48(a)).

As shown in FIG. 48(b), the right first slide member 2720 is slid from the state shown in FIG. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 48(c), when the left first slide member 2720 is slid and reaches a position where the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 moves to the left slide member. 2720 is controlled so as to be reversed (slide to the right) at a speed at which it can come into contact with 2720 at the same speed.

That is, while the first slide member 2720 on the left slides, the light transmitted through the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the light transmitted through the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When the penetrating position is reached, transmitted light is detected by the detection device 2716 and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in an elongated shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length of the light transmitted through the detection device 2716. be.

Based on the position information and speed information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse feed acceleration necessary for the right first slide member 2720 to contact the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is calculated. The acceleration is calculated so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side is controlled by the acceleration.

As a result, the impact when the pair of first slide members 2720 abut can be softened, and the durability of the first slide members 2720 can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the variable sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides in the standing holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be arranged in the variable sliding portion 333 and the roller may roll in the standing holes 316 and 2316 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the resistance that occurs when the upright member 330 changes its posture.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from near the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward near the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the dimension of the gap formed between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be changed abruptly in a portion of the guide hole 315 . That is, at least two degrees of change in the gap may be formed. In this case, it is possible to change the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 (to make it steeper or looser).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the dimension of the gap formed between the body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 gradually decreases from near the lower end of the guide hole 315 toward near the upper end. Although the case where it is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the dimension of the gap formed between the body portion 331 and the collar member of the standing member 330 and the base member 310 may be formed in such a manner that it gradually decreases from near the lower end to near the upper end of the standing hole 316. good. In this case, the resistance applied to the standing member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 starts moving from the retracted position to the extended position, and the wobbling of the standing member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position. can do.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the dimension of the gap formed between the main body portion 321 and the collar member of the arm member 320 and the base member 310 is changed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may decrease from the lower end to the upper end. In this case, the degree of reduction of the diameter perpendicular to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed differently on the left and right with respect to the center of the sliding portion 326 .

That is, the right side surface of the guide hole 315 (the right side in FIG. 18A) is a portion formed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. When the arm member 320 moves slightly in the plane direction (direction perpendicular to the plane thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft, the arm member 320 positively abuts thereon. By greatly reducing the degree of reduction of the groove width from a stage close to the retracted position, the arm member 320 can be swung smoothly in the projecting direction.

On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (the left side in FIG. 18(a)) is a portion that abuts when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 falls forward. Therefore, by making the degree of contraction of the groove gentle up to the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 and forming it abruptly in the vicinity of the upper end, the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position is reduced. can be suppressed. That is, when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position or when the arm member 320 falls forward, it is possible to prevent the sliding portion 326 from coming into contact with the left side surface of the guide hole 315. It is possible to suppress the resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position. As a result, the driving force required for the drive device 340 can be reduced, and the size of the drive device 340 can be reduced.

The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the pivot shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315 . For example, by making the diameter from the swing shaft 312 larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end, when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position, from the start, The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 . This allows the arm member 320 to swing smoothly.

In addition, by making the diameter from the swing shaft 312 larger near the upper end of the guide hole 315 than near the lower end, the arm member 320 can be moved from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315 in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position. A downward force acts toward the sliding portion 326 of the member 320 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the driving force required when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflecting members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are rotated at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the timing of rotation or the speed of rotation may be varied for each reflecting member 520 . As a result, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflecting member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be brilliantly produced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 to rotate the reflecting member 520, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt, and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of rollers. In this case, even if the rotating belt rotates further while the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotating belt and the roller, and further rotation of the reflecting members 520 is suppressed. Therefore, damage to the reflecting member 520 can be prevented.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the expansion tooth 523a is formed on the rotation gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500, and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed with a space therebetween, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, expansion teeth 523 a may be formed on transmission member 550 and tooth spacing may be formed on rotary gear 523 .

In each of the above embodiments, the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is made of an opaque resin material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reflecting member 520 may be made of a transparent resin material. In this case, regardless of whether the reflecting member 520 is in a closed state or an open state, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source. can be done.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one slide member 720 of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 slides by being pushed by the other slide member 720 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be always driven by an independent drive motor.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the pair of second slide members 740 directly abut the body portions 741 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an elastic member such as rubber or a coil spring may be provided on the surfaces of the body portion 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, compared to the case where the body portions 741 are in direct contact with each other, the impact can be softened, so the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of a "heart" can be visually recognized in a front view with the slide members 720 and 740 projecting has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the visible shape is not limited to "heart", but may be "star", "fish", or "car". Moreover, when the degree of extension of each slide member 720, 740 is different, different shapes may be formed so as to be visually recognizable. In this case, the presentation effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one of the pair of second slide members 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact portion of the second slide member 740, it can be moved in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides one of the second slide members 740 . Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, the motor to be driven can be switched according to the situation, such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 abut when the pair of first slide members 720 abut has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side of the longitudinal direction opposite ends of the decorative portion 723 opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide members 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact can be reduced, so the load on the drive motors 771 and 772 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 abut when the pair of first slide members 720 abut has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723 . In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 contact can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other, the pair of slide members 720 can be moved. The effect of visually recognizing them as one can be made remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front side cover member 730, the pair of sliding members 720 spaced apart from each other can be visually recognized in a coordinated manner. .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotor group 722b of the carriage portion 722 is formed with the same diameter has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720 . In this case, the rotor group 722b with a small diameter can be sandwiched between the rotor group 722b with a large diameter and the first slide shaft S1. This makes it possible to improve the effect of braking the rotor group 722b by bringing the rotor groups 722b into contact with each other.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where one detection hole 2721c is formed in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first slide member 2720 is stopped by forming detection holes 2721c at a plurality of locations (for example, one end, center, and other end of the body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720). A plurality of positions can be formed. At this time, the position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of points according to the detection period of the detection device 2716 by varying the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in an elongated hole shape has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be drilled in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Note that even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of the detection holes 2721c are continuously drilled along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is detected while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined from the time interval at which the transmitted light is interrupted. In addition, by varying the number of circular detection holes 2721c per longitudinal position of the first slide member 2720 (for example, both ends and the center), it is possible to detect transmission of the detection device 2716 while the first slide member 2720 is moving. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected based on the number of times the light is blocked.

In the second embodiment described above, after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position, the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected based on the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is to be detected, at least one of the first slide members 2720 is reversed to suppress the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of contact.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740 are detected by one detection device 2716 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of detection devices 2716 may be arranged corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of one of the second slide members 740 .

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is arranged on the base member 2710 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be arranged on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740 . In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<Regarding the first control processing example>
Next, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96. FIG.

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol and is configured to be variably displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. It is

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that they are not variably displayed at the same time. It is good also as possible composition. By configuring in this way, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns consisting of numbers "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row with three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol rows are displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

In addition, the third pattern is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each pattern row. The middle part of the third pattern is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left pattern row→right pattern row→middle pattern row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64, is displayed. One identification pattern (reserved pattern) of "black circle" is displayed for one and notified to the player. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols.

In the display area of the third pattern display device 81, in addition to the third pattern and the reserved pattern, character patterns, characters, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode to be displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third pattern. be done. Further, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed.

When the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is respectively The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as well.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four retaining areas (first to fourth reserved areas) are stored. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided. Each value of the per-1 random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the normal starting ports (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 72).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 If the value of the random number for the big win set by the per random number table matches, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special symbols The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table (not shown) for the high probability of special symbols and the first random number table (not shown) for the low probability of special symbols are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a high probability game state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, when the game state is the normal game state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "9".

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 300, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/300".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers that will be the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big win is 10 out of the total number of random numbers of 300, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big win is "1/30".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". Also, when the random number is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time lag, long-time lag, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 72), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 55(a)) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", and various types of "loss super reach" are defined. As fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the sound ramp control device 113, and a more detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main controller 110 The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 53(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design), and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

FIG. 53(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-described second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 24 random numbers that are winning normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 72).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes various counters shown in FIG. 52, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 72) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 71) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a variable probability effective flag 203p, a variable probability effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a counter during time saving 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning port 64 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 64, FIG. 66 S405 reference). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the variation reserved by the main controller 110 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 and are reserved is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal starting port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c ( S703 of FIG. 69: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). If the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in the low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this embodiment, when the odd probability setting flag 203h described later is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to on (see S1213 in FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability game state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the variable probability flag 203g being set to ON (S1213 in FIG. 75). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

It should be noted that, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h may be formally set to ON for recovery. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed (S1241 in FIG. 77). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged game balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The prize winning number counter 203j counts the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize winning device 65). A counter for counting. Specifically, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding 1 each time (see FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203j) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variable passage counter 203i) and match (S1267 in FIG. 78), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for timing (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round for the jackpot B. set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds for the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the jackpot B (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the prize winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, when the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243 in FIG. 77: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In this embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls won by the first variable prize winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1224 of the notification processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 76, S1111). When the notification counter 203m becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.

With this configuration, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can see the third pattern display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, details will be described later, but in the 12th round of the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 displays a girl character as shown in FIG. The character "Attention" is displayed as a notification to prompt the player to look at the. In the 13th round, the channel solenoid 65k is activated, and when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. In order to make the player continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, a notification is made so that the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51(a)) is difficult for the player to see. A performance is running. However, when the 12th round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to look at the third symbol display device 81 during the interval display. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is notified to be shown so as to divert the attention of the player from the switching member 65h. The movement of the switching member 65h may be reported so as to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying that the variable winning device 65 is covered with the player's hand. Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, it is also possible to divert the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds to notify the player to read it with a mobile phone. In this embodiment, the maximum time (five seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the action of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distraction effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined depending on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the winning game balls to the first variable prize winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the first variable winning device 81 to discharge the winning game ball is 2 seconds. It is set as the upper limit. When the remaining ball timer 203o reaches the upper limit value (three seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the big hit B is achieved. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203p is set to ON, based on the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the gaming ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51 (a)) indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through the That is, the period in which the variable probability effective flag 203p is on indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a normal period.

The variable probability valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is played with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that it has passed through a radio wave or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51(a)) in one round. This ejection number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls winning the first variable prize winning device 65 and the ejection number are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

The counter 203t during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. This time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state of 100 times.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 70) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for game control. there is

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The long-press effect lottery table 222b displays a SW variation pattern in which a display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is selected as one of the variation patterns to be described later. 4 is a selection table for selecting a notification mode for notifying the operation timing of . FIG. 55(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this long press effect lottery table 222b. In this long-press effect lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long-press operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a certain period or longer is set as a long-press navigation type. As the long-press navigation type, three types of long-press navigation A, long-press navigation B, and long-press navigation C are set.

Here, each long-press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62 . FIGS. 61(a) to 61(b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of long-press navigation B. FIG. When the SW variation pattern is selected and the long-press effect B is selected, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the characters "Long-press to get a big win!" are displayed and the player long-presses. By executing, a notification mode is notified that expects that a jackpot will be awarded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the text "Predict the start timing of the long press in the period meter!" An indicator that changes in order in the direction is displayed. By this notification, the player predicts the correct long-press start period and starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until all the colors of the indicator change. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the timing of releasing the long press (the timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the characters "Release at count 0!" are displayed, and below it are displayed indicators whose colors change sequentially from the left to the right. Characters such as "3, 2, 1, 0, release!" You are navigating to unlock. Here, the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when a character countdown is displayed and the characters "Release!!" are displayed.

As described above, in the notification mode of long-press navigation B, the timing of the start of long-pressing is made to be predicted by the player, and the timing of releasing the long-pressing is clearly notified, thereby configuring navigation with medium difficulty. are doing.

When the long-pressing start timing coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW variation pattern, the player is notified that the success/failure determination result is a big win. As a result, the player can know early on that it is a big win.

FIG. 62(a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long-press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press navigation A, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Get a big win at the timing of the long-press!" A notification mode is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(a), an indicator is displayed, and after the long press for an arbitrary period of time during which the color of the indicator changes, the player can press the button for an arbitrary period of time for a preset length of time. The characters "Guess the long-pressing period!" are displayed to urge you to guess the pressing period.

In this way, in the long-press navigation A, the player must predict both the start timing of the long-press and the release timing of the long-press. ing.

FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when long-press navigation C is selected. When the long-press navigation C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the text "Get a big win in the designated long-press period!" A notification prompting the player to act is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b), an indicator is displayed, characters of "start" and "end" are displayed below the indicator, and a long press is made at the timing when the color of the indicator changes to the start. It is notified that the long press is released at the timing of "end" after the start.

In this way, the long-press navigation C has the navigation content with the lowest degree of difficulty among the long-press navigation types, and as will be described later, it is a notification mode that is selected only when the win/loss determination result is a big hit. ing.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the long-press effect lottery table 222b, a value (in the range of 0 to 198) of an effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long-press navigation type for each win/fail determination result. there is When the result of the judgment is a win, the long-press navigation type having a lower difficulty level is set to be more likely to be selected than when the result is a loss. Thereby, it is possible to change the expectation for the big win depending on the displayed long-press navigation type. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel that whether or not the big win is given changes depending on the player's operation method, and thus the player can be provided with a fresh game.

It should be noted that if the long-pressing operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the long-pressing effect may be terminated in the middle and switched to a predetermined main symbol variation effect. With this configuration, even players who do not operate the frame buttons 22 can enjoy the game.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b). As shown in FIG. 54(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW effective time storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (see S1702 in FIG. 82). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 80). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for three seconds or longer. The time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by a long-press counter 223h, which will be described later, and the long-press flag 223g is set to ON when the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds. .

The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for three seconds or more, it is determined as a long press, and it is determined that an operation different from the normal state of pressing the frame button 22 in a short time has been performed (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) is configured as It is possible to determine whether or not a long press is being performed by the long press counter 223h.

The SW valid time storage area 223i is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the above-described SW variation pattern, when it is determined that the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is off, the frame The period (time) during which the button 22 is enabled (S1807: No in FIG. 83) and set to OFF is set as the SW valid time in the SW valid time storage area 23i. When the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i, it is updated by subtracting one by one based on the elapse of the SW valid time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 81) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 59) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', the image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance, and in the case of ``the loss of the special pattern'', the image is displayed for a given period after the variation performance is stopped.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The MPU 231 sends a signal to the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. instructed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending effect. The longer the time period of the normal pattern, the more chances the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, so the chances of the lottery for the normal pattern increase, and the chances of winning the normal pattern also increase. Become. As a result, there are more opportunities for the electric accessories to be released as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning opening 640, and the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. If it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 15).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S2305 in FIG. 86(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 86B) and the simple display setting process (see S2308 in FIG. 86(b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 94(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 59) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 86(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 59), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 86(b)) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a small win, or a loss.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, set the opening scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of jackpot A (16 rounds, etc.) jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the counter 203t during time saving is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203t is 1 or more during time saving (S220: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203t during time saving (S221).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON (S302).

When the variable probability flag 203g is ON (S302: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability, the special symbol big hit The lottery result of whether or not is obtained from the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 53(b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 53(b)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but they are not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) of special symbols, the first Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 53(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. One of "9" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big win showing the big win A is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55(a)) (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined based on the current number of held balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command is generated for notifying the audio ramp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern. When this process ends, it returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning prize information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing the holding process of the values when there is

When the starting winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In addition, in the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as in the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning port 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S407: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the look-ahead process (S413), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of variation is definite change (S502), and the game state is variable (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the game state is not variable (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a winning information command including the result of the big hit determination executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role accompanying the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of things.

In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning opening 64 is performed while the second symbol display device displays the winning. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 53(a)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 53(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611 is the normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), the present time is during the special symbol jackpot. (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol is lost. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 72) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 are transmitted to the sub-side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning process (see FIG. 66). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 68), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 68), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal design fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 68), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 70 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, with reference to FIG. 74, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1202, the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the operation of the open/close door 65f1 are set for each round.

In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is time to operate (S1106: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is turned on (S1107). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), ending processing is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Details of this ending process (S1110) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set to the sound lamp controller 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S1213). Although not shown, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the variable probability flag 203g being set to ON. After that, this process ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set the probability variation by determining whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to expect the transition to the variable probability game state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the variable probability game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Details of the notification process (S1111) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the content of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The end timing of the 12th round is determined by detecting that 10 balls have won a prize in the 12th round or determining that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the 12th round (S1222: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1222, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1223, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of 12 rounds, and the voice prompting to look at the liquid crystal is heard. output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the 13th round from one second before the end of the interval time. May run continuously.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after updating is 0 (S1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), a notification command is set (S1226). After that, this process ends. With this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 77, this winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached (S1231). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1233). After that, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 is not passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

In the processing of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1236). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). After that, the process of S1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1241). The variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242). After that, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1244). The variable probability effective flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). After that, this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203p is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable game can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203p is ON (S1246). When the variable probability effective flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203p is ON (S1246: Yes), the variable probability effective timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1247). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer is the upper limit (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1248). When it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1248: Yes), the variable probability effective flag 203p is set to OFF (S1249). The variable probability effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball blowing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description continues. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, an abnormality process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Details of this abnormality processing (S1113) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the processing of S1264, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1264: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed (S1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S1267).

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality of allowing the game ball to remain in the first variable prize winning device 65 illegally and passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3 even if the big hit is B.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the variable probability passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1271), and then this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 79, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1514 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), it executes power-off processing in S1514. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1514 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), it will transfer to S1404 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 80). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1516 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), an interrupt Permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the main processing executed by MPU 221 in audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has passed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 . The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1509, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off processing is executed (S1516). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1607). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1608). In addition, in the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1608 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the processing of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S1607, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1609). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1610).

Next, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1619) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to

Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1705). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1705: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the processing of S1709, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the long-press effect variation pattern has started (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has not started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is obtained (S1802), and the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55(b)) is pressed long. A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, a display command indicating the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

In the process of S1805, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S1805). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIGS. 83 and S1507) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is greater than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1806), and it is determined whether or not the frame button is ON (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW valid time is to subtract the elapsed time (in this embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether or not the long press flag 223g is on ( S1809). If it is determined that the long press flag 223g is ON (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long-press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the long-press counter 223h has reached 3 seconds or more (S1810).

If it is not determined that the long-press counter 223h is longer than 3 seconds (S1810: No), this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long-press counter 223h is longer than 3 seconds (S1810: Yes), the long-press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), a display command indicating that the long-press is in progress is set (S1812), Return to main processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long-press counter 223h has reached 3 seconds or more ( S1813). If it is determined that the value of the long-press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long-press OFF is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the long-press counter 223h is longer than 3 seconds (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (in this embodiment, the counter value is set to 0) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set off (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S2101. and the processing of S2102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86(b)) during that time, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are the images when the power is turned on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 86(a). FIG. 86(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301). If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S2302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305), 59, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and then S2304. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, the details of the command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2405) and returns to the processing of S2401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 88(a). FIG. 88(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

Details of the stop type command process (S2407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). FIG. 88(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S2602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2602. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

Details of the back image change command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 89(a). FIG. 89(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image classification indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image discrimination flags are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2702. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S2702 is used to determine the The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). Otherwise (S2410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

Details of the error command processing (S2411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2802). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2802, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating a long press among the unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is a command indicating pressing (S2412: Yes), long press effect processing is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating the long press is the display command indicating the long press navigation pattern set in the processing of S1804, the display command indicating the long press being set in the processing of S1812, and the processing of S1814. This corresponds to the display command indicating long-press OFF set in .

Here, with reference to FIG. 90, details of the long press effect processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing long press effect processing. This long-press effect processing is to execute processing corresponding to a command indicating a long-press received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the long-press effect processing (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether the command is a long-press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the long-press navigation effect is to be performed (S2901: Yes), display data corresponding to the long-press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the long press navigation effect is not determined (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a long press command (see S1812 in FIG. 83) (S2903). In the process of S2903, if it is determined to be a long press command (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a long press command (S2903: No), display data corresponding to long press OFF is set (S2905) and the process returns to command determination processing.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2412, if it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

In the process of S2401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), the processing of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 is executed again. The processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. End the command determination process.

The simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display a power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command, are extracted from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 88(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. FIG. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3002), S3003-S3004 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3101).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined in the process of S3003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3201, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3205), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S3010), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the content is cleared (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2304), until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S3015, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3009, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is replaced with the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is turned off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3302), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b). FIG. 94(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3401). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3402). In the processing of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Also, in the processing of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processing of S3503 and S3504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the processing of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S3517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3517 (S3517: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3518). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3602, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 86(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. FIG. In the second control example, the contents of the SW fluctuation pattern are changed from those in the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 for a long time is described as being executed in the SW variation pattern. is executed. Since other configurations are the same, descriptions of other configurations are omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The catching effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving direction of the fish and the net displayed in the SW variation pattern in the second control example is set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed with the SW fluctuation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the SW variation pattern in the second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the fish and the net are displayed, and further, the characters "Press the button according to the fish!" are displayed. A display mode is displayed in which the player can obtain the fish by pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish has entered the net. Furthermore, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed, and the color is variable (for example, from blue to red variable). There are 6 graduations, and characters "GET" are displayed on the 3rd and 6th graduations from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed while the color of the scale is being changed, the display timing is such that the fish is in the net.

On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move in the movement direction set by the SW effect type selected in the catch effect lottery table 222c and displayed. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but the display is controlled so that the fish is positioned in the net at the timing when the position of the scale "GET" of the indicator is changed.

As a result, the player can rely not only on the positional relationship between the fish and the net, but also on the timing at which the indicator changes, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the timing of pressing the frame button 22 and participating in the presentation of the SW variation pattern. You can make it easier to play. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the fish will be displayed at the position of the net using the indicator. In this embodiment, the indicator is always displayed. However, the indicator may be displayed when the expectation of a big win is high, and may not be displayed when the expectation is low. By constructing in this way, the indicator is displayed to raise expectations for the big win, and furthermore, the big win can be produced in a state where the player can catch the fish.

FIG. 97(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the catch effect lottery table 222c, the values of the effect counter 223f are assigned to the capture effects A to C when the win/loss determination result is a hit, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is a loss. It is The catching effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing when the fish is in the net, and are set as effects that enable the fish to be caught. On the other hand, in the catching effects D to F, the timing (period) in which the fish is in the net is shorter than the period required for the frame button 22 to be pressed and the frame button 22 to be detected to be pressed. It is set to be impossible to capture because it is set.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, if the result of the judgment is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is accidentally pressed at the timing when the net and the fish coincide, the display will be shifted. In other words, it is configured so that the effect that the fish has been caught is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and at the timing when the fish and the net match, the frame button 22 is instantaneously excluded from the valid period (for example, the matching display period of 0.2 s). It is possible to reduce the load of performing control to shift and display.

In the catching presentation A and the catching presentation D, a display mode is set in which the fish and the net are displayed by moving to random positions in the horizontal direction at high speed. The catching presentation B and the catching presentation E are display modes in which the fish and the net are moved to random positions and displayed. The catching effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net are displayed by moving diagonally to random positions.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the hit/fail determination result is a hit, the capture effect A and the capture effect B are set to be more likely to be selected than when the win is lost. Therefore, the player can predict the success/failure determination result based on the moving direction of the fish and the net (that is, the type of catching effect). Therefore, the player can expect that the effect of the SW variation pattern will be executed.

In this embodiment, based on the SW fluctuation pattern being selected, the content of the capture effect is determined by lottery, but it may be set in advance for the SW fluctuation pattern to be selected. . Further, in this control example, the moving direction of the fish and the net is set according to the type of the catching effect. may be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the currently displayed display positions of the fish and net, the moving direction and moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. By configuring in this way, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and a fresh performance can be provided to the player.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97(b). FIG. 97(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this second control example. The second control example differs from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 54(b)) of the first control example in that the long-press flag 223g and the long-press counter 223h are deleted. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description is omitted.

<Regarding control processing in the second control example>
The control processing in the second control example is different from the control processing in the first control example in the contents of the control processing in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 . Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. This second control example differs from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 99, S1520). do. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the capture effect, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is the SW variation pattern (variation pattern of capture effect). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of capture effect is selected ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). By outputting this display command to the display control device 113 , the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 . The SW valid time set in the SW fluctuation pattern is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i (S1825). After that, the process of S1826 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the change pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the process of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (S1826). If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed down) (S1828). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating SW pressing is set (S1829). The SW valid time is reset to 0, which is the initial value. As a result, the SW effective time is reset together with the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the multiple effects being varied. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1826 that the SW valid time is 0 (S1826: No) or if it is determined in the process of S1828 that the frame button 22 is off (S1828: No), this process exit.

Note that in this control example, the frame button 22 can be pressed once in the capturing effect, but it is not limited to this, and may be set a plurality of times.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. FIG. In this second control example, the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) is changed to the display setting process, as compared with the first control example. 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are omitted. are added respectively. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2410, if it is determined that an error command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a command indicating that it is related to the SW effect has been received (S2414). Commands related to the SW effect include a display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), a display command indicating SW depression indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the like.

If it is determined in the process of S2414 that a command related to the SW effect has been received (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). This SW effect processing (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of this SW effect processing (S2415). In the SW effect processing, based on a SW effect (capture effect) command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and a command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed, a process of setting corresponding display data and the like is performed. .

In the SW effect processing (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command indicates any one of the capture effects A to F which are SW effects (S2911). If it is a command indicating one of capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2911 that the command does not indicate any of the capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). When it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the content of the displayed capture effect is set to stop (S2914). After that, this process ends.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, the positions of the net and the fish in the catching effect are fixed at the displayed positions, and a certain period of time (in this control example, the initially set SW valid time elapses). It continues to be displayed until the same period as the period until) has passed. After that, if the fish has stopped at a position in the net, a display mode (for example, characters of "Get!!") indicating that the fish has been caught is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish stops at a position other than the position where the fish is in the net, a display mode (for example, the characters "Fail to catch!") is displayed to indicate that the fish could not be caught.

Next, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this display setting process 2 (S2330). The display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example has the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the processing of S3005 is executed, SW effect display setting processing is executed (S3030). This SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of this SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether the capture effect is being displayed means the period during which the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW valid time, and the indicator is variably displayed at high speed before the frame button 22 is pressed. It indicates whether it is a period.

If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), the indicator determines whether the color of the scale corresponding to "Get" is being changed (S3032). If the indicator is displayed with a variable Get scale (S3032: Yes), display data is set by matching the display positions of the fish data and the net data (S3033). After that, this process ends. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set according to the display coordinates of the fish data. By configuring in this way, the display positions of the fish and the net can be matched with the timing at which the scale of the indicator is changed. In this control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period during which the indicator is displayed as "Get" is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22. It is set so that if 22 is pressed, the fish can be caught. On the other hand, in capture effects D to F, the period during which the indicator is displayed in Get is set to be shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, and pressing the frame button 22 at any timing It is designed so that it cannot be caught.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the capturable state and the non-capturable state are set by varying the time during which the indicator is varied. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that the fish cannot be caught.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to notify the jackpot of the result of the judgment result of the success of the capture. , a URL from which a standby image for use in a mobile phone can be downloaded, a three-dimensional code, or a special background image may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in which the catch is successful even when the result of the determination is wrong. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

In the process of S3032, if the indicator is displayed with a variable scale other than the position corresponding to Get (S3032: No), it is determined whether or not it is time for the indicator to be displayed with the next scale variable. (S3034). When the indicator determines that it is time to display the next scale variable (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data for displaying the fish and the coordinate data for displaying the net are selected. It is set by moving in the moving direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is obtained and the number of coordinates to be moved is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether or not the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same processing as S3035 is executed again (S3037). As a result, when the indicator is not the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display positions of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the process of S3034, if it is not the time to change the scale of the indicator (S3034: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3036 that the position data do not match (S3036: No), this process ends. .

In this way, although the moving direction set in the catching effect is determined, the display positions of the fish and the net are set at random by lottery, so the display of the fish and the net can be made irregular. . On the other hand, the variableness of the indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW variation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be displayed in a regularly variable manner.

In this control example, the display positions of the fish and the net are determined by lottery each time the display positions are updated. You may

Further, in this control example, the direction of movement of the fish is defined by the type of the selected catching effect, but the position of the fish and the net may be set randomly by lottery. good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. FIG. In the first control example, regardless of the game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state, etc.), the timing at which the special symbols start to fluctuate is constant when the reserved ball is not stored. However, the second control example is different in that the process is executed so that the variation start timing differs depending on the game state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
An electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a wait counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53(c)) in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The weight counter 203u is for counting the delay time for delaying the variation start timing of the second special symbol when the number of reserved balls is 0 in the time saving (in the case of the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state). is a counter.

This wait counter 203u sets a counter value corresponding to 1 second to the wait counter 203u when it is determined that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0 during time saving (S314 in FIG. 106). reference). In addition, when the counter value is set in the wait counter 203u, it is updated by subtracting one each time the variable processing during time saving (FIG. 106, S231) is executed.

In this way, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time saving and the variation of the special symbol is not executed, then the game ball enters the second winning hole 640. Even if it does, the start of the fluctuation is delayed for 1 second. Here, the second winning port 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, a game ball can easily enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加In this case, it becomes easier for two or more game balls to win in one open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter in a single release when the number of reserved balls is 0, if the start of the second special symbol fluctuation is immediately set at the timing when the first game ball enters. , the number of held balls of the second special symbol is determined as 0, and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected. As a result, the efficiency of the game deteriorates despite the fact that the time is shortened, and the player feels uncomfortable.

However, in the characteristic configuration of this control example, the timing of start of fluctuation is delayed by one second by the weight counter 203u, so when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state during that time, a plurality of game balls are continuously played. When the second special symbol ball enters the ball, it is possible to suppress the problem that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined as 0 and the first variation is started.

In addition, in this control example, when the second special symbol holding ball is 0 in the state of stopping fluctuation during time saving, it is configured to set a delay time of 1 second, but it is not limited to that. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, which is the variation time of normal symbols during time saving. By configuring in this way, the start of variation of the second special symbol can be delayed until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and can be delayed until the timing when the game ball wins the second winning hole 640. . Further, the delay time may be set in accordance with the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is set to be opened. In this case, even with a short delay time, it is possible to effectively prevent the number of held balls from being determined as 0 and the selection of a relatively long variation pattern. In addition, it is not limited to the second winning opening 640 as well as the time saving.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b is set so that a relatively long variation pattern is easily selected when the number of held balls is 0 to 2. there is Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time to delay until the number of held balls becomes three or more.

In addition, in this control example, in the time-saving game state, it is configured to delay the start of the variation of the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this, it may be in the probability variable game state, and the timing to delay is determined by lottery. Alternatively, it may be configured to delay when the number of held balls is less than a certain value (for example, 1). Furthermore, it may be configured to delay not only the second special symbol but also the first special symbol. In addition, by delaying the start timing of variation of the second special symbol at the end timing of the jackpot game, it is configured to suppress the inconvenience of starting variation when it is determined that there is no reserved ball number of the second special symbol. good too.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to delay the timing of the start of fluctuation, but not limited to that, the fixed time of the special symbol during fluctuation That is, the period from when the symbol is fixed and stopped until it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 of FIG. , the period may be set longer.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to delay when it is during the time saving, but when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, the period until the fluctuation start is set every time (the held ball is determined and the fluctuation start is set It may be configured to set a longer time period until the Further, regardless of the game state, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the timing for setting the start of variation of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Regarding control processing in the third control example>
Next, control processing in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to a special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example, S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is being reduced (S231). In the time saving, it is determined whether it is a variable probability game state or a time saving game state. When it is determined that it is during the time saving (S231: Yes), the variation process is executed during the time saving (S232).

Here, the details of the variation processing (S232) during time saving will be described with reference to FIG. 106 . FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time-shortening fluctuation process (S232). In the time-saving medium fluctuation process (FIG. 106, S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value greater than 0 (S311). When the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0, it is a case where the delay time has already been set for the start of variation of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the value of the wait counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the wait counter 203u is subtracted by -1 (S312). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S311, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, which is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, is 0. (S313). When it is determined that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the wait counter 203u (S314). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this process is terminated.

Here, return to FIG. 105 and continue the description. After executing the processing of the fluctuation processing (FIG. 106, S232) during the time saving, the processing of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether or not the value of the wait counter 203u is greater than 0 (S233). If the counter value is set in the wait counter 203u, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the wait counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

In this way, since the start of the variation of the special symbol is not set until the wait counter 203u is executed, the variation of the second special symbol is suppressed from being determined to be 0 to 2 pending during the time saving. can. In addition, in this control example, the value set in the wait counter 203u is set to 1 second, but is not limited to this, and is a time longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds in this control example) during time saving. It may be configured to set seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control so that the start of variation of the second special symbol is set more reliably after the number of held balls of the second special symbol is set to 3 or more. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the number of reserved balls is determined to be few (0 to 2) and a relatively long variation pattern is selected, thereby deteriorating the gaming efficiency during time saving.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. In the fourth control example, in contrast to the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times (stopped with shaking fluctuation) during the fluctuation period of one special symbol, and the special symbol is varied multiple times. The difference is that a pseudo effect is set as shown. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect means that in the variation of one special symbol, the third symbol is temporarily stopped one or more times and displayed again in a variable manner to make one variation appear as if it were multiple variations. This is the production to be shown to the player.

FIG. 107(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third pattern displayed by the third pattern display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the speed variation (dynamic display) at which the pattern can be identified from the start of the variation is changed at a low speed, and then the variation that makes it difficult to identify the type of pattern. A high-speed variation, which is a variation in speed (dynamic display), is suddenly displayed as a temporary stop as shown in FIG. 107(b). FIG. 107(b) is an example of the display mode when the temporary stop display is performed in the pseudo-continuous effect. A stationary pattern is displayed overlapping each third pattern. This static pattern is set smaller than the size of each third pattern, and a part of the third pattern on the back side is configured to be visible. Further, the static symbol is added and displayed at the timing of the variable display just before the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the state of high-speed variation before being temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the third pattern is displayed at high speed, the third pattern is displayed translucent and the background image can be seen through the third pattern. Immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically 0.5 seconds before, the translucent display is canceled and the display is displayed in an opaque state. At the display timing, a still pattern is attached and displayed. In addition, since this static symbol is not displayed with shaking and fluctuating like the third symbol, but is displayed statically, the player does not temporarily stop but feels as if the third symbol is fixedly stopped. can feel like

Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous effect is a fixed stop, and it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display is being performed a plurality of times.

In addition, in this control example, the stationary pattern is the same pattern for each third pattern, but different patterns and shapes may be used. Also, the brightness of the third pattern displayed on the back may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static pattern. By displaying in this way, the static symbols can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to think that the symbols are fixedly stopped.

In this control example, only the character is displayed as the stationary pattern, but the identification number of the third pattern displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for 7 patterns) is attached. may be configured to display By constructing in this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the stationary symbol is the third symbol, and it is possible to make it appear as if the player is in a fixed stop.

<Regarding control processing in the fourth control example>
Next, control processing in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) as compared with the first control example. They are different in that respect. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and therefore descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that For other configurations, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pattern temporary stop setting process (S3040), which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the contents of this symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), the process of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol is executed when the pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing for temporarily stopping the symbols is set in advance by a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining the display data table.

In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is being displayed. When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to temporarily stop the third symbol (S3042). When it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the pattern (S3043: Yes), still image data is set at the position of the pattern to be temporarily stopped (S3043). After that, this process ends.

Here, the still image data is set so as to overlap the pattern information of the display data table. In this way, by executing the still image data to be superimposed and displayed at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data can be changed by the player's operation of the frame button 22, or a lottery, It can be changed and set according to the notice display or the like, and various still images can be made.

In this control example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the third pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed for the number of times set in advance in the variation pattern, and then the third pattern always becomes the ready-to-win display mode, and the super-ready-to-win display mode is displayed. be done. A stationary symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the third symbol to be temporarily stopped. The display is set and displayed in yellow for the first time, red for the third time, and gold for the fourth time. In fact, when a still image is displayed without being shaken and fluctuated, the player is more likely to perceive it as the number of times the still image has actually been fluctuated rather than temporarily stopped. Therefore, the player expects that when a stationary pattern that informs the number of consecutive special symbols is displayed in the variation of a plurality of special symbols, the variation display of the special symbols will be a super reach in the subsequent variation display of the special symbols. can be done. In this control example, the larger the number of times of temporary stop, the higher the expectation of the big hit (the result of the judgment is likely to be selected when the result is a big hit), and the temporary stop is executed four times. It consists only of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the result of the judgment is a big hit. Therefore, when the red static symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that the static image will be displayed in the next variation as well, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this control example, the still image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. As a result, the player can easily see the variation of the third symbol.

The still image is not limited to the character in this control example, and may be a character, or may be displayed in a size that hides the shake fluctuation of the third pattern on the back. In fact, since this is a temporary stop, the third design on the back may be configured to be visible through the still image so that the third design on the back is shaken and fluctuated. .

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. FIG. In each control example described above, it is determined whether or not the probability variable gaming state is provided by the operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. was configured to be On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the big winning game state is provided by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which the game ball can enter during the small winning game. The difference is that they are configured as follows. The rest of the configuration is the same as in the first control example, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided at the lower center instead of the second winning port 640, and the V winning device 900 is provided on the right side instead of the first variable winning device 65, in place of the above-described control examples. The difference is that the second winning port 640 is provided in the upper portion of the V winning device 900 and the electric accessory 640a is provided on the right side of the second winning port 640. FIG. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Although the details will be described later, the first variable prize winning device 65 has the same structure as the second prize winning port in each control example described above. Also, the V winning device 900 differs from the first variable winning device 65 in each of the control examples described above in that a staying member 900n is provided, and otherwise has the same structure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the difference of the game board 13 in this control example will be described. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right portion of the game board 13. FIG.

In the lower right part of the game board 13 in this control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided, and a game ball passing through this normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters by natural fall. A second prize winning opening 640 is provided at a position (lower left position) where there is no possibility of winning. In addition, nails are provided from the left part to the upper right part of the second winning opening 640, and those nails are at a predetermined interval (interval where the game ball cannot pass) to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 described above. is provided in Furthermore, an electric accessory 640 a is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (or its right side) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640 .

Here, the electric accessory 640a moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by actuation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning hole 640 by moving forward (opening action). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the game ball does not guide to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

That is, the second winning hole 640 is configured so that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation. In addition, even if the electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation, if the time of the opening operation (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the game ball is being guided, so that the game ball is released. The ball will not enter the 2nd winning hole 640 .

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. Although the configuration is such that the ball is not entered into 640, the configuration is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body or the like. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as changing the spacing of the nails so that the game ball can pass through. Further, the case body, the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the second prize winning opening 640 may be integrated, or only a part of them may be integrated.

In addition, a shielding member that interlocks with the electric accessory 640a is provided to block the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retreat state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (advance state). The second winning opening may be opened. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

Furthermore, it is configured to change whether or not the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Not limited to this, a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through a passage opening, a game ball that has been simply shot, etc.) enters the second winning opening 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured to change whether or not to enter the ball.

A V winning device 900 is provided under the second winning port 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like. This V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and when game balls enter the V winning opening 900a, predetermined game balls (for example, three balls) are paid out to the player. be Also, when the game ball entering the V winning opening 900a passes through the V winning switch 900e3, which will be described later, a jackpot game is awarded.

An opening/closing door 900f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side is provided above the V winning opening 900a in the same manner as in the first control example described above. , the game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening/closing door 900f1 is closed so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. The details of this V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. The opening/closing door 900f1 is opened/closed by a not-shown V inlet solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z).

The upper surface of the opening/closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface of the upper portion of the V winning device 900 are provided with a structure for suppressing the force of rolling game balls (not shown). Specifically, we use materials with a high coefficient of friction (e.g., rubber, materials with unevenness) to reduce the rolling speed, and use structures that allow rolling game balls to collide with each other to reduce the rolling speed. There is a structure that guides the ball in the depth direction of the board and lengthens the rolling distance. This is a configuration for allowing a large number of game balls to collectively enter the V winning device when the opening/closing door 900f1 is opened.

A first winning port 64 is provided on the left side of the V winning device 900 and in the lower center of the game board, and a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning port 64 . The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times in the case of a big win C) in a jackpot game. Game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, since a device having the same structure as the second winning port 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning device 65, the reference numerals for the same parts are changed from 640 to 65. , and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a configuration in which game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 900e of the V winning device 900 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 900e1 and a special discharge channel 900e2, which will be described later. do. The V winning device 900 in this control example is provided with a retention member 900n on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example, and a V switch 900e3 instead of the variable probability switch 65e3. are provided, and are the same in other respects. In this control example, a device having a structure similar to that of the first variable prize winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V prize winning device 900, so the reference numerals for the same parts are changed from 65 to 900. , and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 900e2.

As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 are distributed to the special discharge channel 900e2. In this control example, a retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge channel 900e2. With this retention member 900n, only one game ball can be retained in the allocation destination area 900h3, which is the area to which the game ball is allocated to the special discharge channel 900e2 side by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball remains in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is normally discharged without being distributed to the special discharge channel 900e2. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

The staying member 900n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and retract from the game board 13 side. The retention member 900n moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by actuation of a retention solenoid 209a (not shown). This retention member 900n can retain one game ball in the sorting destination area 900h3 by moving forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (opening operation), the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2.

Here, the V winning device 900 allows a game ball to enter by opening the opening/closing door 900f1 during a small winning game. In addition, the staying member 900n is closed during the small winning game (when the ball can be entered into the V winning device 900), and after the small winning game is completed (no new ball entering the V winning device 900). After a predetermined time has passed (after 3 seconds in this control example), the opening operation is performed. That is, in this control example, even if the switching member 900h is operating, the number of game balls that have entered the V winning device 900 and flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2 is limited to one. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2.

The game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 900e2 passes through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, a variable probability game is provided based on the passage of the variable probability switch 65e3, but in this control example, a jackpot game is provided based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( (See S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138 and S4904 in FIG. 142, which will be described later).

In this control example, the number of game balls that flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2 is limited to one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can stay in the distribution destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the number of game balls to be restricted may be appropriately changed by causing the staying member to operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small winning game.

With reference to FIG. 113(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge channel 900e2.

In this control example, even when the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 900k is operated, so it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

When the channel solenoid 900k is inactive, all game balls that have passed through the detection port 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge channel 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence by the newly provided retention member 900n in this control example, and the operation is the same as the above-described first control example, so detailed description omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example differs in electrical configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 and a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and a staying solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. and are otherwise identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 114, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a staying solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. FIG. This retention solenoid 209a is used to operate the retention member 900n in the V winning device 900, as described above. Also, the solenoids (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k, etc.) described in each of the above control examples are treated as part of the other solenoid 209z.

As other changes, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110, part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, and part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added). 115 to 127, which will be described later. Since other parts are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

Next, each counter in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition to each counter in the first control example described above, this control example is different in that a small hit type counter C5 is added.

This small hit type counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this control example) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). This small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the value of the small hit type counter C5, the small hit type is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Other counters are the same as those in the first control example described above, so they are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 of this control example will be described. FIG. 116(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 116(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

ROM202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116(a)). This small winning type selection table 202e is used to select the small winning type when a small winning is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in this control example includes a jackpot start flag 203v1, a jackpot medium flag 203v2, a small jackpot start flag 203w1, a small jackpot medium flag 203w2, a V passage time jackpot type value 203x1, and a V flag. It has at least 203x2 and normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y. In addition, in this control example, since the variable probability flag 203e is unnecessary, the illustration is omitted.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referenced in the jackpot control process 2 to determine whether it is the start timing of the jackpot. (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and is set to OFF when it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 that it is the jackpot start timing (See S4702 in FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to execute a process according to the timing of the start of the jackpot. In each of the control examples described above, although illustration is omitted, the jackpot start timing is determined in the same manner.

The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Like the above-described jackpot start flag 203h, the jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S4704 in FIG. 140). It is set to off (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process is set to OFF (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hit is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hit game is being executed. This small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process in the same manner as the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is during the small hit in the small hit control process (S4807 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the small hit control process, it is turned off. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

The V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set the jackpot type given when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. FIG. This V passing time jackpot type value 203x1 is set according to the small hitting type in the small hitting start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V passage time jackpot type value 203x1 is acquired in the V passage processing (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138). This V passage time jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared in the small hit end processing executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the big winning type based on the value of this V flag 203x2 at the end of the small winning. be. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the V passing time jackpot type value 203x1 in the V passing process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and is referred to in the small hitting end process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142), After being referenced, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

The normal symbol time-saving first time flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the normal symbol variation in the time-saving game is the first time. This normal symbol time-saving first time flag 203y is set to ON when the jackpot type is C at the timing of the jackpot end in the jackpot control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is normally referred to in the pattern variation process. (see S642 in FIG. 136). Details will be described later, but when it is determined that the normal symbol working hours reduction initial flag 203y is ON (S641 of FIG. 136: Yes), the electric accessory 640a is for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that it is opened so that many game balls can enter the second winning hole 640 (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641 in FIG. 136: No), the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). It is set so that the ball can be entered (S644 in FIG. 136).

Next, referring to FIG. 117, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a and the second winning random number table 202c will be described. 117(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, and FIG. 117(d) shows the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the first winning random number table 202a determines whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained by entering the game ball into the first winning hole 64 is a jackpot. The value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 640 is for determining whether or not it is a big hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is provided.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. judgment value) is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small winning. In addition, if the value is determined to be "4 to 399", it is determined to be out of range.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 117(c), is a random number value (judgment value) determined as winning in the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "1 to 398", and if it is "1 to 398", it is determined to be a small winning. Otherwise, if it is determined to be "399", it is determined to be out.

Thus, the first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. In the first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol is selected based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the number of random numbers that become the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 400. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 1, the probability of a big win of the first special symbol is "1/400". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that become a small hit is 3, the probability that the first special symbol will become a small win is "3/400".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the number of random numbers that will be the big win for the second special symbol is one, and among the total number of random numbers of 400, the number of random numbers is 400. Since the total number of random numbers is 11, the probability of winning the second special symbol is "1/400". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 398, the probability that the second special symbol will be a small win is "398/400".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117(d)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 117(d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, the normal symbol wins. determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

It should be noted that, as in each of the control examples described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 640a in this control example moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the actuation of a solenoid not shown (one of the other solenoids 209z), as described above with reference to FIG. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning hole 640 by moving forward (opening action). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the game ball does not guide to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is being shortened, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not being shortened. Also, the opening time of 0.2 seconds for the electric accessory 640 a is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning hole 640 . Therefore, even if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 becomes a winning when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be made to enter the second winning hole. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the ball into the second winning hole even though the time is not being shortened (the jackpot with the time saving is not appearing).

Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball drop area a (a in FIG. 112) that receives the game ball that naturally falls on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not naturally fall. It has a game ball guiding area b that guides the game ball rolling from the game ball drop area a to the second prize winning opening 640 .

In other words, the length of the game ball guidance area b (distance over which the game ball rolls) is at least the distance over which the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the time saving mode. By designing it to be longer and shorter than the distance over which the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.5 seconds) during the time saving, the game ball dropped on the electric accessory 640a is reliably pushed to the second position in the opening operation during the time saving. It is guided to the second winning hole 640, and in the opening operation when it is not during the time saving, it is possible to prevent the game ball falling on the electric accessory 640a from winning the second winning hole.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. (a) to (c) of FIG. 118 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b.

The first win type selection table 202b selects a special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting a jackpot type based on the first winning opening 64 and a jackpot type based on the second winning opening 640. (See FIG. 118(a)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), at the time of the jackpot based on the first winning hole 64, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the jackpot C (16R time saving jackpot) is selected, In the case of "50 to 99", jackpot D (16R time-saving no jackpot) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118(c), at the time of the big hit based on the second winning hole 640, regardless of the value of the first winning type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), the big win C (16R short time jackpot) is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202e will be described. Figure 119 (a) ~ (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small winning type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202e1 for selecting a small winning type based on the first winning opening 64, and a small winning based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting the type (see FIG. 119(a)).

As shown in FIG. 119(b), at the time of the small hit based on the first winning hole 64, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 1", the small hit C (V passable) is selected, In the case of "2 to 99", small hit E (V pass impossible) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119(c), at the time of the small hit based on the second winning hole 640, if the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small hit C (V passage is possible). is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", a small hit D (V passable) is selected.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the type of small win. Specifically, in the small winning games by the small winnings C and D, the channel solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operated, and the game ball can enter the special discharge channel 900e2. On the other hand, in the small winning game by the small winning E, the passage solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operated. A game ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits in which a big hit is given when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 900e3 after that, and the small hit E is a small hit in which no big hit is given.

In addition, in this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the jackpot given after the small hit C is the jackpot C (16R time-saving jackpot). The jackpot awarded after D is configured to be jackpot D (16R time-saving no jackpot).

In addition, in this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given after that is determined according to the type of the small hit, but as other specifications, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the game ball passes through the V prize switch 900e3, so that the jackpot that has just acquired the right is executed. can be By doing so, the player can select a small win to be passed through the V winning switch 900e3, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67(b)), a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67(c)), At least the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 is defined. In this control example, since no variable probability state is provided, the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Also, since the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 and the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those of the above-described first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation pattern table for time saving 202d4 defines the variation pattern during the time saving as shown in FIG. 120(d). Specifically, during the time saving, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, if it is out, it will be a short out (0.5 seconds) variation pattern, and in the case of a small hit, it will be a long and small hit (10 seconds). In the case of a jackpot, it is defined to be a long jackpot (20 seconds). In addition, the variation pattern in the case of the deviation during the time saving may be set to a long deviation (10 seconds), and may be the same length as the small hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 124(b)). . Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900. FIG. This V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the detection port 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). This V entrance passage counter 203j is referred to when a display effect command is set in the V passage process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the V passage process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big win game when the big win or the small win continues. This round number cumulative counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and when a jackpot end command is received, the continuation determination counter 223m If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the sound lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is displayed as the third symbol. It will be displayed on the device 81 .

The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used to determine whether or not the big win or small win continues, and is used to determine whether to initialize the round number cumulative counter 223k described above. This continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when a small winning start command of small winning C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and 1 is subtracted when a small winning start command of small winning D is received. (see S5015 in FIG. 144). This continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144). It is determined that the continuation of winning has ended, and the round number accumulation counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out and is read by the command determination process. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

Next, the flow of the big win in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the game state is divided into a special figure 1 (hereinafter also referred to as special 1) game state (left-handed game) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter also referred to as special 2) game state (right-handed game) be done. The special figure 1 game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is shot aiming at the first winning hole 64. - 特許庁A lottery for the first special pattern is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first prize winning port 64, and if the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot C, the winning to the second prize winning port 640 is performed after the jackpot ends. A time-saving game state that becomes easier (described as time-saving in FIG. 122) is given. When shifting to the time-saving game state, a right-handed hitting game is performed in which a game ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second winning hole 640 arranged on the right side of the game board 13.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is the jackpot D, the time-saving game state is not provided after the jackpot ends, so the special 1 game state is performed again. In addition, in this control example, there is also a route where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small win and the small win type is a small win C, which results in a big win (V prize). In this case, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the time-saving game state.

Next, the lottery for the second special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 640 is set to have a higher probability of a big win, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. ing. In this control example, it has a reservation storage function that reserves and stores the right to receive the lottery based on the second special design, and during the fluctuation of the second special design (more specifically, when the fluctuation display of the second special design is started , after the stop display and until the final display), if the game ball wins to the second winning port 640, the second special symbol that is currently changing the right to perform the lottery based on the winning It is possible to hold (upper limit of hold = 1) until it is confirmed and displayed.

Next, among the special figure 2 game states, the flow of the jackpot in the time-saving game will be described. In this state, the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly performed. As for the lottery contents of the second special symbols, most of them are distributed to small hits as described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 119. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a big win (V prize) via a small win in order to increase the probability of a big win of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time saving game state is given again after the big hit ends. On the other hand, if the small hit type is a small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the big hit ends, so the transition to the non-time saving game in the special figure 2 game state is not given.

Next, among the special figure 2 game states, the flow of the jackpot in the non-time-saving game will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery for the second special symbol reserved and stored by the second special symbol reservation storage function is executed. As a result of the lottery, when the small winning type is the small winning C, the time saving game is given after the big winning is finished, so that the state is shifted to the time saving game state. On the other hand, if the small hit type is a small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no reservation memory, so it will shift to the special figure 1 game state. In addition, since this state is non-work time saving, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory.

Incidentally, in this control example, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the symbol hit of the jackpot C may be selected as the jackpot type.

In other words, it is designed so that the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is an advantageous lottery for the player, can be performed at least twice using the above-described holding function, and after entering the special figure 2 game state, the small hit type As long as the small hit D is not selected twice in a row, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 game state.

FIG. 123 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the second winning port 640 to occurrence of a jackpot game in this control example. It is a hit, and it is a big win (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2, and (b) explains the case where the lottery result based on the winning to the second prize opening is a big win (symbol win). be. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

First, description will be made with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 640, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the second special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is being varied. Incidentally, the time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol stops and the main control device 100 starts small winning control, the V entrance solenoid, the flow path solenoid 900k, and the retention solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on ( state of FIG. 113(a)). In this state, the player aims at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 and shoots the game ball. It will be in a staying state (900h of FIG. 113), and other game balls will flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1. In addition, the time for the small winning effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

Next, the flow of the small winning control by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, the V inlet solenoid among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the open/close door 900f1 is closed. When the opening/closing door 900f1 is closed, new game balls will not win in the V winning device 900.例文帳に追加Next, after the set time t2 (9 seconds) has passed, the retention solenoid 209a is turned off, the retention member 900n is opened (retracted state), and the game ball retained by the retention member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. continue. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball that was in the V winning device 900 to flow down the normal discharge channel 900e1 when the set time t1 elapses. Only the game ball retained in the device 900 by the retention member 900n flows down through the special discharge channel 900e2. Next, a set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the channel solenoid 900k is turned off, and the opening face of the entrance of the special discharge channel 900e2 is blocked by the guiding piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the special discharge channel 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 elapses.

By driving the retention solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference in this way, even if the game ball is retained by the retention member 900n within the movable range of the guide piece 900h2, the guide piece 900h2 and the retention member 900n Since it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2 without interfering with the game balls that are retained by the above, the device can be made compact.

Finally, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the special discharge channel 900e2 has passed the V winning switch 900e3, the main control device 110 ends the small winning game control, performs the big winning game control, and opens the specific winning opening. be done.

Next, the differences from FIG. 123(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). In FIG. 123(b), since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 is a big win (symbol winning), the V winning device 900 is not operated. That is, after the first special symbol variation control by the main controller 110 ends, the jackpot control is started. In the meantime, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is in the process of varying.

Here, the relationship between the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123(a) and the time of the effect executed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123(b) will be described. In FIG. 123(a), the second special symbol variation time (10 seconds) and the small hit production time (10 seconds) are set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123(b), the second special symbol variation time is set at 20 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V winning or the symbol winning described above, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a ) is to match the timing of opening, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect executed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. can be done.

Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. FIG. 124(a) is an effect image at the start of the time saving game in this control example. On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 is a variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol, and on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the lottery pending number of the second special symbol. In the lower part of the third symbol display device 81, there is a comment display and a comment area for guiding the right-handed game, and in the central part, there is a production area in which the story develops as the game progresses. It is FIG. 124(a) shows a state in which no game ball has entered the second winning hole 640. Therefore, the display indicating that the variable display area is not fluctuating is displayed in the reserved display area, indicating that there is no reservation. The current mode name and a right-handed notification are displayed in the comment area.

FIG. 124(b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The difference from FIG. 124(b) is that the display indicating that the second special symbol is being changed is displayed in the variable display area, and the fork is displayed in the effect area. During the second special pattern variation, the effect area is effected that the character advances deep into the cave. , proceed on one side of the fork in the road. In this way, the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the winning to the second winning port 640, thereby the game ball during the second special symbol variation. is prevented from being stopped, and the holding of the second special symbol can be ensured. In this control example, control is shown in which one of the forked roads is selected and progressed based on the indication that there is a hold. selects a path to proceed by operating a predetermined operation means, and may be controlled to proceed to the selected path as a result of the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 640 occurring after the completion of the selection. . Furthermore, the color tone and design of the fork may be changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol being changed and the lottery result of the second special symbol being reserved. By doing so, the player can participate in the development of the story progressing in the performance area, and can enjoy the performance suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol, so that the game can be played during the second special symbol variation. It is possible to further prevent the ball from being stopped.

Next, FIG. 125(a) is an effect image after the fluctuation is stopped when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. The performance area has a door, the variable display area has a confirmation display indicating a small win, the holding display area has a display indicating that there is a hold, and the comment area has a right-handed notification display. When the main effect image is displayed, the V winning device 900 is open on the lower right side of the game board surface, so a comment is displayed to aim at the V winning device 900 by hitting to the right, and the V winning is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, an effect is executed in which the character destroys the door in the effect area. Also, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the performance area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol of the variation and the lottery result of the reserved second special symbol.

Incidentally, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still fluctuating, the fluctuating display is displayed in the fluctuating display area. Therefore, by reducing the display area or providing it in a place other than the third pattern display device 81, it is made more difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small win or a big win. can be done.

Also, if the variation pattern in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost is set to 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in this control example), an effect image in which the door does not come out may be displayed at this timing.

Next, FIG. 125(b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900. In the effect area, FIG. A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area. The types of characters that appear from inside the door will be described later with reference to FIG. When a monster appears, the game shifts to a big win effect shown in FIG. FIG. 126(a) is an effect image during a big win. Since the effect image during the big win is mainly the battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the reserved display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Instead, a display of the number of rounds of the big win and a ball display (not shown) during the big win are displayed. FIG. 126(b) shows an effect image when a monster is subjugated in a battle effect during a big win. When the monster is subdued in the battle performance, there is at least one more big win (a state in which the lottery result of the reserved second special symbol is a big win or a time-saving game is given after the big win). On the other hand, FIG. 126(c) shows an effect image when the player is defeated by a monster in a battle effect during a big win. When defeated by a monster in a battle production, it is in a state of shifting to a normal game state (a state in which a second special symbol is not reserved and a time-saving game is not given after a big win). It should be noted that a so-called resurrection effect may be provided in which the player revives and subjugates the monster after displaying the effect image in which the player loses the battle. Also, if the V prize is not won during the small win, the door is not opened (not shown).

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, characters appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125(a) will be described. FIG. 127(a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first winning random number counter value C1 is "0" in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2).

FIG. 127(b) shows that both the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that is reserved are small hits with time reduction (in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2, the small hit type counter value C5 is "0 to 49”). In other words, a premium effect is produced in which a jackpot is awarded at least three more times.

The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above. Since the timing is set to the same timing and the timing for displaying the type of jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIGS. It can make the results difficult to grasp.

124(b) and 125(a) are displayed, the player is restrained from stopping the shooting of the game ball, the second special symbol is reliably held, and the V winning device is awarded. can be done with certainty.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152. FIG. In the fifth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, V entrance passage processing and V passage processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing, and special symbol variation processing, starting winning processing, and normal symbols are executed in the timer interrupt processing. The difference is that part of the variation process is changed and that the big hit control process 2 and the small hit control process are executed in the main process. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 128, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the fifth control example. Of this timer interrupt processing, in each of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109, each of S101 to S103, S107, and S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) in the first control example. Since the same processing as is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, S104 special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 129), S105 starting winning processing (see FIG. 134), S106 normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 136), which is executed in the timer interrupt processing ), V entrance passage processing of S140 (see FIG. 137) and V passage processing of S141 (see FIG. 138), which will be described later, are performed.

First, with reference to FIG. 129, the difference from the first control example of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes of S240 to S244 are different from the first control example. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol variation start process 2 of S240 is performed instead of the special symbol variation start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). The details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The processing of S241 to S242 is performed instead of the processing of S219 in the first control example. Specifically, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot after the fluctuation time has passed (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning port is set based on the jackpot type. (S217), set the start of the jackpot (S218). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time-saving counter 203f is set to 0, and this process ends.

By setting the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 to ON in the process of S241, in jackpot control processing 2 (FIG. 140) described later, whether it is the jackpot start timing or whether the jackpot game is in progress. It is possible to determine whether or not

Further, by setting the time saving medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time saving game is finished when the jackpot game is started.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S243).

In the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S243: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S244), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, since the lottery of each special pattern is configured to be a small hit, when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244, the small hit game is started. is configured to Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, special symbol variation start processing 2 will be described. First, FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 that is executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced (S4001). When it is not in time saving (S4001:No), normal fluctuation start processing (S4002) is performed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving (S4001: Yes), the time saving change start process (S4003) is performed, and this process is complete|finished.

Next, normal variation start processing (S4002) and time reduction variation start processing (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240) described above will be described.

First, the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing normal variation start processing (S4002) executed in special symbol variation start processing 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

In the normal fluctuation start process, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). After that, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result is acquired (S4102). Specifically, in the case of lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117(b)) is referred to determine the big hit or the small hit. If the lottery for the second special symbol is based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117(c)) is referred to determine the big win or the small win. .

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a big win (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big win corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type is set (S4104). Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). Thereafter, based on the value of the variation type counter, the normal small hit variation pattern is determined (S4108), and the process is terminated.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern when the game is out of normal is determined (S4110), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the time reduction change start process (S4003) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the time saving variation start process (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time saving fluctuation start process (S4003) differs from the above-described normal fluctuation start process (S4002) in that the display mode and fluctuation pattern for time saving are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The variation patterns for time reduction determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 are determined based on the variation pattern table for time reduction 202d4 (see FIG. 120(d)) as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hit start setting process, which is the process added in the fifth control example described above, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, the opening scenario of the V entrance solenoid is set (S4301). After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit type C or D (S4302). If it is not a small hit type C or D (S4302: No), skip the processing of S4303 to S4306 and proceed to the processing of S4307.

If it is a small hit type C or D (S4302: Yes), the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set to the V passage time big hit type value, and the process proceeds to S4307.

On the other hand, when the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set to the V passing time big hit type value, and the process proceeds to S4307.

After completing the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

In this starting winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to S405 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. When the processing of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (S406). In this S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

Next, the processes of S407 and S408 are executed. When the processing of S408 is finished, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in this control example, the upper limit of the number of reservations in the lottery for the second special symbol is set to 1, so it is configured in this way.

In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processing of S410 to S411 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 is completed, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (S412). In this S412, similarly to the processing of S406 described above, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

After completing the processing of S407, S409 or S412, prefetch processing 2 (S440) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, prefetching process 2 (S440) will be described. FIG. 135 shows the prefetching process 2 (S440) executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 134) instead of the prefetching process of S413 executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flow chart showing.

In the look-ahead process 2, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (S4401). If there is no new winning (S4401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S4401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402).

In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table and the special symbol 1 small winning selection table The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table and the special symbol 2 small winning selection table Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), and the process proceeds to S4405.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 128). This normal symbol variation process (S106) eliminates the change in the lottery probability in the normal symbol lottery in contrast to the first control example described above. , S641 to S644 are executed instead of S616, and there is no change in the variable time depending on whether the time is being shortened (S619 and S621 are deleted). Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes of S601 to S607 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. After completing the process of S607, the lottery result is obtained based on the second winning random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between a high-probability state and a low-probability state in the lottery of normal symbols, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant.

After completing the processing of S640, the processing of S612 to S615 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example. In the processing of S614, it is determined that it is in the time saving (S614: Yes), and in the processing of S615, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

In the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is ON (S641: Yes), in the given time saving game, since it is a case where the initial normal symbol variation process is executed, In order to allow many game balls to enter the 2 winning opening 640, the opening time and number of times of the electric accessary 640a are set to "5 seconds x 1 time" (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), during which game balls passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are guided to the second winning opening 640 . Therefore, when the first normal symbol variation process in the time-saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640, and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol lottery) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

When the process of S642 is finished, the normal symbol working hours reduction initial flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

On the other hand, in the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No), after the first normal symbol variation process is executed, based on the second winning opening 640 Since the number of pending balls in the lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times". (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only some of the game balls passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are the second winning openings. You will be guided to 640. Therefore, when the normal symbol variation processing is executed after the first time in the time-saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning port 640, and can enter the V winning device 900 arranged therebelow. Therefore, during the time-saving game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters only the second winning hole 640 and does not enter the V winning device 900 .

In addition, the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644 is such that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning opening 640. It is not the time, but the time when some of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 can enter. As a result, even when the game ball is not fired at the time of executing the normal symbol variation process for the first time, during the execution of the subsequent normal symbol variation process, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (the second special symbol Lottery) can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, during the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617, the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 can enter the second winning opening 640. Impossible time. Thereby, when the time saving game is not provided, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is not entered into the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is finished, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is finished. As a result, in this control example, regardless of whether or not the time is being shortened, the variation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds.

Incidentally, the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and the time saving function may be provided in conjunction with the time saving function of the special symbol. For example, the variation time may be set to 2 seconds during time saving. In addition, in this control example, the condition for terminating the operation of the electric accessory 640a is only the passage of time. The operation of 640a may end. By doing so, when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately performs the closing operation, and the initial normal symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second or later normal symbol time saving operation is started. Therefore, at the start of the small winning game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, the electric accessory 640a can be prevented from being open for a long period of time, and the small winning game can be performed smoothly. .

Next, the V entrance passage process (S140) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128).

In the V entrance passing process (S140), first, it is determined whether or not it is during a small hit (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S4501: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process is terminated. If it is not during the small winning (S4502: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S4503) and this process is executed. finish.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

Next, the V passing process (S141) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S141). This V passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

In the V passing process, first, the V passing time jackpot type value is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602). If it corresponds to the jackpot C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the jackpot C is not applicable (S4602: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot D is applicable (S4606). In the processing of S4606, when it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot D (S4606: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S4607), and the processing proceeds to S4604. When the processing of S4603 or S4607 is finished, the V passage command is set (S4604), the counter 203f is set to 0 during time saving (S4605), and this processing is finished. In the processing of S4605, the time saving game is terminated by setting the counter 203f to 0 during time saving.

In the processing of S4606, when it is determined that the jackpot D is not applicable (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this processing ends. In this control example, the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 when it is a small hit C or a small hit D. only if there is Therefore, if the V passing time jackpot type value is not jackpot C or jackpot D, and the V passing process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 900e3 is executed, illegal It is considered that the game ball has entered the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S4608, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

Next, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of main processing in the fifth control example. In this main process, a jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004) in the first control example, and a small hit control process (S1041) is executed after the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed. The difference is that

The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and S1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example. detailed description is omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control process 2 (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65. FIG.

In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the special symbol big win is started. In the processing of S4701, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to OFF (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this processing ends. .

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 . When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect for starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S4701: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S4704). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, it is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203v2 is ON. In the process of S4704, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S4704: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S4705). If it is time to start a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S4707). . After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is met (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (eg, total 10) If a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S4708, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is established (S4708: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the big win (S4710). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot.

In the process of S4710, when it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S4710: Yes), the jackpot end command is set (S4711), and the flag during the jackpot is set to OFF (S4712).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot C (S4713). In the process of S4713, if it is determined that it was a big hit C (16R time saving big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal pattern time saving initial flag 203y is set to ON (S4715), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the jackpot D (16R time-saving no jackpot) was determined (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and this process ends.

The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223 . Then, it transmits to the display control device 114 a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected display mode of the jackpot end. When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, if it is not the time to end the jackpot (S4710: No), this process ends.

Then, with reference to FIG. 141, small hit control processing (S1041) is demonstrated. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small winning control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning, V This is a process for opening or closing the opening/closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900. FIG.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small winning start command, it transmits a display small winning start command to the display control device 114 . When the small winning start command for display is received by the display control device 114, an effect for starting a small winning is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

After completing the processing of S4803, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S4804), the operation of the retention member is started (S4805), and this processing ends.

The open scenario referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the above-described small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid The 900k open scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, the opening/closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened in all the small winning games, and the game ball can enter the V winning device 900. FIG. On the other hand, only in small hits C or D when the channel solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball entering the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge channel 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which no big hit is given.

In addition, by starting the operation of the retention member (the retention solenoid 209a is turned on) in the process of S4805, it is possible to retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 900h3.

On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is not the timing to start the small winning of special symbols (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S4806). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol is included. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is ON. In the process of S4804, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S4804: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S4806, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the process of winning (S4806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the V entrance is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the open/close door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 in total) are placed in the V winning device 900 When winning a prize, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that the closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the V winning hole 900a.

In the process of S4807, if the condition for closing the opening/closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V entrance solenoid is turned off to close the opening/closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( S4808), the retention solenoid 209a is turned off in order to end the operation of the retention member (S4809), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the small winning (S4810). Specifically, after the passage of a predetermined time (three seconds in this control example) from the establishment of the closing condition of the V entrance described above, it is determined that it is time to end the small win. As a result, after the operation of the staying member 900n is completed, the small winning end processing (turning off the flow path solenoid) can be executed, so that the game ball staying in the distribution destination area 900h3 is moved to the V winning switch 900e3. You can definitely hit the ball.

In the process of S4810, if it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: Yes), set the small hit medium flag 203w2 to OFF (S4811), set the small hit end command (S4811), open each solenoid The scenario is cleared (S4813), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4810, when it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S4810: No), this process is ended as it is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 142, the details of the small winning ending process (S4812) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing small winning end processing (S4812). This small hit end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined that it is the timing of the small hit end in the small hit control process.

In the small hit end process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to OFF (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902). In the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small winning game. A process for starting execution of a jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900e3 is performed.

Specifically, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 are set to ON (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not ON (S4902: No), the game ball does not pass through the V winning prize switch 900e3 to the small winning game ball, so a big hit is given. In order to end without doing, set a small hit end command (S4907), and proceed to the processing of S4909.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the jackpot end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223 . Then, it transmits to the display control device 114 a display jackpot end command corresponding to the selected display mode of the jackpot end. When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the jackpot end effect.

When the processing of S4906 or S4907 is finished, the value of the V passage time jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared (S4908), and this processing is finished.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the command determination process 2 (S1530) executes a process based on the reception of a win-related command. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main controller 110, as in the first control example described above.

In the command determination process 2 (S1530), the processes from S1601 to S1610 are executed as in the first control example. After that, in the process of S1609, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and in S1619. Go to processing. On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1619.

In the processing of S1619, as in the first control example, processing according to other commands is executed (S1619), and then this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the hit-related processing (S1643) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S1643). This hit-related process (S1643) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 143).

In the hit related process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S5001). When it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5002), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 80). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot (for example, FIG. 125(b), FIG. 127).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5003). In the process of S5003, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5004). After that, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this processing ends.

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S5006). In the processing of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S5006: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether or not the continuation determination counter 223m is 0. (S5008).

In the processing of S5008, if it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), this means that the jackpot D has been executed twice in succession, and this is the timing at which the continuation of the jackpot ends. The round accumulation counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5008, if it is determined that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), this process ends.

In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S5006: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command is received (S5010).

In the process of S5010, if it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S5006: Yes), set the small hit start command for display based on the small hit type (S5011), then start the small hit It is determined whether or not the game is a small winning C (S5012). In the process of S5012, when it is determined that the small winning game to be started is the small winning C (S5012: Yes), after that, since the big winning game based on the big winning C is given, the number of consecutive executions of the big winning D is increased. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5012, if it is determined that it is not a small hit C (S5012: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit D (S5014). In the process of S5014, when it is determined that the small winning D (S5014: Yes), since a big winning game based on the big winning D is given after that, a continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big winning D 1 is subtracted from 223m (S5015), and the process ends. In the process of S5014, when it is determined that the small hit is not D (S5014: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S5010: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command is received (S5016).

In the processing of S5016, when it is determined that the small winning end command is received (S5016: Yes), in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small winning game, the small winning end command for display is set (S5017). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5016, when it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

In the process of S5018, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance pass counter 223j incremented here is referred to in order to determine the number of game balls entering the V winning device 900 during the small winning game in the V pass processing described later.

When the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set (S5020) in order to execute an effect based on the ball entering the V winning device 900 during the small winning game (see, for example, FIG. 125(a)). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5018 that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance command has been received (S5021).

In the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V pass command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V pass process is executed in order to execute the process based on the ball entering the V prize switch 900e3 of the V prize winning device 900. (S5022), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5021, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), this process ends.

Here, the V passage processing (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S5022). This V passage processing (S5022) is processing that is executed when it is determined that the V passage command has been received in the hit-related processing (see FIG. 144).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the small winning game being executed is the small winning C (S5101). In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit C (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a hold (S5102).

In the process of S5102, if it is determined that there is no winning in the hold (S5102: No), there is no big win or small win based on the held ball, but the big win C is given based on the passage of the V prize switch 900e3. be. Here, the jackpot C is a time-saving jackpot, and the probability that it will be a small hit C or D in the time-saving game (that is, it will be a jackpot C or D thereafter) is "397/399". Therefore, a 2V effect command for display is set (S5105) in order to execute a 2V effect which is an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that two consecutive jackpot games will be provided thereafter, and the process proceeds to S5106.

The 2V effect command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the 2V command for display, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that there is a high probability that two consecutive jackpot games will be awarded.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that there is a hit on hold (S5102: Yes), a jackpot C is given based on the passage of the V prize switch 900e3, and a jackpot or small hit based on the held ball is given. is the case. That is, there is a high probability that the big winning game will be executed two times in a row, and the big winning game will be executed based on the small winning in the reserve, so that the probability that the big winning game will be awarded three times in a row is high.

Here, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103).

In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect suggesting that the probability of winning three consecutive jackpot games is high (for example, FIG. 127 (b )), a 3V effect command for display is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is greater than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball has not entered the V winning device 900, such as when the game ball has not been sufficiently shot during the small winning game. This is when there are not enough balls. In this case, in this control example, the process of S5105 is executed in order not to display an effect suggesting that the probability of winning three consecutive jackpot games is high, and the process proceeds to the process of S5106. As a result, even when the number of prize balls entering the V winning device 900 is small, the motivation of the player to enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 can be improved.

The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (for example, see FIG. 127(b)) suggesting that there is a high probability that three consecutive jackpot games will be awarded. do.

In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the small winning game being executed was not the small winning C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the hold (S5107). When it is determined that there is a hit in the process of S5107 (S5107: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

In the processing of S5108, if it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), a big hit game based on V passage is executed, and a small hit C is given based on the held ball (that is, 2 This is the case when there is a high possibility that a continuous jackpot game will be awarded. Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 127(b)) suggesting that the probability of winning three consecutive jackpot games is high, a 3V effect command for display is set (S5109), The process proceeds to S5106.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5108, if it is determined that the hold is not a small hit C (S5108: No), a big hit game based on V passage is executed, and a small hit D is given based on the hold ball (that is, , 1 jackpot game is awarded). Therefore, in this case, a 2V effect command for display is set (S5110) in order to execute an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is awarded two times in succession, and the process proceeds to S5106.

In the process of S5107, when it is determined that there is no hit in the hold (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the execution of the jackpot game based on the V passage, so the jackpot based on the V passage. In order to execute an effect suggesting that it has become, a display V effect command is set (S5111), and the process proceeds to S5106.

The V effect command for display set in the process of S5111 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the V command for display, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect indicating that a big winning game is awarded based on the game ball passing through the V winning prize switch 900e3 in the small winning game. indicate.

When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is completed, the V entrance passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152. FIG. The fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a win-related command process is executed when a win-related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S2302). This command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Next, in the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command (S2440).

In the process of S2440, when it is determined that there is a hit-related command (S2440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2441), and the process returns to S2401. On the other hand, in the process of S2440, if it is determined that there is no win-related command (S2440: No), other command process is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the win-related command process (S2441) will be described. This hit-related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

In the hit-related command process (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that there is a hit start command for display (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Here, with reference to FIG. 148(a), details of the jackpot start command process (S5202) will be described. FIG. 148(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the hit-related command process (FIG. 147). This is processing for displaying on the pattern display device 81 .

In the jackpot start command process (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set off (S5305), End this process.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5201, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. After completing the processing of S5201 or S5202, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). If it is determined in the process of S5203 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

Details of the round number command processing (S5204) will now be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process (S5204). This round number command process (S5204) is a process executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command process (FIG. 147), and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect when the third symbol display device 81 is pressed.

In the round number command processing (S5204), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5203, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. After completing the processing of S5203 or S5204, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

In the process of S5205, when it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 149(a), details of the jackpot end command process (S5206) will be described. FIG. 149(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot end command process (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and the third symbol display of an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game. This is processing for displaying on the device 81 .

In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5207.

After completing the processing of S5205 or S5206, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

Here, with reference to Drawing 149 (b), the details of small hit start command processing (S5208) are explained. FIG. 149(b) is a flow chart showing the small winning start command process (S5208). This small hit start command process (S5208) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and the effect that suggests the start of the small hit game is performed. This is processing for displaying on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the small hit start command process (S5208), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Thereafter, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no display small hit start command (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

After completing the processing of S5207 or S5208, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). In the process of S5209, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

Here, with reference to Drawing 150 (a), the details of small hit end command processing (S5210) are explained. FIG. 150(a) is a flow chart showing the small hit end command process (S5210). This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and an effect that suggests the end of the small hit game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the small hit end command process (S5210), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the small winning end command for display is not received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5211.

After completing the process of S5209 or S5210, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). In the process of S5211, if it is determined that there is a display V entrance pass command (S5211: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

Details of the V entrance passage command process (S5212) will now be described with reference to FIG. 150(b). FIG. 150(b) is a flow chart showing the V entrance passage command process (S5212). This V entrance pass command process (S5212) is a process executed when it is determined that the V entrance pass command is received in the command determination process (FIG. 147). This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect based on the entry of the game ball.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5805), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5211, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5213.

After completing the process of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a 3V effect command for display (S5213). In the process of S5213, if it is determined that there is a 3V effect command for display (S5213: Yes), 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

Details of the 3V effect command process (S5214) will now be described with reference to FIG. 151(a). FIG. 151(a) is a flow chart showing the 3V effect command process (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a 3V effect command for display has been received. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that (3 times continues).

Specifically, as described above, the 3V effect command for display gives a big win when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small winning game, and becomes a big win C. It is received from the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a second special symbol reserved ball.

In the 3V effect command process (S5214), first, the 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5213, when it is determined that there is no 3V effect command for display (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5215.

After completing the process of S5213 or S5214, it is determined whether or not there is a 2V effect command for display (S5215). In the process of S5215, if it is determined that there is a 2V effect command for display (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

Details of the 2V effect command process (S5216) will now be described with reference to FIG. 151(b). FIG. 151(b) is a flow chart showing the 2V effect command process (S5216). This 2V effect command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that a 2V effect command for display has been received. continuation) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, as described above, the 2V effect command for display gives a big win when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small winning game, and becomes a big win D. It is received from the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a second special symbol reserved ball.

In the 2V effect command processing (S5216), first, the 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 147, the description is continued. In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is no 2V effect command for display (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5217.

After completing S5215 or S5216, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). In the process of S5217, if it is determined that there is a V effect command for display (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5217, if it is determined that there is no V effect command for display (S5217: No), there is no win-related command to be executed, so this processing ends as it is.

Details of the V effect command process (S5218) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing (S5218). This V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the V effect command for display has been received. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed the V prize switch 900e3.

In the V effect command process (S5218), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this processing ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, it is shifted to the state (time-saving game state) where it is easy to receive the lottery of the second special symbol. 2. A game feature of providing a big win by opening the V winning device 900 based on the lottery result of the special symbol and passing through a specific area (special discharge channel 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing through the V winning switch 900e4). It has

The pachinko machine 10 having such playability has a plurality of technical configurations for preventing game balls from entering or passing through various devices out of the proper game order.

First, the game board 13 is not provided with a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 does not open in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13). provided only on the right side of the Secondly, based on the game ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to win the game ball in the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Even so, the time (0.2 seconds) during which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state in the normal game state. Third, the game ball drop area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally dropped) to the electric accessory 640a, and the game ball rolling from the game ball drop area a is received and guided to the second winning opening 640. A game ball guide area b is provided in which the ball naturally falling from the game board 13 is not buffered, and the game ball needs to roll in the game ball guide area b to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is shortened from the time. Fourthly, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, when a so-called small win, which is not a big win but is opened by the V winning device 900, is selected, a special discharge stream provided with a V winning switch 900e4 is selected. In order to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the path 900e2, two switching members 900h and staying members 900n are provided. Such a configuration. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering or passing through various devices out of proper game order.

In addition, in the fifth control example, from the upstream side of the game ball flow path, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second winning port 640 (electric accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (Specific winning opening 65a), but the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be changed as appropriate. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 or the V winning device 900 during the jackpot game in the right-handed state, a normal symbol start hole (through Gate) 67 , second winning port 640 , V winning device 900 , all or part of which may be provided with the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the game ball flow-down path. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the launched game ball enters the first variable prize winning device 65 on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, so that various devices provided downstream thereof. Entry of balls can be prevented, and entry or passage of game balls into various devices other than the proper order of play can be prevented. In order to prevent this more reliably, by opening the opening and closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball flow path, the ball entry or passage opening of various devices provided on the downstream side It is better to block it. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through the various devices out of the proper game order, the detection signals from the various switches that detect the game balls provided in the various devices and the current game state are used. It is advisable to notify Regarding the contents of the notification at that time, if a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly related to the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormal notification is given, and in the normal game state, the passage of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is notified. When it is detected, by changing the urgency of the state notification and the notification, it becomes possible for the game parlor clerk to quickly perceive a situation that may be disadvantageous to the game parlor. In addition, as the abnormality notification, there is notification by outputting a signal to the outside while notifying with a sound louder than the game volume. Conceivable.

Furthermore, in this control example, from the upstream side of the game ball flow path, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the second winning port 640 (electric accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (specific However, in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small winning game, the V winning device 900 is positioned above the second winning port 640 (electric accessory 640a). may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the electric accessory 640a variably operates and becomes open during a small winning game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. - 特許庁Also, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 . With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 during the small winning game, so that the electric accessory 640a is variable during the small winning game. can be suppressed, and there is no influence on the entrance of game balls to the V winning device 900.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this control example, the game ball rolling surface on the top of the V winning device 900 and the upper surface of the open/close door 900f1 are used to delay the flow of the game ball, so that the game ball can enter the V winning device 900 at the time of the small winning game. In addition to this, for example, a rotating body having 10 pockets in which one game ball can be inserted in the V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13 A V pocket is provided with an opening communicating with the special discharge path 900e2, and a configuration in which the tenth game ball entered at the start of a small winning game is stored in the V pocket, and a game ball is stored in the V winning device. A storage space may be provided, and when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space, the game balls may pass through the V winning switch 900e3 for the first time. Also, a control and configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively entered into the V winning device 900 by utilizing the advancing and retreating motion of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, by setting a limit on the number of time saving times of normal symbols, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small winning game. Specifically, the normal design fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) and the electric accessory 640a operating time (for example, 2 seconds) are shorter than the second special design fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) where the lottery result is a small hit. (For example, 5 seconds) should be set to the number of times of time saving (in the case of the above example, the number of times of time saving is 4 times). By configuring in this way, since the time-saving game of normal symbols is finished at the start of the small winning game, it is possible to shorten the time during which the electric accessory 640a variably operates during the small winning game. In addition, when the small winning game is started, control may be performed to extend the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, prohibit the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a, and change it to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). Then, when the reserved memory of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the control to extend the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, prohibit the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a, and change it to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). may be performed. In addition, the time saving of the normal design here means that in addition to the control to internally terminate the time saving game and return to the normal game, the fluctuation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times of the time saving game of the normal design, After a predetermined number of times, the variable time is set long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set long only for the first predetermined number of times, and after the predetermined number of times, the variable operation time is set short. , the concept including all the control of the state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a reservation storage function (special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the second special symbol lottery. Since this reserved memory is an important configuration for maintaining the game performance of this control example, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of technical configurations for accumulating the reserved memory.

First, the development of the story displayed in the performance area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time-saving game state is performed based on the winning to the second winning port 640 . Secondly, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds (FIG. 120(d)) of the second special symbol in which the lottery result is a small hit during the time saving game is made longer than the fluctuation time of 3 seconds (S620) of the normal symbol. Such a configuration. By using all or part of such a configuration, it is possible to accumulate reserved memory. In addition, regarding the second configuration described above, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal design is constant regardless of whether it is during the time saving game, but the fluctuation time of the normal design during the time saving game is other than during the time saving game ( It may be set shorter than normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the variation time of the second special symbol at which the lottery result during the time saving game is a small hit longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. That is, generally, in the pachinko machine, the time-saving function is canceled during the jackpot game, and the normal symbols fluctuate according to the fluctuating time based on the normal game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game, the electric accessory 640a does not operate unless the fluctuation time of the normal symbols in the normal game passes at the maximum, and the game ball can be entered into the second winning hole. I can't. In the meantime, if the variation of the second special symbol is determined and a big win occurs via a small win, the problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is the feature of this control example, cannot be accumulated. occurs. In order to solve such a problem, the variation time of the second special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are set to the times described above.

In the above-mentioned contents, the fluctuation time of the special design is set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal design, but the fluctuation time of the second special design and the small winning game (V The total time (to the detection of the game ball by the winning switch 900e4) may be set longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time during the normal game. This is because it is in the time-saving game state during the small winning game. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small winning game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining the balls flowing down to the special discharge path 900e2 in the V winning device as in this control example. In the unlikely event that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time-saving game, there is a risk that the first special symbol will start to change. It is preferable to perform a highlight display to indicate that a strike should be performed, or to provide voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113 .

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 117(c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big wins and misses, but all of them may be sorted into small wins. By doing so, the reserved memory portion of the special symbols always becomes a big win via the V winning device, the speed of the game can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the first variable prize winning device 65 (specific prize winning port 65a) and the V prize winning device 900, which are opened when a jackpot game is played, are provided separately. The device 900 may have it. In that case, during the jackpot game, the game ball entering the V winning device 900 is caused to flow down to the normal discharge channel as shown in FIG. 113(a) using the switching member 900h. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of devices, thereby reducing costs and saving space. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to provide a time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game by using the normal discharge channel 900e1 and the special discharge channel 900e2 in the V winning device 900 . In this case, when the game ball flows down to the special discharge channel 900e2, time saving is given. Incidentally, the switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be determined in advance based on the first special symbol or the lottery of 2, and the switching member 900h is regularly moved at regular intervals to discharge the flow. You may make it switch a road. Also, it may be combined with the technical configuration of the first control example to the fourth control example to determine whether or not to give probability variation.

Also, the number of discharge passages in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be three or more depending on the number of functions. Furthermore, the switching member for switching each discharge flow path is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may have any configuration capable of switching the flow path.

In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate, and the number of balls paid out is fixed. There may be fewer (eg, two rounds) and no time-saving jackpots. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game property (so-called time-saving falling function) in which the time-saving ends without obtaining a large amount of paid-out balls. Furthermore, in this control example, when a game ball is entered into the V winning device 900 that is in the open state during the time saving game, it is always a big hit, but it is distributed to a small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). may be provided.

By using each of the above-described configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which less balls are output and a time saving ends or a pattern in which a jackpot does not occur as a result of entering a ball into the V winning device 900 during a time saving game, so that a jackpot game is obtained. The player can be overwhelmed with joy and sorrow.

In addition, in this control example, the determination of whether or not to give the time-saving game after the end of the big hit is decided based on the small-hit type (in addition, the big-hit type). Time saving is not always given after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot hits during a non-time saving game, time saving is always given after the jackpot ends. , Control may be performed to determine whether or not time saving is given after the end of the jackpot. Even with such control, it is set whether or not to give the time saving game after the big hit based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol.

In addition, the number of the second special symbol lotteries that can be reserved and stored may be appropriately set, and various games can be played by changing the number of lottery suspension storages of the second special symbols and the small winning lottery probability of the second special symbols. It is possible to have sexuality.

<Modified example of the fifth control example>
A modification of the fifth control example will be described below with reference to FIG. In this modification, the number of times the lottery of the second special symbol can be held and stored is increased (for example, 4), and the probability of winning special 2 based on the lottery of the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 1/6) pattern (Figure 117 (C) pattern of decreasing the value C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value and increasing the deviation). By doing so, there is no guarantee that the special 2 hit will occur twice, but since it is possible to receive many lotteries of the second special pattern with a higher expectation of the big hit than the first special pattern, the lottery depends on the result of the lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring the consecutive villas, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to provide a blissful performance for the player, such as a quadruple manor determination performance, by reading in advance the results of the lottery held and stored.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. In the sixth control example, a detour member 660 is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and when a game is played so as to shoot a game ball to the right side of the game area (right hitting), the open/close door 65f1 is closed. In some cases, the difference is that up to about 12 game balls roll on the opening/closing door 65f1. Furthermore, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed from that of the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (the part where the detour member 660 is arranged). The detour member 660 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 with a screw in a state in which a flow path through which game balls can flow down is protruded to the front side of the game board 13. . The detour member 660 is composed of channel wall portions 660a facing each other in the front-rear direction of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

The flow channel wall portion 660a is composed of a front flow channel wall portion 660a1 and a rear flow channel wall portion 660a2. It is partially connected and integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 has three wall portions protruding to the rear side, each of which is spaced at intervals of two game balls or more (in this control example, two and a half game balls). ing. The rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three wall portions that protrude toward the front side, and the intervals between the wall portions are the same as those of the front side wall portion.

The front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 are configured such that the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and further, the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 are separated from each other. It is arranged at a position through which a game ball can pass. The detour member 660 has a bottom surface that slopes slightly downward from right to left, and when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, the bottom surface is closed, and game balls bypass the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. It rolls while meandering in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the path member 660 . Furthermore, a connecting portion 660k that connects the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom surface connects the wall portions from the entrance portion of the detour member 660 and the projecting walls of the front side wall portion 660a1 to the rear side wall portion 660a2. is formed as Even when the door 65f1 is closed, the connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the door 65f1 to form a step, thereby reducing the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the door 65f1.

The rolling speed of the game ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball meanders and rolls from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball rolls on the open/close door 65f1. can be increased. In the detour member 660 in this control example, the interval between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed by 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls enter in the front-rear direction in the first detour channel portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion protruding from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion protruding from the rear side wall portion 660a2. Consists of flow channels. A maximum of 12 game balls can roll in the detour member 660 by forming five similar flow paths in communication with each other.

As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the open/close door 65f1 is opened, the game balls flowing down on the open/close door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, thereby increasing the number of game balls. of game balls can be entered in a short time. Furthermore, as will be described later, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, each time a game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 65e1, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by rotating the rotating piece 650a. The closing opening piece 650i is gradually moved in the direction of opening the special discharge channel 65e2 (to the left in FIG. 155). When nine game balls pass through the normal discharge channel 65e4, the opening piece 650i is moved to a position where the game balls can pass through to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the open/close door 65f1 is opened while nine or more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660, the game balls can be allowed to flow down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, and it is possible to give the player a variable probability gaming state. As a result, at the timing of the start of the jackpot game, the player can put many game balls on the detour member 660 before the start of the jackpot so that more game balls are rolling on the detour member 660. A game can be played to fire at 660 . Therefore, even in a jackpot game in which the opening time of the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, the player can play the game by consuming a large amount of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of the game parlor. Furthermore, even if it is a short-time jackpot game, it is possible to increase interest.

Next, referring to FIG. 155, the first variable winning device 65 will be described. In this control example, a channel opening device 650 is provided instead of the switching member 65h and the channel solenoid 65k for moving the switching member 65h with respect to the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example. differ in

Here, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of this channel opening device 650 will be described. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic diagram of the channel opening device 650. FIG. The channel opening member 650 includes an opening piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge channel 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the opening piece 650i, a rotating drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotating drum 650b for winding the spring wire 650h. and a movable solenoid 650c for moving a restricting piece 650d for restricting the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 155, the opening piece 650i is configured in a door shape so as to block the upstream opening of the special discharge channel 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable to the left and right. One end of the spring wire 650h is attached to one end of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of a stainless steel extra-fine wire and has a coiled spring in the middle. This coil spring 650h is attached so that the opening piece 650i always urges in the direction to close the special discharge channel 65e2. The other end side of the coil spring 650h is attached to a wire attachment portion 650f of a rotating drum 650b. When the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction of winding up the spring wire 650h (right rotation direction in FIG. 156), the spring wire 650h is The opening piece 650i wound around the rotating drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the opening piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

The rotating piece 650a is always arranged to protrude into the normal discharge passage 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b, and has a one-way clutch structure in which the rotating drum 650b rotates only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and rotates the rotating piece 650a downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) by the spring wire 650h. After rotating in the direction, it is configured to rotate and return to the position (position shown in FIG. 155) before contact with the game ball by the biasing force applied to the rotating piece 650a. When the rotating piece 650a reverses and returns, only the rotating piece 650a rotates without rotating the rotating drum 650b. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to 650e4 projecting rearward (rearward of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotary drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to 650e4 are attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b at 90-degree intervals. The stopper members 650e1 to 650e4 are configured to abut against a restricting piece 650d, and when the restricting piece 650d abuts on one of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the rotating drum 650b winds up the spring wire 650h, and the direction opposite to that of the rotating drum 650b. to prevent it from rotating. On the other hand, when the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up, the restricting piece 650d comes into contact with the stopper members 650e1 to e4 to change in the rotating direction. (See FIG. 156), and the stopper members e1 to e4 are positioned on the left side to restrict rotation in the direction opposite to the winding direction of the wire.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the normal discharge passage 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a, and when the rotating piece 650a rotates the rotating drum 650b by 90 degrees, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are regulated. By being restricted at its rotational position by 650d, rotational drum 650h is held at its rotational position. As the next game ball flows down the normal discharge channel 65e4, the same operation is repeated, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In this control example, at the timing when the open/close door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, the movable solenoid 650c is also energized, and the regulating member 650d is moved toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction away from the stopper members 650e1 to 650e4). As a result, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to 65e4 and the restricting member 650d is released, and the rotary drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the biasing force of the spring wire 650h, and the opening piece 650i is moved to the closed position. Sliding and movable.

Therefore, in the first variable winning device 65 in this control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give the odds depending on the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 . Therefore, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the variable probability game will be given even after the jackpot game is started. In addition, it is possible to vary the ratio of variable probability games to be given according to the open time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In this embodiment, the rotating piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge passage 65e4. , the opening piece 650i may be configured to move. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the tenth game ball enters, the opening piece 650i is in an open state, and can be easily configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, it can be configured so that the probability variation is surely given by entering 10 more balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening pieces 650i are configured to be in the open state when nine pieces have been won. Furthermore, not limited to the configuration of this control example, when the game ball wins the first variable prize winning device 65, the sprocket is rotated, and the tenth game ball can win the prize opening provided in the sprocket. It may be configured to face any position.

<Regarding the seventh control example>
A seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. FIG. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that a continuous chance effect, which will be described later, is executed, which is not provided in the above-described first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

First, the continuous chance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the order of variation of the special symbols is changed in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 and the reserved balls are stored. is configured as follows. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing a maximum of 8 reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The types are indicated by symbols. In addition, in this seventh control example, in the look-ahead process 2 (Fig. 166, S450), the type of variation pattern selected (short out, long out, reach, super reach, special reach) is configured to be discriminable. It is

In an example of stored balls shown in FIG. 157(a), six reserved balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth reserved ball is stored. 168 shows a state in which a continuous chance presentation is set by winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to be described later. Details will be described later, but if the prize winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 when a held ball is generated is a super reach or a special reach, a lottery determines whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect. is determined. When it is determined to execute the continuous chance production, the number of times to execute the continuous chance production is determined within the range of the already stored reserved balls. This number of times is determined by the number of times including the ball on hold (in this example, the 6th ball on hold) determined to execute consecutive chances. For example, if there are 6 balls on hold as shown in FIG. 157(a), it is determined by lottery up to 6 times.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 158(a) to 159(a), an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. In FIG. 158(a), the execution of the continuous chance production is determined by the winning information command for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157(a). is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the variable display of the first special symbol when the execution of is set.

In the performance in which the execution of the continuous chance performance is set, the performance in which the symbols tremble is executed while the special symbols are still stopped in the previous variable display when the special symbols start to fluctuate. After that, as a background image, the characters "Continuous Chance!!" are displayed at the same time as the special symbols change. Here, the symbol ha indicated by five "black circles" displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the number of pending balls currently stored. Here, the reserved pattern ha1 is the second reserved ball shown in FIG. 157(a), the reserved pattern ha2 is the third reserved ball, the reserved pattern ha3 is the fourth reserved ball, and the reserved pattern ha4 is reserved. The fifth ball, reserved pattern ha5, corresponds to the sixth reserved ball.

Figure 158(b) shows that the special symbol stops after the variation time has elapsed in the variation of the special symbol shown in Figure 158(a) (variation corresponding to the first held ball shown in Figure 157(a)) The display mode when displayed is shown. In this continuous chance effect, when the continuous chance effect is set for the change to the next ball, the previous continuous chance effect is a combination of specific main symbols called chance eyes (in this control example, "341 ”) is configured to be displayed. It should be noted that the chance number is set with a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big win (indicated by a series of squares), and informs that the player is out of the game. By displaying the number of chances, the player can not only recognize that the lottery result is lost, but also recognize that the continuous chance effect will be continuously executed for the next variation. The characters of ``continuous chance performance!!'' displayed on the background image are continuously displayed even when the variation of the special pattern is stopped, and are displayed across the start of variation of the next special pattern.

FIG. 159(a) shows an example of the variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the second retained symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158(a) to (b)) shown in FIG. 157(a) Fig. 3 shows. In FIG. 159(a), the reserved symbol ha2 is a reserved ball (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157(a)) for which the super reach variation pattern is selected as shown in FIG. 157(a). The display mode when the ready-to-reach state occurs after a certain period of time has passed from the start of fluctuation is shown. Here, since the suitability determination result of this variation is out, like the combination of special symbols shown in FIG.

Here, returning to FIG. 157(a), the hiding effect in the continuous chance effect will be described. As already described above, execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, based on the winning information of the first to fifth retained balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether the retained balls of super reach or special reach are stored. When the reserved ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored as shown in the example shown in FIG. 1 or more continuous ball It is set for a held ball that executes a latent effect for.

Here, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the hiding effect is a effect that is displayed in a trembling state, with the symbols in the stopped state of the previous special symbols being stopped, when the special symbols start to fluctuate. . Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance production, after the stop symbols are shaken and displayed, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance production is made at the same time as the fluctuation. After that, even if the variation starts, the background display indicating that it is a continuous chance production is not displayed. By constructing the hiding effect in this way, the player can expect that the continuous chance effect will be started by displaying the stop symbols with shaking. It should be noted that an effect similar to this hiding effect may be selected and executed even when the execution of the continuous chance effect is not determined and when the normal special symbols fluctuate. Therefore, even if the hidden effect is displayed, the player recognizes that the continuous chance effect is not always executed by the special symbol effect corresponding to the subsequent suspension, and the continuous chance effect is performed by the hidden effect. The game can be played in anticipation of the execution of

In FIG. 157(a), among the 3rd to 5th reserved balls, the processing of S1726 of the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 causes the 5th reserved ball Execution of the hiding effect has been determined (assumed to have been determined) up to (the 3rd to 5th reserved balls). As a result, in the variation of the special symbols for the third to fifth reserved balls, the latent performance shown in FIG. 159(b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player has missed the final variation in the continuous chance production with the second reserved ball, but the continuous chance production will start again, or in fact, the continuous chance production will be latent. You can have expectations that it will continue just by being there. Then, in the example of FIG. 157(a), the continuous chance effect is executed again in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball.

In this control example, no matter how many times the hiding effect is executed in succession, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance effect will be executed afterwards. In this case, it may be constructed so that the continuous chance effect is always executed after that. By constructing in this way, when the hiding effect is executed, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive times, and there is an effect that the interest can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(b), the number of held balls to be established after the held balls that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined, and the number of held balls is set as the maximum. , the case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), 6 pending balls have been established, and by the winning information command output when the 6th pending has been established, continuous chance effects can be produced from the 3rd pending ball. It shows the case where execution is decided. FIG. 157(c) shows the state of FIG. 157(b) where digestion of the retained spheres has progressed and the third retained sphere shown in FIG. 157(b) has been shifted to the first retained sphere. in the state shown. In this state, at the timing when the first held ball (the first held ball shown in FIG. 157(c)) starts to fluctuate, the execution of the continuous chance production is determined to be held (the held ball shown in FIG. 157(c) ), the number of executions of the hiding effect is determined with the maximum number of held balls established after the fourth held ball). Here, the hiding effect is executed for the consecutive number of times that the above-described hiding effect is determined for the variation of the held ball that fluctuates after the variation for the fourth held ball is completed.

As a result, the player can continue the continuous chance production even after the final variation in the continuous chance production (in this control example, the variation of the special symbol for the fourth ball on hold) is completed because the hiding performance is executed. You can expect that they do. Furthermore, since the latent effect is executed within the range of the held ball that has been established at the start of the first continuous chance production, super reach or special reach that hits the held ball that has been established It can be expected that the variation is memorized and the continuous chance effect or the latent effect is executed.

Furthermore, in addition to the configuration of this control example, super reach or special reach is performed on the holding ball that is established at the time of the start fluctuation of the continuous chance production (the holding ball that is stored after the holding ball of the final fluctuation of the continuous chance production). If there is, it is set to execute the latency effect of the suspended ball before the change, and by executing the continuous chance effect again with the change of Super Reach or Special Reach, the player is more likely to be hidden. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance production when displayed. Also, in this case, it is of course possible to start the continuous chance effect with the held balls that are stored before the held balls that become special reach or super reach.

Regarding the continuous chance effect, in this control example, the notification mode is displayed in the background, but this is not restrictive. It may be changed to a different color, or it may be configured to output a type of BGM or a special sound effect. Furthermore, the chance numbers displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and may be other combinations, and may be displayed in a pattern other than the normal pattern, for example, the characters "Continue". Alternatively, it may be displayed in a variable pattern such as a character. display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163, the electrical configuration in this seventh control example will be described. Only points that are different from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed. It differs in that it has been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in this control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. The ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of 113 will be explained. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a consecutive chance number table 222d and a latency number table 222e are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The consecutive chance count table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. This consecutive chance number table 222d is different from the winning consecutive chance number table 202d (see FIG. 162(a)) that is referred to when the winning information command indicates a win. 162(b)), which is referred to in a certain case. The consecutive chance number table 222d is a data table for determining whether or not to execute consecutive chance effects, and for determining the number of times when the consecutive chance effects are to be executed.

FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning consecutive chance number table 222d. In this winning consecutive chance number table 222d, the number of consecutive chance effects is not executed for each current number of pending balls, and the current number of pending balls is set as the maximum value for each execution number, and a number determination counter 223n (0 to 198), which will be described later. ) are set respectively. When the number of pending balls is stored as 1, as shown in FIG. 162(a), a value of "0 to 160" is set as the determination value of the determination content of non-execution of the continuous chance effect. A determination value of "161 to 198" is set as a determination value for one consecutive chance effect. Here, based on the obtained value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, it is compared with the determination value of the consecutive chance number table 222d, and the determination content set to the matching determination value is selected. Here, if non-execution is selected, the continuous chance presentation is not executed. Further, when the number of consecutive chance effects is determined, the consecutive chance effects are set for the execution of the first ball on hold. It should be noted that the number of times of execution set in this consecutive chance number table 222d is the held ball (the sixth held ball in the example of FIG. 157(a)) that triggered whether or not to execute the consecutive chance effect. , and indicates the number of held balls that have been stored consecutively before it. For example, when the consecutive chance effect lottery is executed for the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. The continuous chance performance is started from the second reserved ball, and the continuous chance performance is continuously executed up to the sixth reserved ball.

Similarly, the determination value to be referred to is set from the continuous chance count table 222d according to the number of reserved balls when the prize information command is received. In addition, in this control example, the more the number of reserved balls when the winning command is received, the easier it is to execute the continuous chance effect. Also, as is clear from the comparison with the consecutive chance count table 222d for loss shown in FIG. is set to have a high probability of being executed. As a result, the execution of the continuous chance presentation is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super ready-to-win or the special ready-to-win where the result of the win/fail determination is winning. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be more likely to be determined as the number of retained balls increases, the continuous chance effect is more likely to be executed in response to fluctuations in a larger number of continuous retained balls, and the player is also affected in the loss variation. can play a game with a high degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, as shown in the consecutive chance frequency table 222d for loss, even when the number of pending balls is 6 or more, if the result of the success/fail judgment is a loss, a maximum of 6 consecutive chance effects will be performed. A judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth continuous chance performance is started, the player can quickly recognize that the success/failure determination result is a big win by continuing the continuous chance performance one more time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of consecutive chance presentations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-incubation lottery table 222e. The latency number lottery table 222e is a lottery opportunity for the consecutive chance attraction among the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of times of the consecutive chance attraction, when execution of the consecutive chance attraction is determined by the above-described consecutive chance number table 222d. It is determined whether the held ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored in the other held balls except for the held ball that became super reach or special reach, and it becomes that super reach or special reach. This is a lottery table for determining the number of times of execution of the hiding performance with the held ball up to the held ball that triggered the lottery of the continuous chance performance when the held ball is stored.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(a), when the 6th ball on hold is established, the continuous chance effect of 6 executions is determined, and the 1st to 6th balls on hold make a continuous chance. It is determined that a rendition is to be performed. Therefore, if it is determined whether there is a super reach or special reach ball among the 1st to 5th hold balls, in the example of FIG. Since it is a reserved ball, it is possible to execute the latent performance up to three times for the third reserved ball to the fifth reserved ball. Here, with reference to the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e, table contents to be selected are set for each of the winning/failure determination results for the sixth reserved ball. A determination value corresponding to the determination counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157(a), if the result of the winning determination of the 6th held ball is a hit, the determination value of the maximum number of times of latency of 3 is referred to among the contents of the winning table. Here, if the obtained value of the number of times of hiding decision counter 223o is "0 to 50", the number of times of hiding is 1; if it is "51 to 149", the number of times of hiding is 2; times are set. Here, when the number of times of lurking is determined to be 2, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), the continuous chance effect of the 3rd and 4th ball on hold is not executed, and the above-described lurking effect is executed. be done. The continuous chance presentation is started again with the fifth reserved ball, and is continuously executed up to the sixth reserved ball. It should be noted that the number of hiding effects after the consecutive chance effects shown in FIG. 157(c) is similarly determined by the hiding times lottery table 222e. It should be noted that, after the suspended ball (corresponding to the fourth suspended ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) that triggered the determination of the continuous chance production (in the example of FIG. 157 (c), five If there is no super-reach or special-reach reserved ball in the second to seventh reserved balls, the contents of the table corresponding to the deviation of the number-of-incubation lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) are referred to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163, in the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e, when the success/failure determination result is a failure, regardless of the number of reserved balls that can be hidden, the number of times of hiding is limited to a maximum of three times. there is Thus, when the third concealment performance is executed, the player can recognize that if the concealment performance is executed with the next reserved ball, a big win will be achieved in the subsequent consecutive chance performance. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the number of consecutive times of the hiding effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example differs from the first control example in that a number-of-times determining counter 223n, a hiding number-of-times determining counter 223o, and a consecutive chance storage area 223p are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number-of-times determining counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of consecutive chance effects. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of 0-198. Although not shown, the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value every predetermined period and updates it. Note that the effect counter 223f and the latency number determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set to have different update periods, and are configured not to synchronize with each other. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The number of times of hiding determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times of performing the hiding effect in the continuous chance effect from the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). This latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and updated. It is incremented by 1 and updated. The latency number determination counter 223o is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the content of the effect to be executed for each reserved ball when executing the continuous chance effect. The consecutive chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance performance is determined, the data indicating the content of the determined performance is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is consumed. A held ball that starts swinging is shifted into the execution area. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the continuous chance production.

The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up when the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, the state at the time of the power cut is restored. Therefore, even when power failure occurs, continuous chance presentation can be continuously executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern, and the display form is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this fluctuation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and the deviation ( Probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161(c)) is defined at least. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

First, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 161(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 161(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

In this control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and the timing variation type counter CS1 obtained when the game ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is configured. Therefore, even the type of variation selected at the time of winning can be discriminated before the start of variation. In addition, not only the configuration of this control example, but also in the case where the variation type selected is different depending on the number of held balls at the start of variation as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach etc. By allocating a constant value of the counter CS1 even when the number of reserved balls is changed, it is possible to determine the type of change at the time of winning a prize.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. FIG. In the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 164, S104) with respect to the first control example. , start-up process (FIG. 66, S105) is changed to start-up winning process (FIG. 165, S105). Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 164, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is different from the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example, and the processing of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 is S250 to S252. The difference is that the processing has been changed to Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are referenced to determine whether a reserved ball with a reserved order of 1 is stored (S251). Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is won, the special symbols are configured to start changing in the winning order of both. there is It should be noted that the maximum number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, the same as in the first control example. When a reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. As this winning order, the order obtained by adding 1 to the total winning number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, the winning order is updated by subtracting 1 from one reserved ball (starting to fluctuate).

In the process of S251, it is determined whether or not the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the reserved area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order in which fluctuation is started next. be. When it is determined that the order in which the next variation starts is the second special symbol by the process of S251 (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. Note that the processing of S205 to S207 is the same as that of the first control example, so the description is omitted.

In the processing of S251, if it is determined that the order to start the next variation is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether the order to start the next variation is the first special symbol (S252). When it is determined that the winning order to start fluctuating next is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processing of S210 to S212 is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the processing of S252, if it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved balls are not stored (S252: No), this processing is terminated. Other processes are omitted for the first control example.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the contents of this starting winning process (S105). In contrast to the starting winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example, the starting winning process (FIG. 165, S105) in the seventh control example replaces the process of S406 with S420 and the process of S412 with the process of S430. , the look-ahead processing (S413) is changed to look-ahead processing 2 (S450). Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S420 and S430, acquisition of the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The difference is that the winning order information is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, in this control example, when a prize is won, by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation type (short out, long Out, normal reach, super reach, or special reach) can be discriminated and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 as a winning information command.

When it is determined No in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the prefetch process 2 is executed (S450). After executing the prefetching process 2 (S450), this process ends.

Details of this prefetching process 2 (S450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (S450). The lookahead process 2 (FIG. 166, S450) in the seventh control example differs from the lookahead process (FIG. 67, S413) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S503 or S504 is executed, the process of S510 is executed. In the process of S510, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery results (win/fail judgment) based on the winning information (each counter value) acquired in S503 or S504 and the values of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. A variation type to be selected is discriminated from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the big hit determination result determined in S510 and the variation type is set.

In this manner, in this control example, the selected variation type can also be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the winning information command. Therefore, in this control example, when the sound ramp control device 113 stores a reserved ball that executes a specific variation pattern, it is possible to execute a continuous chance effect that is a special effect that spans multiple variations. . In the present embodiment, the main controller 110 prereads and determines the variation type, but is not limited to this. It is also possible to set each data that can be discriminated, and to discriminate the variation type and the like.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
Control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. FIG. In the seventh control example, in contrast to the first control example, command determination processing (FIG. 81, S1511) is changed to command determination processing 3 (FIG. 167, S1540), and variable display setting processing (FIG. 82, S1512) is changed to variable display. The difference is that each is changed to the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550). As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination process 3 (S1540) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example differs from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . As for other processing, the same processing as in the first control example is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from main controller 110 (S1650). When the winning information command is received (S1650: Yes), the winning information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

Here, the winning information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of this prize winning information processing (S1651). In this winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). Whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set is determined by determining whether or not information regarding the continuous chance effect is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. If it is determined that the continuous chance effect is set (S1721: Yes). , terminate this process. In this way, since a new continuous chance effect is not set while the continuous chance effect is being set, problems such as overwriting of the effect during execution of the continuous chance effect can be suppressed. .

In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). . If the received prize information command is not a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1722, if it is determined that the received winning information command is a winning information command indicating Super Reach or Special Reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the times determination counter 223n and the latency times determination counter 223o are changed. Acquire (S1724).

Based on the obtained number determination counter 223n, the received prize information command, and the current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received prize information command), a consecutive chance number table 222d (Fig. 162 (a) to (b) Reference) acquires (determines) information (number of times of execution or non-execution) regarding the execution of continuous chance effects. The information obtained in S1724 determines whether or not the number of consecutive chance presentations has been executed, that is, the execution of consecutive chance presentations (S1725). If execution of the continuous chance effect has not been determined (S1725: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that execution of the continuous chance effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the reserved ball corresponding to the number of times of the determined continuous chance effect becomes super reach or special reach. It is determined from the winning information storage area 223a whether the pending ball (excluding the pending ball that received the winning information command (the pending ball that becomes the final variation of the continuous chance effect)) is stored (S1726). Although not shown, when a prize information command is received, data corresponding to the information indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball, as in the first control example. be done. As the reserved ball is consumed, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and is overwritten with the winning information data corresponding to the next reserved ball when the variation starts.

In the process of S1726, when it is determined that the held ball that becomes super reach or special reach is not stored, the process of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, if it is determined that there is a ball that is held to become Super Reach or Special Reach (S1726: Yes), the winning information command received from the latent number lottery table 222e indicates the winning judgment result, and the processing of S1726 is performed. The number of times that can be hidden, which is the number of held balls up to the held ball stored one before the held ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the held ball that becomes super reach or special reach determined in S1723 The number of times of hiding is determined from the acquired value of the number of times of hiding decision counter 223o (S1727). After that, based on the content of the determined continuous chance performance, the continuous chance storage area 223p stores the performance to be executed for each Houryukyu for each reserved ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set for each of the eight reserved balls. Data that can identify the re-entry of the chance effect is stored (S1728). It should be noted that each data stored in the consecutive chance storage area 223p is shifted to an area corresponding to the corresponding reserved ball each time the reserved ball is consumed. When the continuous chance performance is finished, all the stored data are cleared, so whether or not the continuous chance performance is set can be determined by whether or not the data is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the contents of this variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, the post-latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. They are different in that respect. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the processing of S1709 is executed, post-latency setting processing is executed (S1750). The post-latency setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the contents of this post-latency setting process (S1750).

In the post-latency setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined based on the data set in the consecutive chance storage area 223p whether or not it is the start variation of the consecutive chance presentation (S1751). Here, it is determined whether or not the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the suspended ball that starts to fluctuate is the data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

In the process of S1751, when it is determined that the change is not the start of the continuous chance effect (S1751: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the start of the continuous chance effect (S1751: Yes), information on the current held ball is obtained from the prize winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With regard to the information on the acquired held ball, it is determined whether or not a held ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored for the held ball stored after the final variation of the continuous chance production (S1753). When it is determined that the held ball that becomes super reach or special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the held ball stored next to the held ball corresponding to the final variation of the continuous chance production is super The number of retained balls stored up to one before the retained ball that becomes reach or special reach is determined as the maximum value (the number of possible times of concealment) (S1754). Based on the obtained value of the number of times of hiding decision counter 223o, the determination result of whether the held ball is super reach or special reach, and the number of times of possible hiding determined in S1754, the number of times of hiding is drawn from the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e. is determined (S1755). Based on the number of times of hiding determined in S1755, continuous chance effects are determined. Here, the reserved balls stored after the reserved balls for the number of times of latency to the reserved balls that become super reach or special reach are set as the reserved balls for executing the continuous chance production. After the processing of S1756, the processing of S1758 is executed.

In the processing of S1753, when it is determined that there is no held ball that becomes super reach or special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latency number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final variation of the continuous chance production. The number of times of hiding is determined from the number of times of hiding lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) (S1757). After that, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of times of hiding is determined based on the data indicating that the result of the judgment is wrong.

In the process of S1758, based on the information of the continuous chance effects and hiding effects determined in the processes of S1755 to S1756 and S1757, they are set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1758). After that, this process ends.

In this way, even when the continuous chance effect is started, the latent effect and the new continuous chance effect are set for the reserved ball that has been established from the determination to the start, so that the player can enjoy various continuous chances. You can enjoy the performance. In addition, the continuous chance effect is a effect that is performed for the variable display of a plurality of continuous held balls by pre-reading the determination result of the established held balls. As a result, when the continuous chance performance is started, the player can confirm that, among the reserved balls that are established at that time, the reserved balls that become super reach or special reach are established, and that the result of the lottery is not winning. I have expectations. Here, in this control example, since the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the reserved balls that are established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, the player is expected to have more reserved balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to maintain expectations for the concealment effect for the ball on hold after the end of the continuous chance effect.

In this control example, the hiding effect is the effect of shaking the pattern, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute a sound effect, a character display, or the like at the start of a change or the like. In addition, the pattern of the special pattern or the like may be changed to a pattern different from the normal pattern and displayed.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. FIG. The eighth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

Specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal plate 261 has a role product continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the role product continuous operation device, and a jackpot 1 terminal for indicating the state and type of the jackpot. is provided.

When the jackpot based on the jackpot F (with 16R probability variable lottery/time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned off at the time the jackpot game is started. When the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, it is controlled so that the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. On the other hand, when a jackpot based on the jackpot G (16R probability variable lottery no/time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on at the time the jackpot game is started. In addition, when a jackpot based on the jackpot H (16R probability variable lottery no jackpot, no time saving jackpot) is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Furthermore, regardless of these jackpot types, when a jackpot game is executed, control is performed so that the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal plate 261, the signal of the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal are compared with the timing at which each is turned on, thereby determining the jackpot. The type can be discriminated. Thus, the hall computer 262 can discriminate the jackpot types without providing a terminal of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (jackets F, G, H), thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. can be done.

In this control example, the configuration described above is added to the first control example, but it is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. In the following description, points different from the first control example will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 171, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The eighth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 is provided with the external output terminal plate 261 . Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

In this control example, an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 . The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least a character continuous operation terminal, one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals.

The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal indicating whether or not it is a period in which the continuous accessory operating device is operated and the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed, ie, a period in which a jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period in which the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed, that is, a period in which the jackpot game is executed. is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that a jackpot game has started in the external output process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177). It is set to OFF when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal for indicating whether or not a jackpot game is in progress. When it is on, it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and when it is off, it indicates that a jackpot game is not in progress. However, unlike the accessory continuous operation terminal described above, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variable lottery / time saving jackpot), and the game ball to the probability variable switch 65e3 is set to ON when the

Specifically, in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game is determined. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), When it is determined (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is the jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), it is further determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is on. (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001 in FIG. 177: No), it is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether the state of the gaming machine is a state that is advantageous to the player, which is a jackpot game state, a probability variable game state, or a time-saving game state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. If present, it indicates a favorable condition for the player as described above; if it is off, it indicates otherwise. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variable lottery / time saving jackpot), it is not set to ON, and the probability variable switch 65e3 is set to ON when the game ball passes. It is what is done.

Specifically, in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110, the jackpot 2 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game is determined. When it is determined that the type is jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON (S7004 in FIG. 177). Also, in the process, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), and if the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is the jackpot F (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), When it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when it is determined that the variable probability state or the time saving state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has ended (S7008 in FIG. 177: No), it is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, prize ball terminals, etc.), and signals output from the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111 Receivable. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262, and are already known, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 172, the contents of ROM 202 of main controller 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

Figure 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM202 of the main controller 110, the first hit type selection table 202f for selecting the jackpot type for the first control example described above is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

In this control example, unlike the above-described first control example, jackpot F, jackpot G, and jackpot H are provided as types of jackpots. These jackpot types are the first hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172(b)), which is set so that the jackpot F and the jackpot G and the jackpot H can be selected, and the first hit type counter value C2. is selected based on

Details of the first win type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first winning type selection table 202f and the first winning type counter value C2. In this first hit type selection table 202f, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 33" as the judgment value of the jackpot F, "34 to 66" as the judgment value of the jackpot G, and "34 to 66" as the judgment value of the jackpot H "67 to 99" is set. In the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110, the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first per type selection table 202f , the first hit type counter value C2 and the jackpot type is selected. A jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (with 16R probability variable lottery/time saving jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k is operated in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a becomes a jackpot that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3. ing. Based on the game ball passing through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability game is given after the end of the big hit game. In addition, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability variable lottery non-time-saving jackpot), the passage solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a enters the probability variable switch 65e3. It's a big hit. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the time-saving game is provided. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variable lottery no/no time saving jackpot), the game ball that entered the specific winning port 65a does not enter the probability switch 65e3 in the same way as the jackpot G described above. is. Moreover, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the time-saving game is not provided, and the state shifts to the normal game state.

Furthermore, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot when the variation is stopped in the special symbol variation process of the main controller 110 (S216 in FIG. 176: Yes), and the jackpot type (See S217 in FIG. 176), stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176), and referenced in external output processing (see FIG. 177) to be described later. It will be

Next, referring to FIG. 173, the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example is different in that a jackpot type storage area 203α is provided in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type related to the jackpot game being executed, and stores a value corresponding to the jackpot type (jackets F, G, H). This jackpot type storage area 203α is set when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 ( See S260 in FIG. 176).

Then, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and is not the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 177: No), the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005 in FIG. 177: Yes), the outputs of the V winning terminal, jackpot 1 terminal, and jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, in the process, if it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 176: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (of FIG. 177 S7004). Also, when the jackpot type is the jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot G (S7003 in FIG. 177: No), similarly to the case where the jackpot type is the jackpot F. However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the game ball does not pass through the probability variable winning switch 65e3, and the probability variable setting flag 203h is not turned on (S7005 in FIG. 177: No), so the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminals are never set to ON.

Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the type of the jackpot game can be determined by comparing the output of the jackpot continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, when both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. , When the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (passage of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If so, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (passage of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can. Incidentally, the jackpot type of the jackpot game may be determined by comparing the jackpot continuous operation terminal and the jackpot two terminals.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the game state of the game machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing the game state of the gaming machine, the passage state of the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, and the state of each terminal signal of the external output terminal plate 261. FIG.

FIG. 174(a) shows the game state of the gaming machine when a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, and the passage state of the game ball of the variable probability switch 65e3. 3 is a timing chart showing outputs of one jackpot terminal and two jackpot terminals of an external output terminal plate 261. FIG.

Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in an off state. Then, when the game state of the gaming machine starts a jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the character product continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON in the external output processing (see FIG. 177) described later. . After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, the game state of the gaming machine shifts to the time-saving state, and in the external output processing described later, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). When the time saving game ends, the game state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, referring to FIG. 174(b), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the game state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, and the probability variation switch 65e3 It is a timing chart showing the passing state of the game ball, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 . When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on at the time the jackpot game is started, compared to the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. , and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when V wins).

Specifically, when the game state of the gaming machine is the normal game state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are in an off state. Then, when the game state of the gaming machine becomes a jackpot game state based on the jackpot F, the output to the character product continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output process described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are set to ON based on the game ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, similarly to the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability variable given after the jackpot game ends. When the game ends, the game state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal game state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

In addition, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed, when the state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot game state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal remain off. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variable game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be OFF (see FIG. 175(b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 shows the game state of the gaming machine when a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, the passing state of the game ball of the variable probability switch 65e3, and the external output It is the timing chart which showed the output of the jackpot 1 terminal of the terminal board 261, and the jackpot 2 terminal.

FIG. 175(a) is a timing chart when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175(b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of the jackpot H, the jackpot G, and the jackpot F. 4 is a timing chart when games are continuously executed;

First, with reference to FIG. 175(a), the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described. In the normal game state, outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 are all set to OFF. After that, when the lottery result becomes a jackpot G and a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to ON (see FIG. 177). (See S7002 and S7004). After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, the time-saving game is given, and the character product continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game ends. Afterwards, a time-saving game is given, and the game state of the gaming machine becomes a time-saving game state, so that the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to OFF, and an ON signal is continuously output.

Then, during execution of the time-saving game, when the jackpot G hits again and the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminal is also continued. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the jackpot game to be executed again ends, the time-saving game is given, and the character product continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF. It is not set to OFF, and an ON signal is continuously output. Then, when the time-saving game is completed without a big win during execution of the time-saving game, the state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175(b), the case where the jackpot games based on the jackpot types are successively executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F will be described. In the normal game state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are all set to OFF. After that, when the lottery result becomes the jackpot H and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001 in FIG. 177: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177 ), on the other hand, the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not set to ON and remain OFF (S7005 in FIG. 177: No). Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variable game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be OFF (see FIG. 175(b)).

After that, when the lottery result becomes a jackpot G and a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal is performed. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G ends, the time-saving game is provided, and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the game state of the game machine is the time-saving game state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is not set to OFF, and the output remains ON. After that, during execution of the time-saving game, the jackpot F becomes a jackpot, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the character product continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the jackpot 2 terminal continues. is set to ON.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability variable game is given after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game ends, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177), and on the other hand, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game is given, so the jackpot 2 terminal output is not turned off and remains on. After that, when the variable probability game ends, the game shifts to the normal game, and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is set to OFF.

Thus, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to differ according to the jackpot type. Thus, by comparing the output timing of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the output timing of the jackpot 1 terminal, it is possible to determine the type of the jackpot game. Specifically, when both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. , When the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F or jackpot H, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on the V winning (passage of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. If so, it can be determined that it is a jackpot F. On the other hand, if there is no V winning (passage of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game and the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a jackpot H. can.

In addition, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated big win is a continuous big win by means of the big win 1 terminal and the big win 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261 . Specifically, in the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is completed, so the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continued jackpot refers to a jackpot during the variable probability game or the time saving game.

The jackpot 2 terminal in this control example, when the jackpot is hit during the probability variable game or the time saving game, the output is continuously turned on without being turned off (the output is continued during the period). Therefore, it can be determined that a big win occurring during the period when the output of the two jack jack terminals is ON (the one in which the output of the jack jack one terminal is turned ON) is a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, control processing of main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. FIG. The eighth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the special symbol variation processing and the external output processing are partially changed, and the other portions are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 176, details of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the eighth control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win after the fluctuation time has passed (S216: Yes), the big win type related to the lottery result is stored in the big win type storage area 203α, compared to the first control example described above. Since the other parts are the same, the detailed description of those parts will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process, first, the processes from S201 to S216 are executed as in the first control example. Next, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big win (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the type of big win (S217), and the start of the big win is set (S218). . Thereafter, a value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referenced in the external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

After completing the processing of S260, the present processing is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output process (S1001) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the external output process (S1001). This external output processing (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and outputs commands set in other processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. It is a process of executing a process of transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 or the like, a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, or the like.

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the game state of the gaming machine is during the jackpot (S7001). In the processing of S7001, when it is determined that the game state of the gaming machine is during the jackpot (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on (S7002). , S7003. The hall computer 262 detects the character product continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002. Thereby, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the processing of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on ( S7004), the process proceeds to S7010. By the processing of S7004, at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the outputs to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects that the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7004 and the jackpot continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the process of S7002 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174(a)), it is possible to determine that a jackpot game with a jackpot G has been executed, and to perform processing accordingly.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value in the jackpot type storage area 203α indicates the jackpot F or the jackpot H and is not the value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the processing of S7005, it is determined whether or not the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON. When it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S7005: Yes), it is a case where the game ball enters the variable probability switch 65e3, and it is determined that the variable probability game is given after the end of the jackpot game. . In this case, the process proceeds to S7004, outputs to the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7010.

Here, since the jackpot F is a jackpot with variable probability lottery, the passage solenoid 65k operates during execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without variable probability lottery, the passage solenoid 65k does not operate during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262 delays the jackpot continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed, the jackpot based on the jackpot F It is possible to determine that a game has been executed, and to perform processing accordingly.

On the other hand, when the jackpot continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and then the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, a jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the game ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is executed. It can be determined that

On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to S7010.

In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and output to the jackpot continuous operation terminal and to the jackpot 1 terminal The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

When the processing of S7007 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it is determined to be in the variable probability gaming state, and when the time saving medium counter is greater than 0, it is determined to be in the time saving gaming state. In the processing of S7008, if it is determined that the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (S7008: Yes), without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminal, it proceeds to the processing of S7010. On the other hand, in the processing of S7008, if it is determined that it is not the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010.

By the processing of S7007, it is possible to turn off the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the probability variable game or the time saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probability variable game state or the time saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off, The output of the jackpot 2 terminals is continuously turned on. On the other hand, when the variable probability game or the time saving game is not provided at the end of the jackpot game and the game state of the gaming machine becomes the normal game state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is turned off.

In the processing of S7010, other external output processing is executed (S7010), and this processing ends. In the process of S7010, for example, various commands such as the command for the number of pending balls stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. . Thereby, information from the main control device 110 can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111 .

As described above, in the eighth control example, according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type, the timing of the signal to be transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is changed. It is configured so that Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and after that, when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. In the case of the jackpot G, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off.

As a result, the hall computer 262 detecting the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is provided with three types by detecting the output of the continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. It is possible to determine which jackpot game is being executed based on which jackpot type among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

In addition, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated big win is a continuous big win by means of the big win 1 terminal and the big win 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261 . Specifically, in the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the jackpot is completed, so the occurrence of the jackpot can be detected, but it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continued jackpot refers to a jackpot during the variable probability game or the time saving game.

The jackpot 2 terminal in this control example, when the jackpot is hit during the probability variable game or the time saving game, the output is continuously turned on without being turned off (the period during which the output is turned on continues). Therefore, it can be determined that a big win occurring during the period when the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is ON (when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned ON) is a series of continuous jackpots.

In this control example, the type of the jackpot is determined by the terminal for continuous activation of the jackpot and the one terminal for the jackpot. However, it is not limited to this. good too. Also, either one of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal may not be provided, or a separate terminal for outputting a jackpot may be provided on the external output terminal plate 261 .

Furthermore, this control example is not limited to the above-described one, and a terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 for outputting other information related to the jackpot game may be provided. For example, the external output terminal plate 261 may be provided with a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on the passage of the variable probability switch 65e3. As a result, it is possible to detect cheating, such as passing a game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, even during the execution of the jackpot H jackpot game without the variable probability lottery. Specifically, based on the passage of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The pin output does not turn on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects that the game ball has entered the variable probability switch 65e3 due to fraud when the output of the V winning terminal is turned on but the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on. and can be notified.

In addition, in the eighth control example described above, the character product continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The hole computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type based on the difference in time.

Specifically, when a jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the jackpot game starts, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off when the jackpot game ends. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the jackpot game time (for example, 120 seconds). Further, when the jackpot F jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal output is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot 1 terminal output is turned on when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, and the jackpot game is played. Turns off the output of jackpot 1 terminal at the end of In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time of the jackpot game, and is the time from the period when the channel solenoid 65k is operating until the jackpot game ends (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). . Further, when the jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

With this configuration, when the hole computer 262 determines that the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON for 120 seconds, the hall computer 262 can determine that the jackpot game with the jackpot G is being executed. can. Also, if the time during which the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot F has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is ON for 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game by the jackpot H has been executed. Therefore, the game machine can discriminate the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed by the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. In addition, the time during which the jackpot 1 terminal output is ON is determined for each jackpot type, and the jackpot 1 terminal output is turned on for a specified ON time at a predetermined trigger (for example, at the start of the jackpot). good too.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to ON based on the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a may be provided. As a result, a jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but if the game ball is not launched into the specific winning opening 65a due to, for example, the game ball not passing through the variable probability switch 65e3. , jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, so that jackpot F cannot be detected. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, the variable probability switch 65e3 is set even though the game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has not passed through (in the case of a jackpot H).

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. In the ninth control example, unlike the eighth control example described above, an external output terminal board 261 for outputting a signal according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is provided, and continuous winning to the specific winning opening 65a is performed. The difference is that it is configured to be able to detect that the

Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a winning occurs in the gaming machine. be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output continues to be turned on when there is winning during a continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the occurrence of winning and continuous winning is performed.

Therefore, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, by acquiring the signals of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal, it is possible to determine whether or not the generated winning has been continued. can be determined. Further, the hall computer 262 does not determine whether or not continuous winning occurs by calculating the acquisition result of the signal of the winning terminal. is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, the processing load can be reduced.

In this control example, the configuration described above is added to the eighth control example, but it is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal may be controlled according to the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, points different from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as in the eighth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the ninth control example>
First, referring to FIG. 178, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example is different in that it has a winning period counter 203β and a continuous winning period counter 203γ in addition to the contents of the RAM 203 in the eighth control example. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period of outputting a signal to a winning terminal (winning output period). This winning period counter 203β is set in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (winning a prize) (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), set to 25 (equivalent to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process that is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and each time the external output process is executed, if the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more (Fig. 180 S8008: Yes), the value is decremented by 1 (see S8009 in FIG. 180). Then, when the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004 in FIG. 180: Yes), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

Thus, based on the winning to the specific winning port 65a, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds).

The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting the period of outputting a signal to the continuous winning terminal. The continuous winning period counter 203γ is set in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (winning a prize) (see FIG. 180). S8001: Yes), set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and each time the external output process is executed, if the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more, (S8010 in FIG. 180: Yes), the value is decremented by 1 (see S8011 in FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF. If a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ reaches 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) again (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

As a result, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (two seconds in this control example), while the game ball is entering the special winning device 65a, the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can keep the output to on. When the game ball does not enter the specific winning hole 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ elapses, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the game state of the game machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the game state of the gaming machine and the signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, winning terminal and continued winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when a jackpot game is executed. .

With reference to FIG. 179(a), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179(a) shows the game state of the gaming machine, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game. 4 is a timing chart showing signals output from.

First, when the game state of the gaming machine is the normal game state, the accessory continuous operation device is not in operation, the accessory continuous operation terminal is off, and the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are turned off.

Next, when the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 results in a big hit, the jackpot game is started, and the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operating device operates, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened and closed, and a game ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered (won a prize) into the specific prize-winning port 65a after the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, the output of the prize-winning terminal and the continuous prize-winning terminal is maintained for a predetermined time (in this control example, 100 milliseconds and 2 seconds) is controlled to be turned on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) elapses, and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has elapsed (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the jackpot game ends, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or probability variable game or time saving game) is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179(b), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot game and there is a new entering ball during the continuous winning output period based on the entering ball will be described. FIG. 179(b) shows the game state of the gaming machine and the external 10 is a timing chart showing signals output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal of the output terminal plate 261. FIG.

First, when the game state of the gaming machine is the normal game state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all turned off. Next, when the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 results in a jackpot and the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

Then, when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the entry of the game ball, and the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is set for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) is controlled to be turned on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has passed (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains ON until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed. (S8006 in FIG. 180: Yes).

When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a new game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). (See S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Also, the output of the winning continuation terminal is reset (updated) so that it is turned on for the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to OFF after the elapse of the winning output period based on the new ball entering the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 in FIG. 180). The output of the winning terminal is set to OFF (S8007 in FIG. 180). It should be noted that, in the renewed (reset) continuous winning period, when the game ball is newly entered into the specific winning opening 65a, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal continues. It will be set to turn on the output.

When the jackpot game ends, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or probability variable game or time saving game) is started.

Thus, in this control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning hole 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . As a result, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 detects that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, without calculating based on the previous winning information, determination can be made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. and the processing load of the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 180, control processing of the main controller in this control example will be described. The ninth control example differs from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the external output process is changed. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

Details of the external output process (S1001) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output processing (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and outputs commands set in other processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. It is a process of transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 or the like, and a process of outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203 .

In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (S8001). Specifically, the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the detection switch 65c1. discriminate.

In the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (S8001: Yes), the output of the winning terminal and continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to ON (S8002), The winning period counter 203β is set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) and the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), when the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has passed since the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8008.

In the processing of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). In the process of S8006, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has passed since the game ball entered the specific winning hole 65a, Since it is a case where the game ball does not enter the specific winning hole 65a in the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007), and S8008. Go to processing.

In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process proceeds to S8008.

Here, even when the game state of the gaming machine is in a state other than the jackpot game state, the ball is not entered into the specific winning hole 65a, and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, the process of S8005 is performed. is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 has already been turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be turned off. Since the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a only during the jackpot game, the processing from S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the jackpot game.

This eliminates the need to execute the processing from S8001 to S8007 in a game state other than during the jackpot game, thereby reducing the processing load. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in a state other than the jackpot game, it is possible that a fraudulent act or an abnormality occurs. By turning on the output of the terminal, it may be configured such that fraudulent acts and occurrence of abnormalities can be detected. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the terminal for error for detection of fraud or occurrence of an abnormality, and outputting a notification sound for notifying an error, or causing the third pattern display device 81 to display a display suggesting the occurrence of an error. You may make it

After completing the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 (S8008). When it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 in the process of S8008 (S8008: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning hole 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the winning output period (100 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted from the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8008, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8010: Yes), the processing of S8009 is skipped because there is no need to measure the winning output period instead of the winning output period. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 (S8010). When it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 in the process of S8010 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning hole 65a, and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), 1 is subtracted from the continuous winning winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

In the processing of S8010, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), the processing of S8011 is skipped because there is no need to measure the continuous winning output period rather than the continuous winning output period. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

In the processing of S8012, other external output processing is executed (S8012). Other external output processing, for example, similarly to the external output processing in the eighth control example described above, an external output terminal indicating a period during which the accessory continuous actuating device operates, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed. Processing such as turning on the accessory continuous operation terminal of the board 261 at a predetermined timing is executed. After completing the process of S8012, the process ends and returns to the main process.

As described above, in the ninth control example, the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261 determines that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when a winning occurs in the gaming machine. be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output continues to be turned on when there is winning in the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the occurrence of winning and the continuous winning is performed.

As a result, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 detects that the game ball has entered (winning) the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is continuous winning by the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, without calculating based on the previous winning information, determination can be made only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. and the processing load of the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

In addition, this control example is not limited to the one described above, and may be configured so that the output of the continuous winning terminal is continued only when a specific jackpot type is entered. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261, such as the hall computer 262, detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal, thereby determining the jackpot type that has become a jackpot. can be made possible.

Also, the period (winning output period) during which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a may be changed for each jackpot type. For example, when the jackpot type is jackpot F, the prize output period is set to 50 milliseconds, for jackpot G, the prize output period is set to 100 milliseconds, and for jackpot H, the prize output period is set to 150 milliseconds. As a result, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261, measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (winning output period), The type can be discriminated. Therefore, for the purpose of discriminating the jackpot type, a game machine capable of discriminating the jackpot type can be provided without providing a separate terminal on the external output terminal plate 261, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. be able to.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a, the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the interval to enter the ball. When a new game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is continuously turned on, and the hall computer 262 side cannot detect the winning number accurately. is. Further, when the winning output period is shortened, it is necessary to shorten the detection interval of the winning terminal by the hall computer 262 correspondingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal is turned off and the number of winnings cannot be detected accurately.

Therefore, when the interval between game balls entering the specific winning hole 65a is very short (10 milliseconds, etc.), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at that very short interval. , the processing load of the hall computer 262 increases.

Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning hole 65a during the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (winning output stop period ) is provided, and after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has passed, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entering the specific winning hole 65a. can be

As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is set to a period longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the hit game ball can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect the winning (so as not to miss the winning). Further, in the hall computer 262, it is no longer necessary to detect the output of the prize winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 at intervals (for example, 5 milliseconds) shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters, reducing the processing load of the hall computer 262. can be mitigated.

Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned on when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game, the open/close door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and the state (round) in which the game ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). there is This round ends when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) enter the specific winning hole 65a, and then an inter-round interval (eg, 2 seconds) elapses. The next round is what begins. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set longer than the interval at which the game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, the external output terminal will The winning terminal of the board 261 can be output.

Specifically, when 10 game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a continuously at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls entering the specific winning hole 65a (10 balls It is necessary to set the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 to ON for a total of 10 times for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning hole 65a during the winning output period, after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds), Assume that it is configured to start the next winning output period. In this case, the time required to output the signal based on all the winning balls to the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is the number of times the output of the winning terminal is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) and the product of the winning output period (9 times) required after the output of the winning terminal and the winning output period (50 milliseconds), resulting in 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the interval between rounds (2 seconds), the output from the winning terminals of the external output terminal board 261 must be completed based on all incoming balls (for example, 10 balls) during the interval between rounds. becomes possible.

Therefore, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is longer than the interval at which the game ball enters (for example, 100 milliseconds), a new ball enters the winning output period. Since the outputs based on the game balls played can be executed during the interval between rounds after that, the hall computer 262 can detect winning (so as not to miss winning). In addition, during the period of the interval between rounds, even if it is not possible to execute all the outputs based on the game balls newly entered during the winning output period, the specific winning will not be executed until the next jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game is executed. Since there is a period (a jackpot game interval) in which the game ball does not enter the opening 65a, it may be configured to be executed in the jackpot game interval. The specific example described above is merely an example, and the periods such as the winning output period, the winning output stop period, and the interval between rounds may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the ninth control example, for example, based on the passing of the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3, the external output terminal plate 261 is provided with a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) You may do so. As a result, by comparing the output timing between the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning port 65a and the V winning terminal, illegal V winning (entering the game ball to the variable probability switch 65e3) It becomes possible for the hall computer 262 to determine whether or not a ball) has been played.

Specifically, the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, although the game ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a, the passage of the game ball to the probability variable switch 65e3 is detected, and V When the output of the prize winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that the V prize was illegally entered (the game ball entered the probability variable switch 65e3). Therefore, when the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal plate 261 is turned off but the V winning terminal is turned on, it can be detected as being illegal or abnormal.

Furthermore, a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, and a predetermined passage time (for example, 1 second) is required for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the period in which the continuous winning terminal is on (continuous winning output period) to the time required for passage (1 second), the V winning terminal will The hole computer 262 can detect the case where it is turned on as an illegal V winning.

Specifically, the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 after a predetermined passage time (1 second) has passed, It does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the predetermined passing time (1 second) has passed. Therefore, when the continuous winning terminal that is turned off after a predetermined passage time (1 second) is turned off, the probability variable switch A game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on while the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined as an illegal V winning.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 196. FIG. In the tenth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the first slide member (hereinafter referred to as role A) 720, the second slide member (hereinafter referred to as role B) 740, The difference is that the tilting member (hereinafter referred to as the role item C) 460 drives the role item operation effect.

This role operation effect is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). ) is a performance that is driven.

In this way, in the effect in which the role is driven based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, since the role can be driven based on the player's operation, the player can be motivated. It was said that it was possible to play a game.

In addition, during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a role operation effect is executed in which the role can be driven multiple times based on the operation of the frame button 22, so that the player presses the frame button 22. Since the accessory operation effect is executed a plurality of times based on the number of operations, the player can be motivated to play the game.

However, there is a problem that the performance effect of the role object operation presentation is lowered because the role object cannot be driven even if the frame button 22 is operated while the role object is being driven during the role object operation presentation. rice field. Here, when the period during which the character is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 is shortened in advance, the period during which the character is driven can be shortened. However, there is a problem that the range in which the character is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 becomes small, and the performance effect is reduced.

The role object operation presentation executed in the tenth control example solves the above-described problem. Specifically, if a predetermined condition (for example, operating (depressing) the frame button 22 while driving the role object) is satisfied while the role object operation effect is being executed, the next time the role object driving pattern will be executed. is set to a drive period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the normal drive period (for example, 1 second).

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, when a predetermined condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) while the accessory is being driven) is established during the accessory operation presentation, the next accessory operation is performed. Therefore, for example, when the player continuously operates (presses) the frame button 22, a short drive period is set as the drive period of the character, and the player presses the frame button 22 once. When the button is operated (pressed) only once, it is possible to set a long driving period as the driving period of the accessory. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the character is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the performance of the operation of the character that is executed for a predetermined period, and further, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of driving the character once. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 183, the contents of driving the role object in this control example will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the above-described first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 181, an outline of the operation of each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the character product driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 181(a) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the operation of the role product A720 used for the role product-driven effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 181(a), in the role product driving performance of this control example, the action motors (hereinafter referred to as role product A motors) 771 and 772 are driven, thereby causing the role product A 720 to move left and right. drive (see FIG. 40). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. An operation period of 0.5 seconds) and a total operation period of 1 second are performed.

FIG. 181(b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the role product B740 used for the role product-driven effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 181(b), in the character object driving effect of this control example, the movement motors (hereinafter referred to as the character object B motors) 773 and 774 are driven to move the character object B vertically. drive (see FIG. 41). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 1 second) for a total operation period of 2 seconds.

FIG. 181(c) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the role product C460 used for the role product-driven effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 181(c), in the role product driving effect of this control example, the action motor (hereinafter referred to as the role product C motor) 441 is driven to rotate the role product B 740 ( 25 and 26). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 25A to the extended position shown in FIG. An operation period of 1.5 seconds) and a total operation period of 3 seconds are performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the character object driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram showing that each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is located at the retreat position (standby position), and FIG. 182(b) shows each role ( FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing that the role object A720 to the role object C460) are positioned at the overhang position (operation position).

182(a), each character (character A720 to character C460) provided around the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by operating the frame button 22. It is a production driven based on. Specifically, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once, all the roles located at the retreat position (standby position) are driven (in the case of FIG. 182(a), the role All of the object A720 to character object C460 are driven) effect is executed. In this way, since a plurality of accessories can be driven based on one operation of the frame button 22, the performance effect of the accessory drive presentation based on the player's operation can be enhanced.

In this character-driven production, as described above, each character (character A720 to character C460) is set to have a different operation time. 2 seconds, and the action period of the role item C460 is set to 3 seconds. In this way, by differentiating the operation period of each role (the role A720 to the role C460), all the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are located at the retreat position (standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state (the state in which the character product driving effect is started), all the character products (the character product A720 to the character product C460) start to be driven. Then, one second later, the role object A720 returns to the retreat position (standby position) (completes the action), and one second later, the role object B740 returns to the retreat position (standby position) (completes the action). Object C460 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (completes the operation).

Therefore, the timing at which the character is positioned at the retreat position (standby position) during the character-driven performance can be varied, and the role driven by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 during the character-driven performance. Objects can be made different, and the production effect of the character-driven production can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 187, in this control example, the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 10 seconds. It is configured to be able to set an object-driven effect (long-hit effect) and a 5-second role-driven effect (short-hit effect). As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 so as to drive the accessory a plurality of times within a limited period of time.

Then, each character (character A720 to character C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. 182(b). do. In this way, by driving the accessory so as to cover the display area P of the third pattern display device, the player can be made to surely grasp that the accessory is being driven.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the operation of the role product A720 in the role product driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram showing the role product A720 driven in the role product driving effect in this control example, and FIG. 183(b) is a normal driving pattern in the role product driving effect in this control example. FIG. 183(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the driving range of the accessory A720 driven in the shortened drive pattern in the accessory driving effect in this control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the accessory A720 is a pair of slide members 720 provided on the left and right sides of the second slide motion unit 700, respectively. A display area P of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned between the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the pair of slide members 720 (see FIG. 2).

The slide member 720 is configured to be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22. When the drive is started, the pair of slide members 720 (the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720) are respectively moved. It moves toward the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the direction to cover the display area P of the third pattern display device 81).

As shown in FIG. 183(b), when the accessory A720 is driven by the normal drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are positioned near the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the display area of the third symbol display device 81). (near the center of P) is driven to a position where it approaches (abuts). In this normal drive pattern, the movement period from the standby position (position shown in FIG. 183(a)) to the maximum drive position (position shown in FIG. 183(b)) is set to 0.5 seconds. The period is set to 1 second (1 second for a 0.5 second movement period to and fro).

In this way, the accessory A720 driven by the normal drive pattern is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 that the player is looking at, so that the player can drive the accessory A720. It is easy to notice, and the production effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that while the role driving effect is being executed, various images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (images of the effect display executed in each of the above-described control examples) change the role A720 being driven. Displayed in avoidance position. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously execute the effect of driving the accessory and the effect of displaying on the third pattern display device 81, thereby further enhancing the effect of the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(c), when the accessory A720 is driven by the shortened drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are driven in half the drive range of the normal drive pattern. In this shortened drive pattern, the movement time from the standby position (position shown in FIG. 183(a)) to the shortened drive position (position shown in FIG. 183(b)) is set to 0.25 seconds. The period is set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds for a 0.25 second travel period to and fro).

Thus, the drive period of the accessory A720 when the shortened drive pattern is set is about half of the drive period of the accessory A720 when the normal drive pattern is set. Therefore, the driving period executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be shortened, and the frame button 22 can be operated multiple times during the character product driving performance executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to drive the accessory A720 based on the operation of the frame button 22 .

To explain in detail, when the accessory A720 is executed by the normal drive pattern, the accessory A720 can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 next when the drive by the normal drive pattern ends. When the timing (that is, one second later) is reached, when the role A720 is executed in the shortened drive pattern, the role A720 can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 next. is the timing (that is, 0.5 seconds later) at which the driving by the shortened driving pattern ends.

That is, when the accessory A720 is driven by the normal drive pattern, the operation of the frame button 22 for the accessory A720 is invalidated for one second after the drive is started, and the accessory A720 is driven by the shortened drive pattern. In this case, the operation of the frame button 22 for the role product A720 is invalidated for 0.5 seconds after the start of driving.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the "button repeated hitting effect", which is the role-driven effect in this control example, will be described. do. This FIG. 184 is a timing chart showing the flow of the performance driven by the character in this control example. As shown in FIG. 184, when the “button repeated effect” is started, an “effective period” during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 (“press button” ON) during the “effective period”, each role (a role A720 to Object C460) is started (point a in FIG. 184).

In this control example, the driving period of the role product A720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the role product B740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the role product C460 is set to 3 seconds. . Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again at the timing when the accessory A720 is being driven (“button pressed” ON), an invalid flag 223af (see FIG. 186) indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period. is set on (point b in FIG. 184).

After that, the driving period (1 second) of the accessory A720 has passed, and when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the accessory A720 is in a stopped state (positioned at the standby position), the accessory A720 is driven. A shortened drive pattern is executed as a pattern, and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (point c in FIG. 184). At this point c, the accessory B740 is in a stopped state and the accessory C460 is in an operating state. is driven with a predetermined drive pattern.

In this control example, as described above, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 while the role object A720 is being driven, and in a state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the role object A720 is newly driven, the shortened drive pattern is set. As a result, a player who intentionally operates the frame button 22 while the accessory A720 is being driven can be provided with a driving mode of the accessory that is different from the usual one, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the role object A720 is newly driven while the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the shortened drive pattern is set. When the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period of time during a certain "button repeated effect", it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory A720 is driven.

Next, returning to FIG. 184, the flow when the frame button 22 is operated multiple times in a short period of time will be described. At the timing shown at the point d in FIG. 184, each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is activated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as at the point a. Then, at the timing when the role object A720 that started driving at the point d is in motion (that is, within one second from the point d), the frame button 22 is operated to set the invalid flag 223af to ON (Fig. 184 point e). After that, the role product A720 that started driving at the point d is in a stopped state, and the timing when the role product B740 and the role product C460 are operating (that is, the period from the time when 1 second has passed since the time point d until the time when 2 seconds have passed) ), when the frame button 22 is operated, the role object A720 starts to operate in the shortened driving pattern (0.5 seconds) (point f in FIG. 184).

Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again within 0.5 seconds after the operation of the accessory A720 that started driving at the point f is completed, the accessory A720 starts operating with the normal drive pattern (1 second). (point g in FIG. 184).

This point g is the timing when the action of the accessory B740 and the accessory C460, which started to be driven at the point d, has not finished and one second has not passed from the point f. If the short drive pattern (0.5 seconds) is not set as the drive pattern for A720, all the objects (object A720 to object C460) are in operation at point g, and the frame button 22 is operated. It is not possible to drive the character based on

On the other hand, in this control example, since it is possible to drive the accessory A720 in the shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds) at the point f, it is possible to stop the accessory A720 at the point g. As described above, in this control example, since the shortened drive pattern can be set as the drive pattern for the role object, it is possible to set the shortened drive pattern multiple times (for example, from point d to point g in FIG. 184) in a short period of time (for example, , 4 times), the number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 185, the electrical configuration in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of signal output control to each drive motor (771, 772, 773, 774, 441) is different. Since other parts are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 185, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. A drive motor group is connected to the input/output port 225 . This drive motor group includes accessory A motors (first slide member motors) 771 and 772, accessory B motors (second slide member motors) 773 and 774, and accessory C motors (tilting member motor) 441 and other motors.

Each motor described above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step) for setting the operation content for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 A command that can specify the number and direction of movement (rotation) is output. The motor operation command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is set by referring to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIGS. 186 to 188, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The ROM 222 in the tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a repeated hit effect selection table 222aa and an action scenario table 222ab are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 187(a), the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 187(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa. The repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa is a table for determining whether to execute the repeated hitting effect or not, and selecting the type of the repeated hitting effect when executing the repeated hitting effect. or more (that is, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), the repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa is a table for selecting the type of repeated hitting effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the determination result of the special figure fluctuation this time, and the repeated hitting effect start time 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds), a "long-hit effect" that sets 10000 milliseconds to the continuous-hit valid timer 223ab that sets the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, and a continuous-hit effect start time of 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds). ), either “short repeated hit effect” for setting 5000 milliseconds to the repeated hit effective timer 223ab for setting the effective period of the operation of the frame button 22 or “-” for not executing the repeated hit effect is selected.

This repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190), which will be described later (S1762). Specifically, when the result of the success/failure determination this time is "hit" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 9", the "long continuous hit effect" is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and the value of the effect counter 223f is selected. When the value is "10 to 19", "short repeated hit effect" is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the repeated hit effect type. .

On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination this time is "miss" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the "long-hit effect" is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and the value of the effect counter 223f becomes " 5 to 19", "short repeated hit effect" is selected as the repeated hit effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the repeated hit effect type.

As described above, in the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa in the present control example, the ratio (approximately 10%) of selecting the repeated hit effect is the same between the case of "hit" and the case of "loss". However, when the hit/fail judgment result is "hit", the ratio of "long hit effect" selected as the repeated hit effect type is set higher than when the hit/fail judgment result is "miss". (“hit”=50%, “miss”=25%). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning when the "long continuous hitting effect" is executed as the repeated hitting effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, the time (continuous hit effect start time) at which the repeated hit effect is executed. Since the "long hit effect" and "short hit effect" are set to the same (10000 milliseconds), the repeated hit effect that is executed this time depends on the timing when the repeat effect is started. , the player is prevented from grasping whether the As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the effect will continue for a long time when the repeated hitting effect is started, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, the operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab. The action scenario table 222ab is a table that stores the action scenario of each role in the repeated hitting effect, and is a role action timer 223ac that is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the repeated hitting effect. Operation commands corresponding to values of ˜223ae are defined.

As shown in FIG. 187(b), this action scenario table 222ab includes a role A720 scenario table 222ab1 in which the action scenario of the role A720 is set, a role B scenario table 222ab2, and a role C scenario table 222ab3. are defined, and the corresponding scenario table is referred to when driving each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 188(a) to 188(c), the contents of each scenario table corresponding to the role A720 to role C460 defined in the action scenario table 222ab will be described.

First, the role A scenario table 222ab1 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(a). FIG. 188(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the role product A scenario table 222ab1. The role A scenario table 222ab1 is a table in which an action scenario for the role A720 to be executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an action scenario executed when the action type is "normal" (normal action scenario). and a motion scenario (shortened motion scenario) to be executed when the motion type is “shortened”.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), in the role A scenario table 222ab1, the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) during the continuous hit effect, and the role A 720 is determined to be drivable. A set value (operating speed (pps), number of motion steps, and direction of motion) are specified.

Specifically, when the action type is "normal", the action pointer value "01H" is set corresponding to the value "1000" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "positive direction" as the motion direction. Thereafter, the action pointer value "02H" is set corresponding to the value "500" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" specifies "100 pps" as the motion speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

Then, the action pointer value "03H" is set corresponding to the value "0" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The action pointer "03H" defines "END" information indicating the end of the action scenario.

That is, when the action type of the role product A is "normal", the motors 771 and 772 for the role product A are set to the "forward direction" (the forward direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the left slide member 720a) for 0.5 seconds. The right slide member 720b and the right slide member 720b are driven toward each other (see FIG. 183(b))), and then for 0.5 second in the "negative direction" (reverse direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are separated from each other (see FIG. 183(b))) (that is, a character object operation whose entire operation period is 1 second) is executed.

When the action type is "shortened", the value "01H" of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value "500" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "25" as the number of steps, and "positive direction" as the motion direction. Thereafter, the action pointer value "02H" is set corresponding to the value "250" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "25" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

Then, the action pointer value "03H" is set corresponding to the value "0" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The action pointer "03H" defines "END" information indicating the end of the action scenario.

That is, when the action type of the Accessory A motion is "shortened", the motors 771 and 772 for the Accessory A are set in the "forward direction" (the forward direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a) for 0.25 seconds. The right slide member 720b and the right slide member 720b are driven toward each other (see FIG. 183(b))), and then for 0.25 seconds in the "negative direction" (reverse direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are separated from each other (see FIG. 183(b))) (that is, a character object operation whose entire operation period is 0.5 seconds) is executed.

As described above, the contents of the actions of the role object A720 during the continuous hit production are the action scenario (normal drive pattern) with a long action period (1 second) and the action scenario (short drive pattern) with a short action period (0.5 seconds). ) are stipulated, and one of the drive patterns is selected and executed according to the situation (the setting situation of the shortening flag 223ag) when the accessory A720 is started to be driven.

Although the details will be described later, this shortening flag 223ag is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) at the timing when the accessory A720 is in motion. With this shortening flag 223ag turned on, the operation of the role product A 720 is started (the operation of the role product A when the shortening flag 223ag is set to on ends, and the operation of the next role product A 720 starts ), the operation type “shortened” is set. Therefore, when the player positively operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous-hit effect, the shortened drive pattern with a short operation period is set, so that the accessory can be controlled based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous-hit effect. The number of times the A720 is activated can be increased.

In addition, since the normal drive pattern is set for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 multiple times during the repeated hit effect, the effect of one accessory action can be enhanced. In this way, by varying the action pattern (operation period) of the role based on the operation (pressing) status of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, the role product B scenario table 222ab2 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b). FIG. 188(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the role product B scenario table 222ab2. The role product B scenario table 222ab2 is a table in which an action scenario for the role product B 740 to be executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an action scenario executed when the action type is "normal" (normal action scenario). is set.

As shown in FIG. 188(b), in the role object B scenario table 222ab2, similarly to the above-described role object A scenario table 222ab1, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect, and the role object B 740 can be driven. In response to the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad that indicates the elapsed time since the determination, the motor for role product B (motor product B Set values (operating speed (pps), number of operating steps, and operating direction) to be set for the driver) are defined.

Specifically, when the action type is "normal", the action pointer value "01H" is set corresponding to the value "2000" of the role product B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "positive direction" as the motion direction. Thereafter, the action pointer value "02H" is set corresponding to the value "1000" of the role product B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

Then, the action pointer value "03H" is set corresponding to the value "0" of the role product B action timer 223ad. The action pointer "03H" defines "END" information indicating the end of the action scenario.

That is, when the action type of the role product B is "normal", the motors 773 and 774 for the role product B are set to the "forward direction" (the forward direction of the reciprocating motion, i.e., the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member) for one second. The upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are driven in the direction toward each other, and then in the "negative direction" (reverse direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are driven in the direction away from each other for one second (that is, , a character action whose entire action period is 2 seconds) is executed.

Next, the role item C scenario table 222ab3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(c). FIG. 188(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the role item C scenario table 222ab3. The role product C scenario table 222ab3 is a table in which an action scenario for the role product C460 to be executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an action scenario executed when the action type is "normal" (normal action scenario). is set.

As shown in FIG. 188(c), in the role object C scenario table 222ab3, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect, similarly to the above-described role object A scenario table 222ab1 and the role object B scenario table 222ab2. In response to the value of the role product C action timer 223ae indicating the elapsed time since the role product C 460 was determined to be drivable, for each value of the action pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the action scenario, Setting values (operating speed (pps), number of operating steps, and operating direction) to be set for the motor (driver for motor C) are defined.

Specifically, when the action type is "normal", the value "01H" of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value "3000" of the role product C action timer 223ae. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "positive direction" as the motion direction. After that, the action pointer value "02H" is set corresponding to the value "1500" of the role product C action timer 223ae. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

Then, the action pointer value "03H" is set corresponding to the value "0" of the role object C action timer 223ae. The action pointer "03H" defines "END" information indicating the end of the action scenario.

That is, when the action type C is "normal", the motor 441 for the accessory C moves in the "forward direction" (the forward direction of the reciprocating motion, that is, in the direction in which the tilting member 460 tilts) for 1.5 seconds. After that, for 1.5 seconds in the "negative direction" (reciprocating direction, that is, in the direction in which the inclination of the tilting member 460 is restored (that is, the entire operation period is 3 seconds). is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the action type "shortening" is set only in the role A scenario table 223ab1. This is performed by shortening the movement of the character having the shortest action period (character A720) among the plurality of characters (character A720 to character C460) that are driven during the continuous hit effect, thereby reducing the normal character. This is to increase the number of actions of the role object during the continuous hitting effect while suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the object action.

Note that although the action type “shortening” is not set in each scenario table (the role B scenario table 222ab2 and the role C scenario table 222ab3) corresponding to the above-described role product B740 and role product C460, the action type “shortening” is not set. ” may be set.

Returning to FIG. 186, the description continues. FIG. 186(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. Compared to the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in the tenth control example includes a repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa, a repeated hit effective timer 223ab, a role A action timer 223ac, a role B action timer 223ad, and a role The difference is that an object C action timer 223ae, an ahead flag 223af, and a shortened flag 223ag are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa is an area for storing the type of repeated hit effect selected with reference to the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa. In this repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 190), when it is determined that the normal reach or more (variation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761: Yes), repeated hits The repeated hitting effect type (S1762 in FIG. 190) selected by referring to the effect selection table 222aa is set (S1763 in FIG. 190). And, when the special figure fluctuation ends (running effect ends), the set information (running effect type) is cleared.

The repeated hit effective timer 223ab is a timer for measuring the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid in the repeated hit effect. This interlocking effective timer 223ab is activated when it is determined that the repeated hitting effect start time has been reached in the repeated hitting button process (S1857 in FIG. 192) executed in the frame button input monitoring/setting process 3 (see FIG. 191). When it is determined that the start time of the continuous hitting effect set in the action scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous hitting effect currently being executed (10000 milliseconds elapsed from the start of fluctuation) has been reached (s1902 in FIG. 192: yes), The value of the repeated hitting effective timer 23ab set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the repeated hitting effect currently being executed is set (S1903 in FIG. 192). Then, it is referred to to determine whether it is a period during which repeated button effects can be executed (S1906 in FIG. 192), and each time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) is executed (every 1 millisecond) , until the value becomes 0 (S2211 in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2212 in FIG. 193).

The role A action timer 223ac is a timer that counts the action scenario of the role A 720 in the continuous hit effect, and the action scenario defined in the role A scenario table 222ab1 corresponding to the value of the role A action timer 223ac. Based on this, the operation of the accessory A720 is controlled.

This role A operation timer 223ac is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting effect start time is reached in the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes), and the repeated hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is greater than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the role A action setting process (FIG. 194 ), a value corresponding to the state is set (S3704, S3705 in FIG. 194).

Specifically, when the accessory A720 is driven by the normal drive pattern, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3704 in FIG. 194), and when it is driven by the shortened drive pattern, the role "500" is set to the value of the object A operation timer 223ac (S3705 in FIG. 194).

Then, the value set in the role A action timer 223ac is set every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the repeated button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes "0" (S2213 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2214 in FIG. 193).

The role product B action timer 223ad is a timer that counts the action scenario of the role product B 740 in the repeated hit effect, and the action scenario defined in the role product B scenario table 222ab2 corresponding to the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is counted. Based on this, the operation of the accessory B740 is controlled.

This role object B operation timer 223ad is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting effect start time is reached in the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes), and the repeated hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is greater than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the role product B operation setting process (FIG. 195 (a)), "2000" is set to the value of the role product B action timer 223ad (S3802 in FIG. 195(a)).

Then, the value set in the role object B operation timer 223ad is set every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the repeated button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes "0" (S2215 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2216 in FIG. 193).

The role C action timer 223ae is a timer that counts the action scenario of the role C460 in the continuous hit effect, and the action scenario defined in the role C scenario table 222ab3 corresponding to the value of the role C action timer 223ae. Based on this, the operation of the role product C460 is controlled.

This role C action timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hitting effect start time is reached in the repeated hitting button processing (see FIG. 192) (S1902 in FIG. 192: Yes), and the repeated hitting is enabled. When the value of the timer 223ab is greater than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes), the role C action setting process (FIG. 195 (b)), "3000" is set to the value of the role product C action timer 223ae (S3902 in FIG. 195(b)).

Then, the value set in the role C action timer 223ae is changed every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the repeated button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), 1 is subtracted until the value becomes "0" (S2217 in FIG. 193: Yes) (S2218 in FIG. 193).

In this way, each of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect is provided with an action scenario and an action timer. can be driven independently. Furthermore, in this control example, since the value of the operation timer set for each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is different, the operation to drive each role (the role A720 to the role C460) different period. As a result, it is possible to drive only the accessory that is not driven when the frame button 22 is operated (the accessory whose action timer value is "0"). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the movement of the entire character when the frame button 22 is operated according to the operation status of each character (character A720 to character C460), thereby enhancing the production effect. can.

In addition, among the respective roles (a role A720 to a role C460), for the role A720 whose action period is shorter than the other roles (a role B740 and a role C460), an action scenario with a shorter action period ( Since it is possible to set a shortened drive pattern), all the objects (object A720 to object C460) are driven at the same time during the repeated hit production (all objects (object A720 to object C460) are driven at the same time). It is possible to shorten the period in which the value of the action timer is not "0", and it is possible to facilitate the execution of the performance of driving the character based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

The invalid flag 223af is a flag for determining that the frame button 22 has been operated while the role product A720 is operating (the value of the role product A operation timer is not "0"). is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during operation. In a state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, an action scenario (shortened drive pattern) with a shorter action period than usual is set when driving of the role object A720 is started.

This invalidation flag 223af is set to off (S1905 in FIG. 192) when the repeated hit effect start time is reached in the repeat button processing (see FIG. 192) (S1902 in FIG. 192), and the repeat effective timer 223ab The value is greater than 0 (S1906 in FIG. 192: Yes) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908 in FIG. 192: Yes) in the role object A action setting process (see FIG. 194) , When the role A action timer 223ac value is not "0" (S3701 in FIG. 194: No), it is set to ON (S3702 in FIG. 194).

Then, in the role A action setting process (see FIG. 194), when the value of the role A action timer 223ac is "0" (S3701 in FIG. 194: Yes) and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (see FIG. 194 (S3703: Yes), an operation scenario that is a shortened drive pattern is set (S3705 in FIG. 194), and then set to OFF (S3706 in FIG. 194).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the role A720 is in motion, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the timing at which the next repeated hit effect is started or the timing at which the next role A720 is Although it is configured so that it is not set to OFF until the operation is executed, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF may be further provided. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. good.

As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times is allowed to execute the shortened drive pattern with the operation period shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a role product presentation corresponding to the operation status of the frame button 22 . In this case, the period during which the invalid flag 223af is turned off may be the operation period (three seconds) of the accessory (accessory C460) with the longest operating period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous hit effect. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the accessories (the role A720 to the role C460) are not driven in the continuous hit effect, the shortened drive pattern is applied only to the role A720. can be prevented from being set.

In addition, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is operated once while the accessory A720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. A condition may be set, for example, the case where the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the accessory A720 is operating may be set as a condition to be set to ON, or a repeated hit effect period may be set. (remaining period of continuous hit valid timer) reaches a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds).

In addition, in this control example, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF when the operation scenario that is the shortened driving pattern is set, but other configurations may be used. Once set, the invalid flag 223af may not be set to OFF until the continuous hit effect is completed.

The shortening flag 223ag is a flag for determining the action type of the role product A720, and is set to ON when the action type "shortening" is selected. This shortening flag 223ag is set (see FIG. 194 S3703: Yes), it is set to ON (S3703 in FIG. 194).

Then, in the role product action processing (FIG. 196), when the action type of the role product A scenario table is selected (S2512 in FIG. 196), the action type is selected and the action scenario is set (S2514). It is set to off (S2515 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding control processing in the tenth control example>
Next, control processing in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 196. FIG. In the control processing in the tenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first control example. Other processing is the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth control example, the variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 in FIG. 190) in contrast to the main process (see FIG. 80) of the first control example. point, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191), and character action processing (S1561 in FIG. 196). It differs from the newly added point.

First, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the main process in the tenth control example. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1501 to S1506 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above. Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560) is executed instead of S1507 of 83). A detailed description of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191) will be given later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1560 is completed, the processing of S1508 to S1510 is executed in the same manner as the main processing of the first control example (see FIG. 80) described above. to run. A detailed description of this role product action process (S1561) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of S1561 is completed, then the command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the same manner as the main processing (see FIG. 80) of the first control example described above, and thereafter, instead of the variable display setting processing (S1512) , variable display setting processing 3 (S1512) is executed. A detailed description of this variable display setting process 3 (S1512) will be given later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the processes of S1513 to S1517 are executed in the same manner as the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 80), and this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512). This variable display setting process 3 (S1512) differs from the variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) in the above-described first control example in that a process for executing a continuous hit effect is added. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed, the processes of S1701 to S1703 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1512 in FIG. 82) of the first control example described above. Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is normal reach or more (whether the variation time of the extracted variation pattern is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761).

In the processing of S1761, when it is determined that the reach is equal to or higher than the normal reach, then, based on the repeated hitting effect selection table 222aa and the value of the effect counter 223f, the repeated hitting effect type is selected (S1762), and the selected repeated hitting effect is selected. The type is set in the repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1763).

When the processing of S1763 is finished, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 and the repeated hit effect type set in the repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa in S1763 (S1704). On the other hand, in the process of S1761, if it is determined that the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is not equal to or greater than the normal reach (S1761: No), the processes of S1762 and S1763 are skipped, and based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 to set a display variation pattern command (S1704).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, the processing of S1706 to S1709 is executed in the same manner as the variable display setting processing (S1512 in FIG. 82) of the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560) in this control example will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S1560) differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507 in FIG. 83) in that repeated button processing (S1857) is added.

When the frame button input monitoring/rendering process 3 (S1560) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1816 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring/rendering process (S1507 in FIG. 83) of the first control example. , a repeated button process is executed (S1851). Then, when the process of S1851 is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the continuous hit button process (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeated button press process (S1851). In this repeated-hit button processing (S1851), it is necessary to determine the operation contents of each role (a role A720 to a role C460) executed based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 executed during the repeated-hit effect. process is executed.

When the repeated hit button process (S1851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the repeated hit effect type ("long hit effect", "short repeated hit effect") is set in the repeated hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1901). In the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the repeated hit effect type is not set, that is, if the repeated hit button effect is not executed in this variation (S1901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the repeated hit effect type is set (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the repeated hit effect start time (S1902). In the process of S1902, it is determined whether or not it is 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) from the start of the repeated hit effect (see FIG. 187(a)).

In the process of S1902, if it is determined that it is time to start the repeated hit effect (S1902: Yes), as initial processing for starting the repeated hit effect, the value corresponding to the current repeated hit effect type (" "10000" for "Long hit effect", "5000" for "Short hit effect") is set (S1903), and each role action timer (the role A action timer 223ac, the role B action timer 223ad, The role object C operation timer 223ae) is cleared to 0 (S1904), and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1905). After that, the process proceeds to S1906.

On the other hand, in the process of S1902, if it is determined that it is not the repeated hit effect start time (S1902: No), the process skips S1903 to S1905, which are the initial process, and proceeds to S1906.

In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting valid timer 223ab is greater than "0" (S1906). Here, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is not greater than "0" (is "0"), that is, in the variation in which the repeated hitting effect is executed, the repeated hitting effect is not started. If there is (S1906: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is greater than "0" (S1906: Yes), then button timer subtraction processing is executed (S1907). Here, the button timer subtraction process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the contents of the button timer subtraction process (S1907). This button timer subtraction process (S1907) is for subtracting various timers (continuous hit effective timer 223ab, role A action timer 223ac, role B action timer 223ad, role C action timer 223ae) set during the repeated hitting effect. is the processing of

When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting valid timer 223ab is greater than "0" (S2211), and if it is determined to be greater than "0" (S2211: Yes). , the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is decremented by 1 (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be greater than "0" (is "0"), the process of S2212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2213.

Next, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the value of the role A action timer 223ac is greater than "0" (S2213), and if it is determined to be greater than "0" (S2213: Yes), the role A action The value of the timer 223ac is decremented by 1 (S2214), and the process proceeds to S2215. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S2213: No), the process of S2214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2215.

In the processing of S2215, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is greater than "0" (S2215). The value is decremented by 1 (S2216), and the process proceeds to S2217. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S2215: No), the process of S2216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2217.

In the processing of S2217, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is greater than "0" (S2217). The value is decremented by 1 (S2218), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S2217: No), the processing of S2218 is skipped and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 192, the description continues. After finishing the button timer subtraction process (S1907), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed down) (S1908). As a process for driving the role product A operation setting process (S1909), the role product B operation setting process (S1910), and the role product C operation setting process (S1911) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1908 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1908: No), this process ends.

Next, the role product A operation setting process (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product A operation setting process (S1909). In this role A action setting process (S1909), there are a process for starting the action of the role A720 during the continuous hit effect and a process for setting the action type ("normal", "shortened") of the role A720. executed.

When the role product A action setting process (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is "0" (S3701). If it is determined that the value is "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A720 is not operating (S3701: Yes), then the invalid flag 223af is set. It is determined whether it is set to ON (S3703), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3703: No), the value of the role object A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000". ” is set, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3701, if it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product A 720 is operating (S3701: No), the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON (S3702), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3703: Yes), then the value of the role product action A timer 223af is set to "500" (S3705). , the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S3706), the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S3707), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the role product B action setting process (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product B action setting process (S1910). In this role product B action setting process (S1910), a process for starting the action of the role product B 740 during the continuous hitting effect is executed.

When the role product B action setting process (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is "0" (S3801). If the value is determined to be “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product B 740 is not operating (S3801: Yes), the operation timer 223ad for the role product B is activated. The value is set to "2000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product B 740 is operating (S3801: No), this process ends.

FIG. 195(b) is a flow chart showing the content of the role product C operation setting process (S1911). In the role product C action setting process (S1911), a process for starting the action of the role product C460 during the continuous hitting effect is executed.

When the role product C action setting process (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is "0" (S3901). If it is determined that the value is "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product C460 is not operating (S3901: Yes), the role product C operation timer 223ae The value is set to "3000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3901, if it is determined that the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product C460 is operating (S3901: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the role product action process (S1561) executed in the main process (see FIG. 189) of this control example will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the contents of the accessory action process (S1561). In this role product operation process (S1561), the role product A operation setting process (S1909), the role product B operation setting process (S1910), and the role product C operation setting executed in the above-described repeated button process (S1851 in FIG. 192) Based on various timers and flags set in the process (S1911), a process for setting an operation command for each role (a role A720 to a role C460) is executed. The action command set in this process is output to a driving motor (motor driver) for driving each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460).

When the role product action process (S1561) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is greater than "0" (S2511). If the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is not greater than "0" (if it is determined to be "0" (S2511: No), the processing for the role product A720 (S2512 to S2514) is skipped and shortened. The flag 223ag is set to OFF (S2515), and the process proceeds to S2516.

In the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is greater than "0" (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512). , if it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512: Yes), the action content corresponding to the action type "shortening" defined in the character A scenario table 222ab1 is read out (S2513), The process proceeds to S2516.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2512: No), it corresponds to the action type "normal" defined in the role A scenario table 222ab1. The content of the operation to be performed is read out (S2514), and the process proceeds to S2516.

In the process of S2516, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is greater than "0" (S2516). If the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is not greater than "0" (if it is determined to be "0" (S2516: No), S2517 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2518. When it is determined that the value of the object B action timer 223ad is greater than "0" (S2518: Yes), the action contents of the role object B scenario table 222ab2 are read out (S2517), and the process proceeds to S2518.

In the process of S2518, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is greater than "0" (S2518). If the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is not greater than "0" (if it is determined to be "0" (S2518: No), S2519 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2520. When it is determined that the value of the object C action timer 223ae is greater than "0" (S2518: Yes), the action contents of the role object C scenario table 222ab3 are read out (S2519), and the process proceeds to S2520.

Then, an operation command is set (S2520) based on the operation contents read out in the processes of S2513, S2514, S2547, and S2519 described above, and this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, all of the drivable roles (Accessory A720 to Accessory C460) are driven based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22. is configured as follows. Therefore, it becomes possible to drive a plurality of accessories with one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, and the production effect of the accessory drive presentation executed based on the player's operation can be enhanced.

In addition, since the operation period is different for each role (the role A720 to the role C460), depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in a drivable state Item C460) can be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the character is driven when the frame button 22 is operated, so that it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the character product-driven presentation that is executed based on the player's operation.

Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory (accessory A720) is in motion, a shortened drive pattern with a short operating period for the accessory is set the next time the accessory is driven. For a player who willingly operates the button 22 multiple times, the number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased. In addition, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 multiple times, the character is not driven in the shortened drive pattern, and the character is driven in a long operation period. can increase

That is, in the role-driven effect in this control example, by changing the drive pattern of the role according to the situation in which the player operates the frame button 22 (single operation, continuous hit operation), the player can operate the frame button. There is an effect that it is possible to execute the performance driven performance according to.

In the tenth control example described above, the invalid flag 223af, which is the condition for executing the shortened drive pattern, is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is operating. However, another condition may be set as the condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to ON (that is, the condition for executing the shortened drive pattern as a drive pattern different from the normal drive pattern). The condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while is operating, or the remaining period of the repeated hitting effect period (remaining period of the repeated hitting effective timer) is The condition may be established when a predetermined period of time (for example, within 3 seconds) is reached, or the condition may be established based on the determination result of the special symbol.

Furthermore, instead of the accumulated value of the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one role action, a plurality of role action (for example, one action during the period during which the action is performed) The number of times the frame button 22 is operated across the role object motion) may be accumulated.

In addition, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A720 is in motion, the invalid flag 223af, which is the condition for executing the shortened drive pattern, is set to the next repeated hit effect. or until the action of the next Accessory A720 is executed, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. For example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. good.

As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times is allowed to execute the shortened drive pattern with the operation period shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a role product presentation corresponding to the operation status of the frame button 22 . In this case, the period during which the invalid flag 223af is turned off may be the operation period (three seconds) of the accessory (accessory C460) with the longest operating period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous hit effect. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the accessories (the role A720 to the role C460) are not driven in the continuous hit effect, the shortened drive pattern is applied only to the role A720. can be prevented from being set.

In addition, in this control example, the shortened drive pattern can be set only for the accessory A720, but the shortened drive pattern is also set for other accessories (accessory B740 and accessory C460). It may be possible.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to vary the operation pattern (driving pattern) of the role (variable from the normal drive pattern to the shortened drive pattern) in a series of role product driving effects, the frame during the role product driving effect A configuration is used in which a variable condition is satisfied (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON) based on the operation of the button 22, but in addition to that, for example, a period before a series of character product driving effects is executed A configuration may be used in which the action pattern of the role object is varied in advance based on the operation status (number of operations, operation interval, etc.) of the frame button 22 in .

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set a shortened driving pattern in the first action of a character object in a series of character object driving effects, and in the series of character object driving effects, it is possible to correspond to the operation of the frame button 22. It is possible to make it easier to increase the number of times the performance of the accessory action is performed.

In this control example described above, one type of shortened operation pattern (shortened drive pattern) whose operation period is shorter than the normal operation pattern is used, but a plurality of shortened operation patterns with different operation periods are provided. , Based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.), the remaining period of the effect, and the game state (result of judging whether or not the special symbol is appropriate), one shortening operation pattern is set among a plurality of shortening operation patterns. can be configured to

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 205. FIG. The eleventh control example is different from the tenth control example described above in that control for differentiating the timing of driving the character in the character product driving effect is added.

Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the performance of the role product driving performance, each role object (the role object A720 to role object A720) positioned at the retreat position (standby position) However, in the eleventh control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed), the timing at which the accessory B740 is driven with respect to the accessory A720 is set. It is set to delay 0.1 second and to delay the timing at which the role C460 is driven with respect to the role A720 by 0.2 seconds (0.1 seconds for the role B740).

In this way, by varying the timing at which each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is driven with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, all the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are activated at the same time. It is possible to shorten the driving period, and it is possible to make it easier to drive any one of the characters (character A720 to character C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the character product driving performance. , it is possible to enhance the production effect during the character-driven production.

Further, when the frame button 22 is operated while the timing of driving the accessory is delayed (for example, the timing of driving the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delayed state is released. , based on the operation of the frame button 22, it is set so that the driving of the target role product (the role product C460) is started. As a result, it is possible to easily drive any one of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, thereby enhancing the performance effect during the performance driven by the role.

As described above, in the case of using the control for differentiating the driving timing of the character in the character-driven effect, the process of delaying the driving timing of the character whose operation period is set longer among the plurality of characters is performed. (delayed processing) should be executed. By configuring in this way, since the character with a short operation period is driven during the delay period, it is possible to efficiently shorten the period in which the respective characters (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously driven. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the delay operation in the character product driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which each character (character A720 to character B740) driven in the character product driving effect in this control example is positioned at the retreat position (standby position). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the performance of the role product driving effect, and the role product A 720 starts to be driven. ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the role product B740 for which the delay processing has been executed in the role product-driven effect has started to operate.

As shown in FIG. 197(a), the role object A720 and the role object B740 located at the retracted position (standby position) are arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 as in the tenth control example described above. be done. For convenience of explanation, the accessory C460 is not shown in FIG. 197, but the accessory C460 is actually provided at the same location as in the tenth control example (see FIG. 182(a)).

In this control example, when the character object driving effect is started and the frame button 22 is operated (depressed), the character object A720 first starts to operate as shown in FIG. 197(b). Specifically, the operation (see FIG. 188(a)) of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 1 second) is executed. Then, 0.1 seconds later, as shown in FIG. 197(c), the role object B740 starts to operate. Specifically, the operation (see FIG. 188(b)) of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 2 seconds) is executed.

As described above, the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) in a state in which the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are drivable (located in the retracted position (standby position)) (see FIG. 197(a)). 197(b)), the action of the role product B740 is started with a delay (FIG. 197(c)) with respect to the start of the action of the role product A720 (see FIG. 197(b)). It is possible to drive multiple roles at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that the accessory can be driven at various timings in response to the operation of the frame button 22, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the period from the state shown in FIG. 197(b) to the state shown in FIG. ), if the frame button 22 is operated during the delay period, the accessory B740 starts to operate without waiting for the elapse of the delay period. As a result, it is possible to easily drive any one of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, thereby enhancing the performance effect during the performance driven by the role. can.

In this control example, as described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period to elapse. Even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the role product B740 may not be started until the delay period has passed. In this case, the role product cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period. Based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the period, it can be made to think that the driving of the accessory B740 has been executed (started).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the "button repeated hitting effect", which is the role-driven effect in this control example, will be described. do. This FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing the flow of the character object-driven presentation in this control example. In this control example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) while a specific role (the role B740 or the role C460) is operating, and then the specific role (the role B740 Or, when the driving of the accessory C460) is executed, the operation start timing is delayed.

Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while either the role item B740 or the role item C460 is in motion, an invalid flag 223af, which will be described later, is set to ON. When the operation of the role product B740 or the role product C460 is started in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, a delay process for delaying the operation start timing is executed.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the player operates the frame button 22 (“pressing button” ON) during the valid period of the “button repeated effect”, the player is placed in the stopped state (positioned at the standby position). The action of each character (character A720 to character C460) is started (point a in FIG. 198).

In this control example, as in the tenth control example described above, the drive period of the role product A720 is set to 1 second, the drive period of the role product B740 is set to 2 seconds, and the drive period of the role product C460 is set to 3 seconds. Driven for a defined period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated ("button pressed" ON) at the timing when the role object B740 or the role object C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period is turned on. (point b in FIG. 198).

After that, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the role A 720 and the role B 740 are in a stopped state (positioned in the standby position), the role A 720 performs a normal operation, and the role B740 is subjected to delay processing (delay period of 0.1 second) (point c in FIG. 198). At this point c, since the accessory C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

To explain in detail, in this control process, after the operation setting process for the role product B740 (the operation setting process for the role product B (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the operation setting process for the role product C460 (the operation setting process for the role product C) is performed. (S1911 in FIG. 204)) is executed, the operation of the frame button 22 at point c in FIG. After that, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON again in the character object C operation setting process, so the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

Then, after the delay period has passed (after 0.1 second), the operation of the role object B740 (operation period of 2 seconds) is executed (point d in FIG. 198). After that, when the frame button 22 is operated after the action of the role product C460 is completed (point e in FIG. 198), the role product A720 performs normal operation, and the role product C460 is delayed (delay period 0 .2 seconds) is executed (point e in FIG. 198). At this point e, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF because the delay processing is executed for the role product C460. Then, after the delay period has passed (after 0.2 seconds), the action of the role object C460 (with an action period of 3 seconds) is executed (point f in FIG. 198).

After that, at the timing of point g in FIG. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the object C460 is in the action state (in action), the actions of the role A720 and the role B740 are executed, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON.

Then, at the timing of point h in FIG. 198, that is, in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and all of the role A 720, the role B 740, and the role C 460 are in a stopped state (positioned at the standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the state where the player is present), the actions of the role A720 and the role C460 are executed, and the delay processing is executed for the role B740.

As described above, in this control example, after the action setting process for the role product B740 (the action setting process for the role product B (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the action setting process for the role product C460 (the action setting process for the role product C) is completed. Since the setting process (S1911 in FIG. 204)) is executed, the operation of the frame button 22 at the point h in FIG. This is because the operation contents of the role product C460 are set in the role product C operation setting process after that.

In this way, by operating the frame button 22 while one of the plurality of roles (the role B740 and the role C460) is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. When any of the plurality of accessories (the role B740 and the role C460) performs an action in the state where the role B740 and the role C460 are set, the process of performing the delay processing and setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF is performed by the role B740 and the role C460. By executing C460 in order, when the action of the role product B740 and the role product C460 is executed while the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the delay processing is executed only for the role product B740. Become.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous execution of the delay processing for a plurality of role products (the role product B740 and the role product C460).

Next, the flow of action of each role when the frame button 22 is operated during delay processing will be described with reference to point h and point i in FIG. When the frame button 22 is operated while the delay processing (0.1 seconds) is being executed for the role object B740 at the point h in FIG. 198 (0.08 seconds after the delay processing is executed) ( At point i) in FIG. 198, the delay processing being executed is ended, and the role object B740 executes an action based on the operation of the frame button at point i in FIG.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay processing is being executed, the delay processing is stopped and the role is driven, so that the role based on the operation of the frame button during the "button repeated effect" is activated. The number of operations can be increased.

In this control example, the invalid flag 223af is set to the initial state (set to OFF) at the timing when the "button repeated effect" is started. , it may be set to OFF at the timing when the "effective period" of the "button repeated effect" ends, or may be set to OFF at the timing when the "button repeated effect" ends.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 199, the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. The RAM 222 in the eleventh control example differs from the RAM 222 in the tenth control example in that a role B delay timer 222ba and a role C delay timer 222bb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The role product B delay timer 223ba is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay process is executed for the role product B 740, and the value (for example, "100") set to this timer is 1. It is decremented every millisecond, and the delay processing ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". The value of the accessory B action timer 223ad is "0" in the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203) executed in the repeated hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3811 in FIG. 203: Yes), when the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813 in FIG. 203: Yes), the value of "100" is set, and in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200) Every time the delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S2352 in FIG. 201).

Then, in the role object B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203), when the frame button 22 is operated while the value of the role object B delay timer 223ba is not "0", the value of the timer becomes "0". set.

The role product C delay timer 223bb is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay processing is executed for the role product C460, and the value (for example, "200") set to this timer is 1. It is decremented every millisecond, and the delay processing ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". be. The value of the role C action timer 223ae is "0" in the role C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204) executed in the repeated hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200). (S3911 in FIG. 203: Yes), if the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913 in FIG. 203: Yes), a value of "200" is set, and in repeated hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200) Every time the delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S2354 in FIG. 201).

Then, in the role object C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204), when the frame button 22 is operated while the value of the role object C delay timer 223bb is not "0", the value of the timer becomes "0". set.

As described above, the above-described accessory B delay timer 223ba and accessory C delay timer 223bb are the delay periods set when the delay processing is executed (0.1 second for accessory B740, 0.1 second for accessory C460 is a timer for counting 0.2 seconds).

Furthermore, in both the role B740 and the role C460, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed (while the delay period is being counted), each delay timer (the role The B delay timer 223ba and the character C delay timer 223bb) are configured to be set to "0". Thereby, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory can be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 . Therefore, it is possible to easily drive the character object B740 or the character object C460 based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the character object driving effect (during the continuous hit effect), and the effect of the character object driving effect can be enhanced. .

<Regarding control processing in the eleventh control example>
Next, control processing in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205. FIG. In the control processing in the eleventh control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the tenth control example. Other processing is the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh control example, the repeated hit button processing (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the repeated hit button processing 2 (see FIG. 200), and the role product motion processing (see FIG. 196) The difference is that it is changed to operation processing 2 (see FIG. 205).

First, with reference to FIG. 200, the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeat button process 2 (S1851). In this repeated button process 2 (S1851), the operation of each role (accessory A720 to role C460) is executed based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the repeated hitting effect ("button repeated effect"). Processing is performed to determine the content.

Each process of the repeated button process 2 (S1851) in the eleventh control example differs from the repeated button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example in that a delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is added. do.

When the repeated button process 2 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the repeated button process of the first control example (see FIG. 192), and then the delay timer subtraction process is performed. (S1921), then the processing of S1908 to S1911 is performed, and this processing ends.

Next, the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the details of the delay timer subtraction process (S1921). When the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is greater than "0" (S2351). When it is determined that the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2351: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba (S2352), The process proceeds to S2353.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the role object B delay timer 223ba is "0" (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2353.

In the process of S2353, it is determined whether or not the value of the role object C delay timer 223ca is greater than "0" (S2353). When it is determined that the value of the role C delay timer 223ca is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2353: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the role C delay timer 223ca (S2354), End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the role object C delay timer 223ca is "0" (S2353: No), the process of S2354 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the role product A action setting process 2 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product A action setting process 2 (S1909). The eleventh control example is different in that the role product A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) of the tenth control example is changed to role product A operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 202).

When this role product A action setting process 2 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is "0" (S3711). When it is determined that the value of the role A action timer 223ac is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3711: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3712), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3711, when it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3711: Yes), the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3713 ), the process ends.

That is, in the above-described role product A operation setting process 2 (S1909), the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is referred to determine whether or not the current operating state of the role product A 720 is in operation. , the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 is operated during operation is set to ON, and if it is not in operation (if it is in a stopped state (standby state)), the action of the role A720 is executed. Therefore, a process of setting the value of "1000" (corresponding to 1 second) to the role product A operation timer 223ac is executed.

Next, the role product B action setting process 2 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1910).

The eleventh control example differs from the tenth control example in that the role product B operation setting process (see FIG. 195(a)) is changed to the role product B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203).

In this role product B operation setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811). When it is determined that the value of the role object B operation timer 223ad is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S3811: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3812), and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3813: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the role object B delay timer 223ba is "0". (S3814). If it is determined that the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S3814: No), the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is set to "0" ( S3815), the process proceeds to S3816. On the other hand, in the process of S3814, when it is determined that the value of the role object B delay timer 223ba is "0" (S3814: Yes), the process of S3815 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3816.

In the process of S3816, "2000" is set to the value of the role product B action timer 223ad (S3816), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S3813, if it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (is ON) (S3813: Yes), the value of the role object B delay timer 223ba is set to "100" ( S3817), the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S3818), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the role product B action setting process 2 (S1910 in FIG. 203), the role product B 740 can be operated or delayed based on the operation timing of the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated during processing (the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is "1" or more), the delay process is ended and the process of operating the role product B740 is executed.

Next, the role product C action setting process 2 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 2 (S1911).

The eleventh control example is different in that the character object C operation setting process (see FIG. 195(b)) of the tenth control example is changed to the character object C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204).

In this role product C action setting process 2 (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the role product C action timer 223ae is "0" (S3911). When it is determined that the role object C operation timer 223ae is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3911: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3912), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is ON (S3913). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3913: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the role object C delay timer 223bb is "0" (S3914 ).

In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the value of the role C delay timer 223bb is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3914: No), the value of the role C delay timer 223bb is set to "0". set (S3915) and proceed to the processing of S3916. On the other hand, in the process of S3914, when the value of the role object C delay timer 223bb is "0" (S3914: Yes), the process of S3915 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3916.

In the process of S3916, "3000" is set to the value of the role product C action timer 223ae (S3916), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S3913, if it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes), the value of the character C delay timer 223bb is set to "200" (S3917), and the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3918), and the process ends.

Next, the role product action process 2 (S1561) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product action process 2 (S1561).

The eleventh control example is different in that the role product action process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example is changed to role product action process 2 (see FIG. 205).

In this role product operation process 2 (S1561), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2531). When it is determined that the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2531: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the action type "normal" of the role product A scenario table 222ab1 is changed. Read (S2532), and move to the processing of S2533. On the other hand, in the process of S2531, when the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is determined to be "0" (S2531: No), the process of S2532 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2533.

In the process of S2533, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is greater than "0" (S2533). If it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2533: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is greater than "0". It is determined (S2534). When it is determined that the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2534: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type of the role product B scenario table 222ab2 is read out ( S2535), the process proceeds to S2536.

On the other hand, in the process of S2533, if the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is determined to be "0" (S2533: No), or in the process of S2534, the value of the role product B delay timer 223ba is determined to be "0" If so (S2534: No), the process of S2535 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2536.

In the process of S2536, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is greater than "0". In the process of S2536, if it is determined that the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2536: Yes), then the value of the role product C delay timer 223bb is set to " 0” is determined (S2537).

In the processing of S2537, when it is determined that the value of the role product C delay timer 223bb is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2537: Yes), the operation corresponding to the action type of the role product C scenario table 222ab3 The contents are read out (S2538), and the process proceeds to S2539.

On the other hand, when the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is determined to be "0" in the process of S2536 (S2536: No), or the value of the role product C delay timer 223bb is determined to be "0" in the process of S2537. If so (S2537: No), the process of S2538 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2539.

In the process of S2539, an operation command is set based on the read operation contents (S2539), and this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, in order to vary the timing at which each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is driven with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, all the roles (the role A720 to C460) can be shortened while simultaneously driving, and any one of the roles (A720 to C460) can be selected based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the performance of the role drive. can be easily driven, and the production effect can be enhanced during the performance of driving the character.

Further, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the role object is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the role object C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delay The state is canceled, and based on the operation of the frame button 22, it is set to start driving the target role product (the role product C460). As a result, it is possible to easily drive any one of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, thereby enhancing the performance effect during the performance driven by the role.

Furthermore, in this control example, the delay processing is executed for the role product B740 (operation period of 2 seconds) and the role product C460 (operation period of 3 seconds), which have a longer action period than the role product A720 (operation period of 1 second). It is configured as follows. In other words, when a plurality of accessories are driven at the same time, the delay processing is performed for the accessories having a long operation period. As a result, while the delay processing is being executed, the action of the character whose action period is short is executed, so there is an effect that the period in which the plurality of character is simultaneously moving can be further shortened. .

Note that this control example uses a configuration in which when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the character for which the delay process is being executed is started without waiting for the delay period to elapse. However, even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the role product B may not be started until the delay period has passed.

In this case, the role object cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period. Based on the operation (pressing) of the inner frame button 22, it can be made to think that the action of the character has been executed (started).

Furthermore, in this control example, while the delay processing can be executed for a plurality of roles (the role B740 and the role C460), the delay processing can be performed for the plurality of roles at the same time by operating the frame button once. Since it is configured so as not to be executed, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous execution of delay processing for a plurality of role products (the role product B740 and the role product C460). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the delay processing is executed simultaneously for a plurality of role products, and the period in which the plurality of role products operate simultaneously is not shortened.

In addition, in this control example, since the delay period set in the delay process is different for each role product, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the period in which a plurality of role products operate simultaneously is not shortened. can.

In this control example, the delay period in the delay process is set to a short period (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds), but the length of the delay period is not limited to this. A delay period longer than the action period during which the character works may be set. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent a plurality of role objects from moving at the same time.

Also, in this control example, only one type of delay period is defined for each role product in the delay process, but it may be configured such that a plurality of types of delay periods can be set for each role product. In this case, it is preferable to determine the accessories to be executed at the same time and select the delay period based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the period in which a plurality of accessories operate at the same time can be further shortened.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to execute delay processing in a series of character product-driven effects, a delay condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the character product-driven effect (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON). In addition to this, for example, based on the operation status (number of operations, operation interval, etc.) of the frame button 22 in the period before the series of character product driving effects are executed, the role A configuration in which the object motion is delayed in advance may be used.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set a delay pattern in the first performance of the role product driving performance in a series of role product driving performances, and in the series of role product driving performances, the role corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. It can be made easier to increase the number of times an object action is performed.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. FIG. This twelfth control example differs from the above-described tenth control example in that control is added to change the action command to the character object that is in motion in the character product drive effect.

Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the character object driving effect, a predetermined driving pattern (normal driving pattern or short driving pattern) is set and set. Each character (character A720 to character C460) is operated based on the drive pattern.

On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed), the action status of each role in action (the role A720 to role C460) is determined, and the role in action is determined. When the object (accessory A720 or accessory B740) satisfies the predetermined condition (when it is determined that it is driven in the forward direction), the accessory is moved from the current position to the standby position ( It is configured to set an operation command to operate (toward the negative direction) (hereinafter referred to as a repeat operation).

In this way, the motion command is changed halfway through the acting role product (the role product A 720 or the role product B 740), and the repetitive motion is executed, thereby shortening the motion period of one role product motion. It is possible to make it easier to operate any one of the characters (character A720 to character C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the character-driven performance, and the performance during the character-driven performance You can increase the effect.

In addition, since the repetitive motion is performed only when it is determined that the motion is driven in the forward direction, the motion period of the character whose motion command is changed in the middle can be reliably shortened. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the repetitive motion in the character object-driven effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 206(a) schematically shows the motion (driving) range (maximum driving range) and repeatable motion range (repeatable range) of the role product A720 operated in the role product driving performance in this control example. FIG. 206(b) schematically shows a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) during the performance of the role product drive and the role product A 720 is moving in the forward direction (forward motion). FIG. 206(c) is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 206(c) is a repeated motion in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product A720 is moving in the positive direction, and the role product A720 moves in the negative direction (backward motion). is a schematic diagram schematically showing a role product A720 in which is executed.

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the accessory A720 positioned at the retracted position (standby position) is arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the tenth control example described above. For convenience of explanation, the role object B740 and the role object C460 are not shown in FIG. 206(a). Object C460 is provided.

The role object A720 of this control example is set to be driven by the same action command as the action command defined in the action type "normal" of the tenth control example (the action period is 1 second (forward action 0. 5 seconds, return movement 0.5 seconds)), and as shown in FIG. It is configured to be overhanging (maximum drive range).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A720 positioned at the retracted position (standby position) are driven by the accessory A motors 771 and 772, respectively. It starts to move toward the center of the third pattern display device 81 (drives in the positive direction). FIG. 206(b) shows a state in which 0.25 seconds have passed since the accessory A720 started driving in the forward direction. In the state shown in FIG. 206(b), when it is executed based on a normal movement command, the remaining forward movement is executed for 0.25 seconds and then the return movement for 0.5 seconds is executed.

When the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) in the state shown in FIG. 206(b), as shown in FIG. Seconds), the return operation (operation period of 0.25 seconds) will be executed (repeated operation will be executed).

As a result, the motion of the role object A720, which normally has a motion period of 1 second (forward motion: 0.5 seconds, backward motion: 0.5 seconds), is changed to a motion period of 0.5 seconds (forward motion: 0.25 seconds). , return action 0.25 seconds), and any of the roles (A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the performance of the role drive. can be made easier to operate, and the production effect can be enhanced during the character-driven production.

FIG. 206 shows an example of the repeated motion when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) after 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the forward motion was executed. When the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) during the period of (movement in the forward direction), the repetitive movement is executed. Therefore, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the forward motion is executed for 0.1 seconds, the backward motion will be executed for 0.1 second, and the motion period of the accessory A720 will be reduced to 0. .2 seconds.

Also, in FIG. 206, the repetitive action of this control example is explained using the role product A720, but the role product B740 is also configured to be able to perform the repetitive action in the same way. ), when the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the forward motion (1 second) is being performed (for example, the timing at which the forward motion is being performed for 0.5 seconds), then the return motion for 0.5 seconds is performed. is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the action period (2 seconds) of the character object to the action period (1 second) under normal circumstances.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the role that operates based on the operation of the frame button 22, the operation content of the role in operation is displayed. (operation period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of accessory actions based on the operation of the frame button 22 .

In this control example, by operating the frame button 22 in a state in which the character object that operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is being operated, the operation period of the character object being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be positioned at the retracted position (standby position), so that the number of accessory actions based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the positive direction (from the retracted position to the overhanging position), and it is determined that it is moving in the positive direction. Since the operation contents of the role object are changed so that the role object moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position) when the character object is moved, the operation period of the role object can be reliably shortened.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is in motion, an action (repeated action) that shortens the action period is executed. A configuration may also be used, for example, by operating (pressing) the frame button 22, the movement of the character in action is temporarily stopped (the counting of each character product operation timer is stopped), and then the frame button 22 may be configured to restart the action of the role product (restart counting of the role product action timer) when is operated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the operation mode of the character in action based on the operation of the frame button 22, and increase the number of times of operation of the character based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Also, instead of temporarily stopping the movement of the character in action, it may be made to perform an action of returning a predetermined amount (for example, 10 ms) in the return direction (negative direction).

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the "button repeated hitting effect", which is the role-driven effect in this control example, will be described. do. FIG. 207 is a timing chart showing the flow of the performance driven by the character in this control example. It should be noted that the detailed description of the same contents as in FIG. 185 of the tenth control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) in the "button repeated effect", each role (the role A720 to the role C460) starts to operate as in the tenth control example described above. (See point a and point b in Figure 207). Next, the flow of repetitive motions in this control example will be described with reference to points c to g in FIG.

When the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) at the point c in FIG. 207, the action of the accessory B740 positioned in the stopped state (standby state) is executed (operation period is 2 seconds). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) 0.8 seconds after the point c, the action of the role object A720 is started (point d in FIG. 207). This point d is 0.8 seconds after the role object B740 started to move, which is the period during which the role object B740 is moving in the positive direction. A motion command is set to move .8 seconds.

Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) 0.25 seconds after the point d, a repetitive action is executed for the role object A720, and an action command to move in the negative direction for 0.25 seconds is set. At the point d, the accessory B 740 is moving in the negative direction, so the action content does not change based on the operation (action) of the frame button 22 .

Then, after 0.25 seconds from the point e, the character A720 whose repetitive action is performed completes its action (point f in FIG. 207), and after 0.8 seconds from the point d, the character B740 whose repetitive action is performed. completes the operation (point g in Figure 207).

Furthermore, after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing (point h in FIG. 207) at which both the role object A720 and the role object B740 can execute the action (point h in FIG. 207), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.6 seconds later. ), the role object A 720 is in a state (moving in the negative direction) after half of the action period (1 second), so the repeated action is not executed, and the role object B 740 is in the action period Since half of (2 seconds) has not passed yet (moving in the positive direction), a repetitive motion (a repetitive motion with a total motion period of 1.2 seconds) is executed (point i ). Then, after 0.6 seconds from the point i, the repetitive motion of the role object B740 is completed.

<Regarding control processing in the 12th control example>
Next, control processing in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. FIG. The control process in the twelfth control example differs from the tenth control example in that the repeated button process 3 (see FIG. 208) is executed instead of the repeated button process (see FIG. 192). is the same as the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 208, the continuous hit button process 3 (S1851) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeated button process 3 (S1851). When the repeated hit button process 3 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example described above, and then the role A action setting process 3 is executed. (see S1909 in FIG. 209), execute the role product B action setting process 3 (see S1910 in FIG. 210), execute the role product C action setting process 3 (see S1911 in FIG. 211), and end this process. do.

Next, the role product A action setting process 3 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product A action setting process 3 (S1909). When the role product A action setting process 3 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is "0" (S3721). If it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product A 720 is not operating (S3721: Yes), Next, the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3723), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3721, if it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is not "0" ("1" or more), that is, the frame button 22 is operated while the role product A720 is operating. If (pressed) is pressed (S3721: No), it is determined whether the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is greater than "500" (S3724), and the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is less than or equal to "500". If it is determined (S3724: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the role A action timer 223ac is greater than "500" (S3724: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the role A action timer 223ac from "1000" is value is set (S3726), and the process ends.

That is, according to the role product A operation setting process 3 (S1909), when the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac has not reached half ("500") of the set value ("1000"), that is, the role product When it is determined that A is operating in the positive direction (direction away from the standby position), the current value of the role A action timer 223ac is changed from the set value ("1000") of the role A action timer 223ac. By setting the subtracted value (that is, the value for moving in the negative direction corresponding to the amount of motion already performed in the positive direction) in the role A action timer 223ac, the repetitive motion is performed using the role A scenario table 222ab1. can be executed.

Note that, as in this control example, when executing control to vary the action period by changing the value of a timer (counter) that advances the action scenario table without changing the action scenario table that operates the accessory, Preferably, a position detection sensor is provided for detecting the actual movement position of the character.

Next, the role product B action setting process 3 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. 210(a). FIG. 210(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product B action setting process 3 (S1910). When the role product B action setting process 3 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is "0" (S3821). When it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is "0", that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product B 740 is not operating (S3821: Yes), "2000" is set to the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad (S3823), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3821, if it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) while the role product B740 is operating (S3821: No), it is determined whether the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is greater than "1000" (S3824), and if it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is less than "1000" ( S3824: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is larger than "1000" (S3824: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the role product B operation timer 223ad from "2000" is set to the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad. value is set (S3826), and the process ends.

Next, the character object C action setting process 3 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. 210(b). FIG. 210(b) is a flow chart showing the details of the role product C action setting process 3 (S1911). In the twelfth control example, the role product C operation setting process (see FIG. 195) of the tenth control example is changed to the role product C operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 210), and the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is set to "500" (S3922), and other processing is the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the role that operates based on the operation of the frame button 22, the operation content of the role in operation is displayed. (operation period) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of accessory actions based on the operation of the frame button 22 .

In this control example, by operating the frame button 22 in a state in which the character object that operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is being operated, the operation period of the character object being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be positioned at the retracted position (standby position), so that the number of accessory actions based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the positive direction (from the retracted position to the overhanging position), and it is determined that it is moving in the positive direction. Since the operation contents of the role object are changed so that the role object moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position) when the character object is moved, the operation period of the role object can be reliably shortened.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is in motion, an action (repeated action) that shortens the action period is executed. A configuration may also be used, for example, by operating (pressing) the frame button 22, the movement of the character in action is temporarily stopped (the counting of each character product operation timer is stopped), and then the frame button 22 may be configured to restart the action of the role product (restart counting of the role product action timer) when is operated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the operation mode of the character in action based on the operation of the frame button 22, and increase the number of times of operation of the character based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. FIG. In the thirteenth control example, in contrast to the tenth control example described above, each character (character A720 to character C460) that operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the character product drive effect is activated at a specific timing. The difference is that control for positioning at the retracted position (standby position) is added.

In the configuration of the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the character product driving performance, the control for operating the operable character object (the character object located at the retracted position (standby position)) is performed by the frame button. 22 operation is executed for a period of time (effective period). Here, for example, in the final stage of the above-described role-driven production, when trying to set a production that causes all the roles (A720 to C460) to operate all at once as a role production that notifies the degree of expectation for a big win. is a period until the action of each role product (a role product A720 to a role product C460) that are operated at different timings and in different operation periods (in the case of the tenth control example, the operation of the role product C460 It is necessary to set the period of 3 seconds) as a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not determined to be effective (invalid period).

If the same invalid period is set for each accessory (Accessory A720 to Accessory C460) in this way, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the accessory-driven effect has ended. , there is a problem that the production effect of the entire role-driven production is reduced.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to set an invalid period for judging that the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid for each role object (the role object A720 to the role object C460) having different operation periods. The invalid period to be set is configured to correspond to the operation period of each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460).

In this way, by setting an invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each role (the role A720 to the role C460), each driven based on one operation of the frame button 22 By setting different invalid periods for the roles (A720 to C460), the invalid period set during the performance driven by the role (invalid period set for all the roles) is shortened. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect of the entire character-driven production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the operation mode of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the role product driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 211(a) shows a period (hereinafter referred to as a free movement period) in which each role (a role A720 to a role C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 set at the beginning of the role-driven effect. FIG. 211(b) is a schematic diagram showing a point c in FIG. 212, which will be described later, as an example of the operation of each role (a role A720 to a role C460) in the final stage of the role drive production, and FIG. Schematic diagram schematically showing a simultaneous action in which each role object (a role object A720 to a role object C460) is operated at the same time in a state where the role object A720 to the role object C460) are intentionally positioned at the retreat position (standby position). is.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), during the free movement period, each character (character A720 to character C460) is operated at different timings. The slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b) are moving in the negative direction (a state in which about 0.8 seconds have passed since the start of the operation), and the accessory B 740 (upper slide member 740a and lower slide member 740b) is in the negative direction. (about 1.1 seconds after the start of the action), and the role object C460 has not started the action.

In this way, during the free motion period, depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, each role (the role A720 to the role C460) starts to operate at a different timing, and each role (the role A720 to the role C460) perform actions in different action periods, so that each role (the role A720 to the role C460) almost never finishes its action at the same timing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute various role object motion presentations in response to the player's operation of the frame button during the free motion period, thereby suppressing the player's early boredom with the game. ing.

FIG. 211(b) shows a simultaneous motion set at the end of the character-driven effect. In this simultaneous action, all the roles are executed at the same timing. It is an impressive performance.

The character product drive effect having such a free action period and a period in which the simultaneous action is executed is, for example, a display effect suggesting whether or not the special symbol has won the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81. During the period of execution, the third symbol is in a reach state (for example, two third symbols out of three third symbols are stopped at the same symbol, and the remaining one third symbol is fluctuating state), a free movement period is set as a character product driving effect, and in the third pattern display device 81, simultaneous movement is performed around the timing when the first third pattern that is fluctuating in the ready-to-win state stops. It should be configured to be set.

As a result, it is possible to execute various role product movements during the free movement period as a stimulus during the ready-to-win state, and to execute simultaneous movements at the timing of indicating the result of determination of whether the special symbol is right or wrong, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

As described above, according to this control example, the free motion period is executed in the beginning of the character product-driven presentation, and the simultaneous motion can be executed in the final stage of the role-driven presentation. Further, when shifting from the free action period to the simultaneous action period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the action period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on this, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the characters (character A720 to character C460) are inoperable.

In this control example, the operation period of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is fixed. Alternatively, as in the eleventh control example described above, control for delaying the movement timing of the character may be used, or as in the above-described twelfth control example, control may be performed for varying the action content of the character in action. You can use it. Also, the controls used in the respective control examples described above may be combined. This makes it possible to diversify the free driving motions that are executed at the beginning of the character product driving production.

Furthermore, in this control example, the all-at-once action executed at the end of the role-driven effect is configured to be executed based on the operation of the frame button by the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically performed when the remaining period of time is 1 second.

In addition, in this control example, the motion timings of the respective roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are set to be the same as a simultaneous operation. It may be set so that the timing (the timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) is the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation flow of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the "button repeated hitting effect", which is the role-driven effect in this control example, will be described. do. This FIG. 212 is a timing chart showing the flow of the character object-driven effect in this control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those in the timing chart of the tenth control example (see FIG. 185) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 212, the "button repeated effect" in this control example is a free operation period in which each role (a role A720 to a role C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the beginning of the effective period. A simultaneous operation period is set in which each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) is operated all at once at the end of the effective period.

Then, at the timing when the free movement period ends (point h in FIG. 212), each character that has been freely moved (character A720 to character C460) is positioned at the retracted position (stopped state). An invalid time is set for each of (the role A720 to the role C460). Specifically, for the role object C460 whose action period is 3 seconds, an invalid period of 3 seconds, which is the same as the action period, is set (the period from point d to point h in FIG. 212), and the action period is 2 seconds. For the role product B740, an invalid period of 2 seconds, which is the same as the action period, is set (the period from point f to point h in FIG. 212). An invalid period of 1 second, which is the same as the period, is set.

In this way, different invalid periods are set for each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) in order to position each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) at the retreat position (standby position) at the point h. By setting the length of the invalid period in which all of the roles (A720 to C460) are not driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22, the operation period (3 seconds ), it can be the action period (1 second) of the character A720 with the shortest action period.

Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the invalid period is set for the role C460 (point e in FIG. 212), the role A720 and the role B740 can be driven, and the "button It is possible to enhance the production effect of "Consecutive hit production".

Then, by operating the frame button 22 during the simultaneous operation period (point h to point j in FIG. 212) in which each role object (accessory object A720 to role object C460) is located at the retreat position (standby position), each It is possible to operate the role objects (the role object A720 to the role object C460) all at once (point j in FIG. 212).

In addition, in this control example, at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous action period starts, only the control for positioning each role object (the role object A720 to the role object C460) at the retreat position (standby position) is used. However, for example, the end timings of the respective objects (object A720 to object C460) to be driven at the end of the free motion period are close (the same) to each object (object A720 to object C460). may be configured to control the operation period and operation start timing of the frame button 22, and the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period, or the period until the invalid time is set. It may be determined, and based on the result of the determination, the operation contents of each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) may be determined.

For example, set the batch stop timing as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between point d and point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (point in FIG. 212) at which the simultaneous operation period starts, and press the frame button 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the start of the simultaneous operation period or the remaining period until the invalid time is set are compared, and the normal operation contents ( operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location apart from the collective stop timing described above, the drive start time of the character is shifted, or the drive content of the character is varied (extended or shortened). By doing so, it is possible to select the operation contents of each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) in a direction that matches the collective stop timing.

<Regarding control processing in the thirteenth control example>
Next, control processing in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. FIG. In the control processing in the thirteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the tenth control example. Other processing is the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The thirteenth control example differs from the tenth control example in that the repeated button process (see FIG. 192) is changed to repeated button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

First, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeated press button process 4 (S1851) in the thirteenth control example. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those of the repeated pressing button processing (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different portions will be described.

When the repeated button process 4 (S1851 in FIG. 213) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the repeated button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192). 22 is turned on (S1908: Yes), the role product A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the role product B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the role product C operation setting process 4 (S1911) are executed. and terminate this process. For detailed descriptions of the role product A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the role product B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the role product C operation setting process 4 (S1911), refer to FIGS. will be described later.

Next, the role product A operation setting process 4 (S1909) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product A operation setting process 4 (S1909). When the role object A action setting process 4 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000", that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3731). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000" (greater than "1000"), that is, if it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3731: No), then the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is less than or equal to "2000", that is, whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3732). If the value of the continuous-hit effective timer is equal to or less than "2000" (S3732: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to continuous-hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

On the other hand, in the process of S3732, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "2000" (S3732: No), the process proceeds to S3733. Also, in the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000" (S3731: Yes), the process proceeds to S3733.

In the process of S3733, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is "0" (S3733). If the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product A 720 is operating (S3733: No), this process ends as it is. do. On the other hand, when the value of the role A operation timer 223ac is "0", that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role A 720 is not operating (S3733: Yes), the role A The value of the operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3734), after which this process is terminated and the process returns to the continuous press button process 4.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the role product B action setting process 4 (S1910) in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the contents of the accessory B action setting process 4 (S1910). Note that the same parts as those in the role product B operation setting process (see FIG. 195(a)) in the tenth control example are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and only different parts will be explained.

When the role object B action setting process 4 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive hitting valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000", that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3831). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is not "1000" or less, that is, if it is determined that the simultaneous operation period is not in effect (S3831: No), then the value of the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is "3000" or less. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3832). If the value of the continuous-hit effective timer is equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to continuous-hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

On the other hand, in the process of S3832, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: No), the process proceeds to S3833. Also, in the process of S3831, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000" (S3831: Yes), the process proceeds to S3833.

In the process of S3833, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product B action timer 223ad is "0" (S3833). If the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) while the role product B 740 is operating (S3833: No), this process ends. do. On the other hand, when the value of the role product B operation timer 223ad is "0", that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product B 740 is not operating (S3833: Yes), the role product B The value of the operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3834).

Next, the character object C operation setting process 4 (S1911) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product C action setting process 4 (S1911). Note that the same parts as those in the role product C action setting process (see FIG. 195(b)) in the tenth control example are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and only different parts will be explained.

When the role object C action setting process 4 (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive hitting valid timer 223ab is "1000" or less, that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous action period (see FIG. 212). (S3931). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is not "1000" or less, that is, if it is determined that it is not in the all-out operation period (S3931: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous-hit effective timer 223ab is "4000" or less. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not it is during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3932). If the value of the continuous-hit effective timer is equal to or less than "4000" (S3932: Yes), this process is terminated and the process returns to continuous-hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

On the other hand, in the process of S3932, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "4000" (S3932: No), the process proceeds to S3933. Also, in the process of S3931, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective timer 223ab is equal to or less than "1000" (S3931: Yes), the process proceeds to S3933.

In the process of S3933, it is determined whether or not the value of the role product C action timer 223ae is "0" (S3933). If the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is not "0", that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product C460 is operating (S3933: No), this process ends as it is. do. On the other hand, when the value of the role product C operation timer 223ae is "0", that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the role product C460 is not operating (S3933: Yes), the role product C The value of the operation timer 223ae is set to "3000" (S3934).

As described above, according to the thirteenth control example, each character (character A720 to character C460) is set with an invalid period corresponding to the operation period. By setting a different invalid period for each role product (a role A720 to a role C460) that is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22, the invalid period (all roles The invalid period set for the object) can be shortened, and the effect of enhancing the production effect of the entire character-driven production can be obtained.

Further, according to this control example, the free motion period is executed in the beginning of the performance driven performance, and the simultaneous motion can be executed in the final phase of the performance driven performance. Further, when shifting from the free action period to the simultaneous action period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the action period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on this, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the characters (character A720 to character C460) cannot be driven.

In this control example, the operation period of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) is fixed. Alternatively, as in the eleventh control example described above, control for delaying the movement timing of the character may be used, or as in the above-described twelfth control example, control may be performed for varying the action content of the character in action. You can use it. Also, the controls used in the respective control examples described above may be combined. This makes it possible to diversify the free driving motions that are executed at the beginning of the character product driving production.

Furthermore, in this control example, the all-at-once action executed at the end of the role-driven effect is configured to be executed based on the operation of the frame button by the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically performed when the remaining period of time is 1 second.

In addition, in this control example, the motion timings of the respective roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are set to be the same as a simultaneous operation. It may be set so that the timing (the timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) is the same.

In addition, in this control example, at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous action period starts, only the control for positioning each role object (the role object A720 to the role object C460) at the retreat position (standby position) is used. However, for example, the end timings of the respective objects (object A720 to object C460) to be driven at the end of the free motion period are close (the same) to each object (object A720 to object C460). The operation period and operation start timing may be controlled, and the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period or the period until the invalid time is set is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the operation contents of each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) may be determined.

For example, set the batch stop timing as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between point d and point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (point in FIG. 212) at which the simultaneous operation period starts, and press the frame button 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the start of the simultaneous operation period or the remaining period until the invalid time is set are compared, and the normal operation contents ( operation period) is stopped and displayed at a location apart from the collective stop timing described above, the drive start time of the character is shifted, or the drive content of the character is varied (extended or shortened). By doing so, it is possible to select the operation contents of each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) in a direction that matches the collective stop timing.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 225. FIG. In the 14th control example, in contrast to the 10th control example described above, the motor driver MD1 (see FIG. 219) configuring the accessory A motors 771 and 772 outputs to the stepping motor M1 (see FIG. 219). It is different in that a plurality of output signals are provided and in the addition of control to change the operation contents of the role product A720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 in the role product driving effect.

In the tenth control example described above, an action command is set for each role (the role A720 to the role C460) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the role-driven effect, and the role corresponding to the action command is set. By executing the action, the performance effect of the performance driven performance based on the operation of the frame button 22 is enhanced.

However, the rotation speed of the stepping motor (for example, M1) driven based on the set operation command is always constant (see, for example, FIG. 188), and the operation speed of the character becomes constant. Improvement of the effect was demanded.

On the other hand, in the 14th control example, the output signals output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1 are a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps). A weak output signal that rotates at a lower speed (100 pps) than that of the rotor can be output.

As a result, the operating speed of the role product A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when operating the role product A720. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, it is possible to double the amount of movement in the same period as compared to when the signal is a weak output signal. In other words, the time required to travel the same distance can be halved.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode of the role in the role-driven presentation, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). there is Specifically, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output, and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is the predetermined period. is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (within 3 seconds), the character object presentation based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and the long intervals ( Interval longer than 3 seconds), since the character production based on the strong output signal is executed, the character production is performed based on the operation content (operation interval) of the frame button 22 executed by the player. can be varied, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, in this control example, the period during which the character object operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of the output signal for driving the role product without varying the period during which the role product operates, various role product actions can be executed while reducing the control load of the role product action. can.

Furthermore, the period in which the role product operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the role object operation to be executed in the certain period. If it is within the predetermined period (within 3 seconds), if the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), the accessory action based on the weak output signal is: Since the structure is such that the accessory action based on the strong output signal is executed, for example, for the player who has operated the frame button 22 only once during the accessory drive presentation, the accessory action with a large range of motion is performed. is executed, and for the player who operates the frame button 22 multiple times during the performance of the accessory driving performance, the accessory motion with a small motion range is performed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a role product action corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In this control example, the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but other configurations may be used. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be varied based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effect. In this case, for example, a strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory-driven presentation.

As a result, the more the number of times the player operates the frame button 22, the larger the action of the accessory (increasing the speed of action and enlarging the range of action), thereby motivating the player to participate in the game. be able to.

In this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs two types of output signal (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the action of the role product A in the role product drive effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 217(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the driving range of the accessory A720 when a weak output signal is output from the motor driver MD1, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the driving range of the accessory A720 when a signal is output.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), the motion range of the role product A720 when the weak output signal is output (the motion range in the motion period of 1 second) is the maximum motion range of the role product A720 (see FIG. 183(b)). The range of motion of the role product A720 when the strong output signal is output as shown in FIG. (b)) is set to be the same range.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each role (accessory A720 to role C460) in the "button repeated hitting effect" which is the role-driven effect in the fourteenth control example. explain about This FIG. 218 is a timing chart showing the flow of the character object-driven effect in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 218, when the “button repeated effect” is started, an “effective period” during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the "effective period" ("button depression" ON), the game machine is stopped (at the standby position) in the same manner as in the tenth control example described above. An action is started for each of the certain roles (a role A720 to a role C460) (point a in FIG. 218). During the period from the start of the "button repeated effect" until the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the value of the timer (accessory A interval timer 223ca) that measures the operation interval of the frame button 22 is "0". , a strong output signal is output to the role object A720 (point a in FIG. 218).

Next, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) (point b in FIG. 218), the interval from the timing (point a in FIG. 218) at which the frame button 22 was last operated (depressed) is determined (T1= 3.6 seconds), and since the determination result exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a strong output signal is output to the role object A720 (point b in FIG. 218).

Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the “effective period” of the “button repeated effect” (point c in FIG. 218), the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time (point b in FIG. 218) ) is determined (T2=2.2 seconds), and since the determination result does not exceed a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a weak output signal is output to the role object A720 (Fig. 218 point c).

Thereafter, similarly, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) to operate the role product A720, output is made to the role product A720 based on the interval from the timing when the frame button 22 was operated (depressed) last time. The type of output signal is determined.

Next, with reference to points d to f in FIG. 218, the flow of control when the frame button 22 is operated while the role product A720 is in motion will be described. First, at point d in FIG. 218, when the frame button 22 is operated, the interval (T4=3.2 seconds) from the previous frame button operation timing exceeds a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the role product A720.

Then, when a new frame button operation is executed (point e in FIG. 218) while the role product A720 is operating based on the frame button operation (pressing) of the point d, it is based on the frame button operation. The operation of the role product A720 is not executed, and the value of the timer (the role product A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is continuously measured without being reset.

Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) in a state where the movement of the role object A720 based on the frame button operation (depression) at the point d in FIG. 218 is completed (point f in FIG. 218), the point A strong output signal is output to the role object A720 based on the interval from d (T5=4.8 seconds). That is, in this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role object A720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. The interval is configured so as not to include an operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the role product A 720 (that is, an operation of the frame button 22 during operation of the role product A).

With this configuration, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role product A720 is set based on the frame button operation interval corresponding to the interval at which the role product A720 actually operates. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided to the player.

In this control example, the operation interval of the frame button 22 is determined without including the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the role object A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during the operation of the role object A). is used, other configurations may be used. For example, operation intervals of the frame buttons 22 may be determined for operations on all the frame buttons 22 .

In addition, in this control example, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role object A720 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22. You may make it set the classification of an output signal. For example, the interval at which the role product A actually moves (the interval at which the action command is output to the role product A720) may be determined, and the type of the output signal may be set based on the determination result. Even with such a configuration, the same effects as in this control example can be obtained.

Furthermore, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role object A720 is set based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the "effective period" of the "button repeated effect". Alternatively, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role product A720 may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Also, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the role A720 may be set based on the action interval with the other role (the role B740 or the role C460).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 221. FIG. In this 14th control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from the 10th control example, and the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to The difference is that the contents of the drive motor group are explained in detail. Since other configurations are the same as those of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the drive motor group connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive motor group. Note that in FIG. 219, some of the elements of the sound ramp control device 113 that are the same as those of the tenth control example described above are omitted.

The accessory A motors 771 and 772 provided in the drive motor group in this control example have a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1. Specifically, the accessory A motor 771 includes a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1, and the accessory A motor 772 includes a motor driver MD2 (not shown) and a stepping motor M2 (not shown). It consists of

In this control example, the motors for the accessory A 771 and the motors for the accessory A 772 are different only in the direction of rotation of the motors, and are configured to be driven in response to the same operation command. 771 will be described, and a detailed description of the accessory A motor 772 will be omitted. Further, since the structures of the accessory B motors 773 and 774, the accessory C motor 441, and other motors are the same as the accessory A motor 771 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the motor driver MD1 provided for the accessory A motor 771 will be described. The motor driver MD1 controls at least the rotation direction (forward rotation/reverse rotation), rotation speed (acceleration/deceleration), and rotation amount (number of steps) of the stepping motor M1 based on the operation command output from the audio ramp control device 113. When an operation command corresponding to the contents of the operation scenario table 222ab defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the stepping motor M1 is driven corresponding to the operation scenario. It outputs electric power to the stepping motor M1 so as to execute.

In this control example, one motor driver MD1 is provided for the single stepping motor M1. may be adopted. In this case, information for identifying the type of the drive motor (stepping motor) may be included in the operation command such as the number of rotation steps and output.

The stepping motor M1 is a well-known stepping motor and its detailed description is omitted. It is a motor to be controlled, and is configured such that the higher the frequency of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1, the higher the rotational speed of the motor. The accessory A720 is operated based on the driving mode of the stepping motor M1.

As described above, in this control example, the motor driver performs a role product motion (high-speed role product motion) to operate the role product A720 at high speed and a role product motion (low-speed role product motion) to operate the role product A720 at low speed. Since it is configured to be controllable according to the type of output signal output from the MD1, for example, compared to a configuration in which the operating speed of the character is changed by switching between a high-speed rotation drive motor and a low-speed rotation drive motor. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts used for the action of the accessory, and it is possible to save the space of the device. In addition, it is possible to simplify the contents of the operation control related to the action of the role product.

Next, referring to FIGS. 220 and 221, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 220(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The ROM 222 in the fourteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the tenth control example described above in that a second operation scenario table 222ab is provided instead of the operation scenario table 222ab. Since other configurations are the same as those of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the second operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 221(a). FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second operation scenario table 222ab. The second action scenario table 222ab is provided with a role product A second scenario table 222ab4 in place of the role product A scenario table 222ab1 for the action scenario table 222ab of the tenth control example (see FIG. 187(b)). other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221(b), the role item A second scenario table 222ab4 will be described. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second role item A scenario table 222ab4. This role A second scenario table 222ab4 is a table in which an action scenario for the role A720 executed during the "button repeated effect" in this control example is set, and the action speed of the role A720 is slow (100 pps ) action scenario and action scenario in which the action speed of Accessory A720 is fast (200 pps) are set.

Specifically, the action scenario (weak action scenario) executed when the value of the role A selection value 223cb is "1" (the action type is "weak"), and the value of the role A selection value 223cb is " 2” (the action type is “strong”), and an action scenario (weak action scenario) is set.

Here, the role A selection value 223cb is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 operated during the "button repeated effect", and the operation interval of the frame button 22 is a predetermined period or more (3 Seconds or longer), "2" is set as the selection value, and in the case of less than a predetermined period (less than 3 seconds), "1" is set as the selection value. In addition, the detailed content of this role item A selection value 223cb will be described later with reference to FIG. 220(b).

The action type "weak" in the role product A second scenario table 222ab4 is the same as the action type "normal" in the role product A action scenario table 222ab1 of the tenth control example. They are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the content specified for the action type "strong" specifies information that makes the operating speed (rotational speed) of the stepping motor M1 faster than the content specified for the action type "weak".

Specifically, the action pointer value "01H" is set corresponding to the value "1000" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "01H" defines "200 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "positive direction" as the motion direction. Thereafter, the action pointer value "02H" is set corresponding to the value "500" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "200 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

Then, the action pointer value "03H" is set corresponding to the value "0" of the role product A action timer 223ac. The action pointer "03H" defines "END" information indicating the end of the action scenario.

In other words, the role product A second scenario table 222ab4 defines an action scenario in which the role product A 720 is operated for one second regardless of the action type ("weak" or "strong"). Information is defined so that the motion range of the role product A motion whose motion type is “strong” is doubled (the number of steps is doubled) with respect to the motion of the role product A 720 .

Returning to FIG. 220, the description continues. FIG. 220(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the tenth control example in that a role A interval timer 223ca and a role A selection value 223cb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The role A interval timer 223ca is set so that the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (the interval at which the role A 720 operates) in the role drive effect ("button repeated effect") is within a predetermined value (three seconds in this control example). This is a timer that is referred to when determining whether or not there is, and is a timer that is decremented every 1 millisecond after a value indicating a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example) is set. This role product A interval timer 223ca is set to a predetermined value (“3000”) after “1000” is set to the value of the role product A action timer in the role product A action setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) (S3745). is set (S3746), and in the interval timer subtraction process (S1931 in FIG. 223) of the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222), the value of the role A interval timer 223ca is subtracted until it becomes "0" ( S2362), it is referred to when selecting a role product A selection value 223cb described later in the role product A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224).

The role A selection value 223cb is referred to when selecting one action scenario from the second role A scenario table 222ab4 of the second action scenario table 222ab. This role A selection value 223cb is set to "2" when the value of the role A interval timer 223ca is determined to be "0" in the role A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224). When it is determined that the value of the object A interval timer 223ca is not "0" ("1" or more), "1" is set. Then, in the role product action process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225), the information that is referred to when reading the action scenario of the role product A720 (S2551 in FIG. 225) and is set when the action of the role product A720 ends is It is cleared (S2554 in FIG. 225).

As described above, in this control example, the value of the role A selection value 223cb is set based on the value of the role A interval timer 223ca, and the role A selection value is set based on the value of the set role A selection value. A strong motion scenario or a weak motion scenario is set as the motion scenario of the object A720. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the operation contents of the role product A720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 (operation interval of the role product A720).

<Regarding control processing in the fourteenth control example>
Next, control processing in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. FIG. In the control processing in the fourteenth control example, the contents of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the tenth control example. Other processing is the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourteenth control example, the repeated hit button processing (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to repeated hit button processing 5 (see FIG. 222), and the role product motion processing (see FIG. 196) The difference is that it is changed to operation processing 2 (see FIG. 225).

First, the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing the details of the repeated button process 5 (S1851). When the repeated button process 5 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the repeated button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192). Interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is executed. This interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is a process of subtracting the value set in the above-described role product A interval timer 223ca, and detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1931 is completed, the processing of S1908 to S1911 is then executed in the same manner as the repeated press button processing of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 223, the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) executed in the repeated button process 5 (S1851 in FIG. 222) will be described. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the contents of the interval timer subtraction process (S1931). This interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is provided in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, and the processing interval is set to 1 millisecond. That is, every time this process is executed, the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is subtracted by "1" corresponding to 1 millisecond.

When the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the Accessory A interval timer 223ca is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2361). In the process of S2361, if it is determined to be greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2361: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the role object A interval timer 223ca (S2362), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the role object A interval timer 223ca is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S2361: No), the processing of S2362 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the role product A action setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product A action setting process 5 (S1909). In this role A operation setting process 5 (S1909), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the action contents of the role A720 are set, and the operation (press) interval of the frame button 22 (the role A720 ) is within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), a process of setting a predetermined value ("3000") to the role object A interval timer 223ca referred to is performed.

When the role product A action setting process 5 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is "0" and is not "0" ("1" or more). If it is (S3741: No), since the role product A720 is in operation, this process ends without setting a new operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3741: Yes), the role product A720 has finished its operation and is in the retracted position (operation possible state), then it is determined whether the value of the role product A interval timer 223ca is "0" (S3742). In the processing of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the role A interval timer 223ca is "0" (S3742: Yes), a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the previous frame button operation (the role A operation). Since it has passed, the role product A selection value 223cb is set to "2" (S3744), and the process proceeds to S3745.

In the process of S3742, if it is determined that the value of the role A interval timer 223ca is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S3742: No), the previous frame button operation (the role A operation) Since the predetermined period (three seconds) has not passed since (because the interval is short), the role A selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S3743), and the process proceeds to S3745.

Then, in the process of S3745, the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3745), next, the value of the role product A interval timer 223ca is set to "3000" (S3746), and this End the process.

In the above-described role product A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224), when setting the operation content of the role product A720, whether the interval from the previous frame button operation (the role product A operation) is within a predetermined value Whether or not is determined by referring to the value of the role product A interval timer 223ca, and based on the determination result, the action contents (strong action, weak action) of the role product A720 this time are set. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the action of the role product (the role product A720) corresponding to the operation of the frame button by the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a variety of role product actions.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, role product action processing 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the contents of the role product action process 3 (S1561). When the role product action process 3 (S1561) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the role product A action timer 223ac is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S2511). is also large (“1” or more) (S2511: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the role item selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551).

In the process of S2551, if it is determined that the role selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S2551: Yes), the action content corresponding to the action type "weak" of the role A second scenario table 222ab4 is read out (S2552), and the process proceeds to S2516.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, if it is determined that the printed item selection value 223cb is not set to "1" (set to "2") (S2551: No), the role item A second scenario table The action content corresponding to the action type "strong" of 222ab4 is read out (S2553), and the process proceeds to S2516. Further, in the process of S2511, when it is determined that the value of the role product A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2511: No), next, the role product selection value 223cb is cleared (reset) (S2554). , S2516.

When the process proceeds to S2516, the processes from S2516 to S2520 are executed in the same manner as the accessory action process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 196), and this process ends.

As described above, according to the 14th control example, the output signals output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1 are a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and A weak output signal for rotating at a low speed (100 pps) rather than a high speed (200 pps) can be output.

As a result, the operating speed of the role product A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when operating the role product A720. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, it is possible to double the amount of movement in the same period as compared to when the signal is a weak output signal. In other words, the time required to travel the same distance can be halved.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode of the role in the role-driven presentation, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). there is Specifically, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), a weak output signal is output, and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is the predetermined period. is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times at short intervals (within 3 seconds), the character object presentation based on the weak output signal is executed a plurality of times, and the long intervals ( Interval longer than 3 seconds), since the character production based on the strong output signal is executed, the character production is performed based on the operation content (operation interval) of the frame button 22 executed by the player. can be varied, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, in this control example, the period during which the character object operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of the output signal for driving the role product without varying the period during which the role product operates, various role product actions can be executed while reducing the control load of the role product action. can.

Furthermore, the period in which the role product operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a certain period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the role object operation to be executed in the certain period. If it is within the predetermined period (within 3 seconds), if the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), the accessory action based on the weak output signal is: Since the structure is such that the accessory action based on the strong output signal is executed, for example, for the player who has operated the frame button 22 only once during the accessory drive presentation, the accessory action with a large range of motion is performed. is executed, and for the player who operates the frame button 22 multiple times during the performance of the accessory driving performance, the accessory motion with a small motion range is performed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a role product action corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In this control example, the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but other configurations may be used. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be varied based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effect. In this case, for example, a strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory-driven presentation.

As a result, the more the number of times the player operates the frame button 22, the larger the action of the accessory (increasing the speed of action and enlarging the range of action), thereby motivating the player to participate in the game. be able to.

In this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs two types of output signal (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to simplify the role product operation control, a configuration is used in which a fixed role product operation period is always set regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1. It may be configured such that the character product operation period is varied according to the type of the output signal output by the driver MD1. For example, when a strong output signal (200 pps) is output, the character product operation period is set to 0. If it is set to 5 seconds and a weak output signal (100 pps) is output, it is preferable to set the role object operation period to 1 second. As a result, regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1, the operating range of the role is made constant, and the operating period of the role is variable (the role operating period of the strong output signal becomes the role operating period of the weak output signal). can be shortened to half), and the production effect can be enhanced.

When the configuration described above is used in this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs a strong output signal when the operation interval of the frame button 22 is short, and the motor driver MD1 outputs a weak output signal when the operation interval is long. It should be configured to

As described above, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example, various control processes for the character (character A720 to character C460) that are operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player have been described. , a part or all of the configuration of each control example may be combined. For example, in a configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable processing of the thirteenth control example, the frame Contents to be executed based on the player's operation content (operation timing, number of operations, operation interval, etc.) for the button 22 and the game state (result of judging whether special symbols or normal symbols are correct, probability variation state, presence or absence of time saving state, etc.) should be configured to be different. This makes it possible to execute more diverse effects.

Further, in a configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable processing of the thirteenth control example, The content to be played may be configured so that the player can select it.

In addition, in each control example described above, a configuration is used in which each role provided in the pachinko machine 10 (the role A720 to the role C460) is operated based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Any configuration can be used as long as the effect mode is variable based on the player's operation. For example, the player operates a predetermined operation means (frame button 22, etc.) to output the voice mode from the voice output device 226. , a variable sound effect, a light emission effect that changes the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227, and a display effect that changes the display mode displayed on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81. A configuration in which each aspect is combined may be employed.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the configuration of the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, but other configurations may be used. A sensor device that detects and reacts, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, or a lever device that can be operated by the player in the forward/backward/leftward/rightward direction may be used. Also, the number of means for the player to operate is not limited to one, and a plurality of operation means may be provided. In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the performance by adopting a configuration in which the performance mode is changed when a plurality of operating means are operated.

In addition, as a configuration having the same effects as those of the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above, the action status (whether it is in action or not, the remaining period of operation) of each character (character A720 to character C460) is determined. Possible role product action status determination means and storage means for storing the determination result are provided, and the action of a predetermined role product (any role product among each role product (accessory A720 to role C460)) is executed. When doing so, a configuration may be used in which the action pattern of the character is set based on the driving status of other character.

Taking as an example the control of each role (the role A720 to the role C460) using this configuration in the tenth control example, when the role A720 is operated, the other roles (the role B740 and It is preferable to determine whether or not the role product C460) is in motion, and set the action of the role product A720 to the shortened motion pattern when it is determined that the other role product is in motion. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which all of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are operating.

In addition, when the other character is in action, the remaining operation period of the character in action is determined, and the action period of the character in action is shorter than the action period of the shortened action pattern of the character to be executed this time. It is preferable to set the shortened operation pattern only when the remaining operation period is long.

Furthermore, it is preferable to set priorities for a plurality of role objects, and determine a role object whose action pattern is to be varied based on the priority order in a state in which the plurality of role objects can be driven at the same time. In this case, for example, priority may be set for a plurality of accessories in association with production patterns executed by the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, the display effect and the action of the character product executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without discomfort.

Also, as a method of setting priorities for a plurality of roles, other methods may be used. The order of priority may be set based on the arrangement of objects (front and rear positions), or the order of priority may be set based on the driving speeds set for a plurality of accessories.

Furthermore, taking as an example the control for each role (the role A720 to the role C460) used in the eleventh control example, when at least two or more of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are operated at the same time In addition, it is preferable to delay the operation of the character whose operation period is set to be long (the character C460 if the character A720 and the character C460 operate at the same time). As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which a plurality of characters that are operated at the same time are operating together. Further, the same control as the control for each role product (the role product A720 to the role product C460) in the tenth control example described above may be executed, or the respective controls may be combined.

Furthermore, taking as an example the control for each role (the role A720 to the role C460) used in the twelfth control example, when at least two or more of the roles (the role A720 to the role C460) are operated at the same time In addition, it is preferable to set the repetitive action to be performed only for the character whose action period until returning to the standby position is short when the repetitive action is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of repetitive motions. Further, the same control as the control for each role (the role A720 to the role C460) in the tenth control example and the eleventh control example described above may be executed. May be combined.

In addition, in the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of roles operate simultaneously based on the operation of the frame button 22, but each role (a role A720 to a role C460) Different conditions may be set for each operation. For example, the role A 720 is operated each time the frame button 22 is operated (the operating condition is one button operation), and the role B 740 is set to the frame It may be set to operate when the button 22 is operated twice (the operation condition is two button operations), and the role item C460 may be set to operate when the frame button 22 is operated five times. By setting in this way, it is possible to execute various role product actions based on the operation content of the frame button 22 .

Furthermore, the following configuration may be used as a configuration having the same effects as those of the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above.

<Modified example for determining the order of priority of characters to be shortened/delayed according to the type of continuous hit effect>
A main movable accessory may be determined corresponding to the type of continuous hit effect, and the action of the main movable accessory may not be shortened or delayed. That is, it may be constructed so as to shorten or delay the action of other than the main movable accessory. As a result, the action of the main character in the effect being executed (or to be executed) is not shortened or delayed. can be delayed.

Specifically, as types of repeated hit effects, "repeat effect A" in which role A is specified as the main movable role, "repeat effect B" in which role B is specified as the main movable role, and role C is provided as a main movable accessory. Then, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, the continuous hitting performance A is configured to be easily selected, and when the success/failure determination result is a failure, the continuous hitting performance C is configured to be easily selected. As a result, by displaying a continuous hit effect in which the main movable accessory is the accessory A, it is possible to suggest that the player is highly likely to win a big win, and the player's interest can be improved.

In each successive hitting effect, the role objects A to C are moved in a predetermined order each time the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the button pressing valid period. For example, in the continuous hit effect A, when the frame button 22 is pressed five times, first, the main movable accessory A is started to move. Then, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory B is started. After that, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the movement of the accessory C is started. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in a short period of time, all of the characters A to C are in a movable state.

As described above, in each repeated hitting effect in the present modification, in order to determine which of the main movable accessories A to C is the main movable accessory, it is necessary to execute the repeated hitting operation in the repeated hitting effect. can be executed enthusiastically, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<Fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 236. FIG. In the fifteenth control example, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the above-described first control example, and the solenoids 209 controlled by the main controller 110 (general power solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow The difference is that the control contents of the path solenoid 65k) are changed and the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation control of the solenoid that drives various electric accessories, the solenoid is moved and held based on a constant output. In this type of solenoid operation control, the power required to activate (attract) the solenoid is used to maintain the state of the solenoid. , there is a risk of excessive heat generation.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, electric power can be supplied according to the state (attraction state, holding state) to the solenoid for driving various electric accessories. This makes it possible to reduce the power used to hold the solenoid. In addition, it is possible to prevent the solenoid from generating excessive heat by reducing the excessive power consumption.

First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same components as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226, in this control example, the first winning port 64 is provided in the lower region of the game board 13 (below the third symbol display device 81), and the second winning port 640 and the second winning port are provided on the lower right side thereof. A motorized accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640 is provided. This electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined pattern when the result of the winning lottery (normal lottery) for the second symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is a win. This electric accessory 640a is driven by a general electric solenoid 209d.

In addition, in the same location as in the first embodiment described above, that is, in the downstream side of the area (so-called right-handed area) through which game balls shot to the game board 13 pass over the center frame 86, A variable winning device 65 is provided. Since this variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 49 to 51) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. is driven by the opening solenoid 65f2, and the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is driven by the channel solenoid 65k.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with the general power solenoid 209d, the opening solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k as solenoids for which the main controller 110 performs drive control. A control signal corresponding to the game state is output to the solenoid.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 231. FIG. In the fifteenth control example, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from those of the first control example, and the input/output port 205 and the solenoid 209 of the main controller 110 are connected to the solenoid drive circuit. The difference is that they are connected via 1200. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 227, in this control example, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 .

Solenoid driving circuit 1200 controls various solenoids 209 (general power solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, and flow path solenoid 65k). A detailed description of solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be given later with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG.

Next, referring to FIGS. 228 and 229, a controller for switching on/off of various solenoids 209 (universal power solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) based on instructions from MPU 201 of main controller 110. An electrical configuration will be described.

228 shows an input/output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the input/output port 205, and a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the solenoid drive circuit 1200. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various solenoids 209 (a solenoid for general electric power 209d, an opening solenoid 65f2, and a flow path solenoid 65k).

As shown in FIG. 228, various solenoids 209 (universal solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) are connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 via the solenoid drive circuit 1200. As shown in FIG. The input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 227), and by switching the output signal of the MPU 201, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 can be driven to switch the various solenoids 209 on and off.

Specifically, the input/output port 205 is connected to a solenoid drive IC 1201 provided in a solenoid drive circuit 1200 . Here, the solenoid driving IC 1201 is an IC capable of outputting the signal input to the input port from the output port at the rise of the clock and then holding the output of the output port until the clear signal is input. be.

The solenoid driving IC 1201 has input terminals (ports) D1 to D6, output terminals (ports) Q1 to Q6, a clock input terminal CK, a clear signal input terminal CLR, a power input terminal Vcc, and a ground terminal GND.

By applying a voltage of 2 to 6 V between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the solenoid driving IC 1201 becomes operable. In this control example, a voltage of 5 V is applied between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND by connecting (grounding) a power supply of 5 V to the power input terminal Vcc and connecting (grounding) GND to the ground terminal GND. It consists of A capacitor C1 having a capacitance of 10 μF is provided on the circuit between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. This capacitor C1 can remove noise from an external power supply to the solenoid driving IC 1201, and can suppress (prevent) destruction and malfunction of the solenoid driving IC 1201. FIG. Naturally, the capacitance of the capacitor C1 may be changed as appropriate.

By controlling the input signals to the clock input terminal CK and the clear signal input terminal CLR in a state where 5 V is applied between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the Signals can be output from output ports Q1-Q6. Specifically, a rectangular wave (clock signal) with a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, and an ON signal (5 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR. In this case, the signals input to the input ports D1-D6 are output to the output ports Q1-Q6 at the rise of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. Since the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, the input signals to the input ports D1 to D6 are referenced once every 0.1 ms, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated. will be In this control example, the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is set to 10 kHz, but the frequency is not limited to this, and may be set to 5 kHz or 20 kHz. Further, instead of inputting a periodic clock to the clock input terminal CK, a signal may be input to the clock input terminal CK only at the timing of updating the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6.

On the other hand, even if a clock signal with a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, if an OFF signal (0 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 Each output signal of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is OFF (0 V) regardless of. Therefore, by inputting an OFF signal (0 V) to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be brought into a non-operating state and the various solenoids 209 can be stopped from operating.

A positive terminal of a capacitor C2 is connected in the middle of a signal line connecting the input/output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and a negative terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected (grounded) to GND. The capacitor C2 can reduce noise mixed in the signal line connecting the input/output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and suppress (prevent) the solenoid driving IC 1201 from operating erroneously.

The input ports D1 to D6 are ports to which signals are input from the input/output port 205, and either an OFF signal (0V) or an ON signal (5V) is input. Signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are transmitted as serial data from the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to the input/output port 225 via the bus line 224, serial-parallel converted at the input/output port 225, and transmitted. A signal is input to each of the input ports D1 to D6 based on the received serial data.

As described above, when the solenoid driving IC 1201 is in an operating state, the output port Q1 is driven based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. .about.Q6 output signals are updated.

The input port D1 corresponds to the output port Q1, the input port D2 corresponds to the output port Q2, the input port D3 corresponds to the output port Q3, the input port D4 corresponds to the output port Q4, and the input port D5 corresponds to the output port. Q5 corresponds, and the output port Q6 corresponds to the input port D6. If the signal input to the input port is an OFF signal (0V), the signal output from the corresponding output port is an OFF signal (0V), and the signal input to the input port is an ON signal (5V). If there is, the signal output from the corresponding output port is an ON signal (5V).

Output ports Q1-Q6 change their outputs based on the input signals input to input ports D1-D6, as described above. At the rise timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6, and input to the clock input terminal CK. The updated output signal is held at the fall timing of the current clock signal. In other words, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are held until the rising timing of the next clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK.

Here, the general voltage solenoid drive circuit 1202 connected to the output ports Q1 and Q2 and the general voltage solenoid 209d driven by the general voltage solenoid drive circuit 1202 will be described.

The output ports Q1 and Q2 are connected to the gate terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2 of the general solenoid drive circuit 1202, respectively. Here, FET1-1 and FET1-2 are composed of n-channel FETs (Field Effect Transistors). A state in which a current flows (conducting state) is established. On the other hand, when no voltage is applied to the gate terminal, the current does not flow from the drain terminal to the source terminal (non-conducting state).

The drain terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2 are connected to one terminal of a solenoid 209d for general electricity, and the other terminal of the solenoid 209d for general electricity is connected to a 5V power source. GND is connected (grounded) to the source terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2. Therefore, when FET1-1 or FET1-2 becomes conductive, a current flows from the 5V power supply connected through the ordinary solenoid 209d to GND, and the electric current flows through the ordinary solenoid 209d. It will be. As a result, the general electric solenoid 209d is turned on, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is moved.

The FET1-1 becomes conductive because the ON signal is input from the input/output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the output of the output port Q1 is at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when it becomes ON. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input/output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid drive IC 1201, the general power solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET1-1.

The FET 1-2 becomes conductive when an ON signal is input from the input/output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when the output is turned ON. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input/output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid drive IC 1201, the general power solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET1-2.

Here, the drain terminal of FET1-1 is directly connected to the general voltage solenoid 209d, whereas the drain terminal of FET1-2 is connected to the general voltage solenoid 209d via the resistor R1. That is, the resistor R1 is connected in series between the drain terminal of the FET1-2 and the general power solenoid 209d. The resistance value of the resistor R1 is 10 ohms, which is the same as the resistance value of the ordinary solenoid. Therefore, when a current flows through the ordinary solenoid 209d by changing the FET1-1 to the conductive state, a voltage of 5V is applied to the ordinary solenoid 209d. On the other hand, when the FET1-2 is changed to the conducting state and current flows through the general power solenoid 209d, the same voltage (2.5 V) is applied to the resistor R1 and the general power solenoid 209d. become.

As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in driving force between when the FET1-1 is used to drive the general electric solenoid 209d and when the FET1-2 is used to drive the general electric solenoid 209d. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. It is configured to change the driving force of the solenoid 209d for the general electric in the case of holding the variable ordinary electric accessory 640a in the open state, which does not cause any problem even if the driving force of the solenoid 209d for the general electric is weak. As a result, the driving force of the general electric solenoid 209d can be minimized, so that the electric power required to drive the general electric solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

A freewheeling diode D1 is provided in parallel with the general power solenoid 209d. The freewheeling diode D1 has a cathode terminal connected to a terminal connected to the power supply side of the general power solenoid 209d, and an anode terminal connected to the ground side of the general power solenoid 209d (connected to FET1-1 or FET1-2). connected). Therefore, current does not flow from the power supply side to the ground side of the general electric solenoid 209d, but current flows from the ground side to the power supply side. As a result, when FET1-1 or FET1-2 is turned off, the current generated by the back electromotive force of the common solenoid 209d is consumed by the common solenoid 209d through the reflux diode D1. It is possible to suppress (prevent) the FET1-1 and FET1-2 from being destroyed by the back electromotive force of 209d.

A switching element such as an FET may be used in place of the freewheeling diode D1 so that the switching element is rendered conductive when a back electromotive force is generated in the common solenoid 209d. Alternatively, the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d may be stored in a capacitor or the like. Power consumption can be reduced by using the stored energy of the capacitor to operate the next solenoid 209d or to drive other solenoids and motors. If a capacitor with a low voltage is used with respect to the back electromotive force of the solenoid 209d, the energy of the solenoid 209d is immediately stored in the solenoid 209d, so the energy of the solenoid 209d can be immediately reduced, and the response performance of the solenoid 209d ( off-operation speed) can be increased.

In this manner, input signals are input from the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to the input ports D1 and D2 of the solenoid drive IC 1201, and the general electrical solenoid drive circuit 1202 is driven, so that the general electrical solenoid 209d is connected to the input port. It is driven by two types of driving force according to the . As a result, when the normal electric accessory 640a that needs to be strengthened in the driving force of the solenoid 209d for general electric power is changed to the open state, and even if the driving force of the solenoid 209d for general electric power is weaker than that, there is no problem. Since the driving force of the general electric solenoid 209d can be changed and the driving force of the general electric solenoid 209d can be suppressed to the necessary minimum, Electric power required to drive the solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is a circuit driven by the output ports Q3 and Q4 updated based on the signals input to the input ports D3 and D4 of the solenoid drive IC 1201 . By driving the open solenoid drive circuit 1203, the open solenoid 65f2 is driven. The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general power solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the open solenoid 65f2 with two types of drive forces. The detailed contents are the same as those of the general electric solenoid drive circuit 1202, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A channel solenoid drive circuit 1204 is a circuit driven by output ports Q5 and Q6 updated based on signals input to input ports D5 and D6 of the solenoid drive IC 1201 . By driving the channel solenoid drive circuit 1204, the channel solenoid 65k is driven. The channel solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general power solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the channel solenoid 65k with two types of driving force. The detailed contents are the same as those of the general electric solenoid drive circuit 1202, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the relationship between input and output signals in the solenoid drive IC 1201 and the operation of the common solenoid 209d with respect to the output signal of the solenoid drive IC will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In this control example, when the general electric solenoid 209d is varied, the general electric A difference is provided in the driving force for driving the solenoid 209d. Specifically, less energy is required to maintain the electric accessory 640a in the open state than to change the electric accessory 640a from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the power consumption is reduced by driving the electric accessory 640a with a large driving force (strong operation) during the suction period and driving the electric accessory 640a with a small driving force (weak operation) during the subsequent holding period. is decreasing.

First, when the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is OFF (0 V) immediately after the power is turned on, even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, the input port D1, The output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are not updated based on the input signal to D2, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are both turned OFF (0 V). As a result, by keeping the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR OFF (0 V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK due to the influence of noise or the like, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 will remain unchanged. is not turned ON (5V), it is possible to prevent (suppress) malfunction of the general power solenoid 209d.

After that, by turning ON (5 V) the input signal of the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals of the input ports D1 and D2. becomes.

In this case, when the signal of the clock input terminal CK rises from OFF (0V) to ON (5V), the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals to the input ports D1 and D2. When driving the common solenoid 209d, that is, when opening the electric accessory 640a, first, the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V). When the input signal of the input port D1 turns ON (5V), the output signal of the output port Q1 is updated to ON (5V) at the rise timing of the clock signal to the clock input terminal CK.

When the output signal of the output port Q1 turns ON (5V), the FET1-1 (see FIG. 228) is driven, and the common solenoid 209d is driven in strong operation (2.5W) by applying 5V. . Since the input signal of the input port D1 is kept ON (5V) for 80ms, the common solenoid 209d is driven in strong operation (2.5W) for 80ms. This 80 ms period is called a suction period, during which the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state.

Since the input signal to the input port D2 remains OFF (0 V) during the suction period, the output signal of the output port Q2 also remains OFF (0 V), and the FET1-2 (see FIG. 228) is not driven.

When the suction period of 80 ms ends, the normal solenoid 209d is shifted to the holding period of 320 ms in the open state. When shifting to the holding period, first, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF (0 V). Then, after a predetermined period of time (after 2 ms in this control example), the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D2 is turned ON (5V), the FET1-2 is driven and the common solenoid 209d is driven. As described above with reference to FIG. 228, when FET1-2 is used to drive the common solenoid 209d, the voltage applied to the common solenoid 209d is low because the resistor R1 is provided on the circuit. (2.5V), and the current flowing through the common solenoid 209d decreases (0.25A). Therefore, the driving force of the common solenoid 209d is reduced (0.625 W), and the power consumed by the common solenoid 209d is also reduced. As a result, power consumption can be reduced by minimizing the driving force of the common solenoid 209d during the holding period.

The predetermined period (2 ms) from when the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF to when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON is sufficiently short. It is never changed to the closed state. Further, the frequency of the input signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, and the input signal to the input port can be referenced at intervals of 0.1 ms and reflected to the output of the output port. The output of the output port Q2 can be turned ON after a predetermined period (2 ms) has elapsed after the input signal to D1 has turned OFF (that is, after the output of the output port Q1 has turned OFF).

In this control example, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF and then the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the input signal to the input port D1 may be turned off and the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on at the same time, or the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on before the input signal to the input port D1 is turned on. may be turned off. When the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON and then the input signal to the input port D1 is turned OFF, when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned ON, FET1-1 and FET1-2 are simultaneously turned on. It will be driven. In this case, the voltage applied to the common solenoid 209d is lower than the voltage (5 V) when only FET1-1 is driven, and the voltage (2.5 V) when only FET1-2 is driven. higher than Therefore, when the FET1-1 is driven and a high voltage is applied to the ordinary solenoid 209d to a state where the FET1-2 is driven and a low voltage is applied to the ordinary solenoid 209d, the FET1 -1 and FET1-2 are simultaneously driven, the voltage applied to the common solenoid 209d can be smoothly lowered. As a method of varying the voltage applied to the common solenoid 209d, a method of switching the FET and varying the period of the switching operation to vary the applied voltage, that is, PWM control may be employed. Naturally good.

Further, in this control example, a periodic clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, and the output signal of the output port is updated at the rising period of the clock signal, but the present invention is not limited to this. . The output signal of the output port may be updated by inputting a pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK when the input signal to the input port is varied. In this case, the input signal to the input port is varied, and then the input signal to the input port is monitored to check whether it is the specified input signal before inputting the pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK. By doing so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) various solenoids from malfunctioning due to unintended output signals from the output port.

When the holding period of 320 ms elapses, the input signal to the input port D2 is changed to OFF (0 V) to stop driving the FET1-2, thereby changing the common solenoid 209d from the open state to the closed state. , to end the opening operation of the electric accessary for a total of 0.4 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the operation flow of the general electric (electric accessories) in this control example will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart showing the operation flow of the game state (time saving state and normal state) and general electric (electric accessory) 640a.

In this control example, as the opening operation of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a, a short opening that opens the general electric (electric accessory) 640a for 0.08 seconds in one operation and a long opening that opens it for 0.4 seconds is provided, and if the game state is a time saving state, long opening is set, and if it is a normal state, short opening is set.

In the long opening during the time saving, the signal output to the general electric solenoid 209d is set based on the operation interval of the general electric (electric role) 640a. If the operation interval of the object) 640a is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds), a strong output signal for strongly operating the general electric solenoid 209d is output during the open period (400 milliseconds) (point a in FIG. 230). point b), if the operation interval of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) (see point a and point b in FIG. 230), general electric (electric accessory) 640a During the period (suction period) to open (80 milliseconds), a strong output signal is output (see points c and d in FIG. 230), and then a weak output signal is output to open the general electric (electric accessory) 640a It is output during the holding period (320 milliseconds) that holds the state (see point d and point e in FIG. 230).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the electric power required to maintain the open state when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a operates frequently. In this control example, as the open state of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (game state in which long opening is executed, that is, whether it is during time saving) and the operation interval is determined, and based on the determination result, the type of the signal output to the general electric solenoid 209d is switched, but other configurations may be used. When it is determined that the game state in which the electricity (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the general electricity (electric accessory) 640a per unit time The type of signal to be output may be switched based on the open period.

Furthermore, a thermistor capable of detecting the temperature of the common solenoid 209d may be provided, and the type of signal to be output may be switched when the temperature of the common solenoid 209d exceeds a predetermined temperature (eg, 60 degrees).

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the contents of RAM 203 in main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example. Compared to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example has a low output standby timer 203da, a standby completion flag 203db, a low output timer 203dc, a high output timer 203dd, and a normal power interval timer 203de. The difference is that they are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The weak output standby timer 203da is a timer for counting the period until a weak output signal is output to the universal electrical solenoid 209d when the universal electrical (electric accessory) 640a performs the opening operation. The value set in the timer (for example, "40") is subtracted every 2 milliseconds, and when the timer value becomes "0", a weak output signal is output to the general electric solenoid 209d. It is This low output standby timer 203da is determined to be in the time reduction mode (S711: Yes) in the normal electric operation setting process (see S654 in FIG. 235), and then the value of the normal electric interval timer 203de is not "0". (S712: No), the value of "40" is set, and the timer value becomes "0" each time the general electric timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed. 1 is subtracted (S852 in FIG. 237).

Then, in the normal electric timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237), when it is determined that the value of the low output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON. .

The standby completion flag 203db indicates a state in which a weak output signal is output to the general electrical solenoid 209d when the general electrical (electric accessory) 640a performs the opening operation, and the value of the low output standby timer 203da is set to "0". This standby completion flag 203db is set to ON ( S854), referred to when determining whether or not to output a weak output signal in the general power switching process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813), and determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" If so (S816: Yes), it is set to off (S820).

The weak output timer 203dc is a timer that counts the period of outputting the weak output signal to the general electric solenoid 209d. 2 milliseconds). The weak output signal is output until the value of the weak output timer 203dc becomes "0".

The weak output timer 203dc is set to a value of "160" when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes) in the normal power switching process (S263 in FIG. 236). (S814), every time the normal electric timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S856 in FIG. 237).

The strong output timer 203dd is a timer that counts the period of outputting a strong output signal to the general electric solenoid 209d. 2 milliseconds). The strong output signal is output until the value of the strong output timer 203dd becomes "0".

This strong output timer 203dd is set to a value of "200" when the value of the normal electric interval timer 203de is determined to be "0" in the normal electric operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235) (S712: Yes). (S716), and when it is determined that the value of the electric power interval timer 203de is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S712: No), a value of "40" is set (S714). .

Then, every time the general electric timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S858 in FIG. 237), and the general electric switching process is performed. In (S263 of FIG. 236), when it is determined that the value of the high output timer 203dd is "0" (S811: Yes), the output of the high output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812). ).

The general electric interval timer 203de is a timer for counting the interval of execution of the opening operation of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a. 209d is referred to when setting the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) and the output period.

In the general electric interval timer 203de, in the general electric switching process (S263 in FIG. 236), after the normal symbol is set to the standby state (S818), the value of "200" is set (S819), and the general electric timer subtraction process is performed. Each time (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes "0" (S860 in FIG. 237).

Then, in the general electric operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235), it is referred to when determining the type and output period of the output signal to be output to the general electric solenoid 209d (S712).

<Regarding control processing in the fifteenth control example>
Next, control processing in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236. FIG. In the control processing in the fifteenth control example, the contents of the main controller are changed from those in the first control example. Other processing is the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fifteenth control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol control process (see S155 in FIG. 232) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 63) in the timer interrupt process. do. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main controller 110MPU201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing in the fifteenth control example. The same parts as those of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different parts are described.

When the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 232) is executed, the processing of S101 to S105 is executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and then the normal symbol control processing ( S155) is executed. This normal symbol control process (S155) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Then, when the normal symbol control process (S155) is finished, the processes of S107 to S109 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and this process is finished.

Next, the normal symbol control process (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol control process (S155). This normal design control process (S155) is opened when the normal design variation process 2 (S262) for executing the normal design (second design) variation and the lottery result of the normal design (second design) wins. General electrical opening and closing processing (S263) for performing opening and closing processing of the electric accessory (general electrical) 640a, and various timers set when executing the general electrical opening and closing processing (weak output standby timer 203da, weak output timer 203dc, strong output A general electric timer subtraction process (S264) for subtracting the timer 203dd) is executed.

When the normal symbol control process (S155) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently winning (S261). If it is determined in the process of S261 that the game is not in the process of winning (in process of fluctuation or in standby) (S261: No), then normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S262) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is in progress in the process of S261 (S261: Yes), then the normal electric switching process (S263) is executed, then the normal electric timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, and this End the process.

Here, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) is different from the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above in that the normal symbol variation time is changed, ) 640a is different in that a general electric operation setting process (S625) for setting the operation contents of 640a is provided. The same parts as those of the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the above-described first control example are given the same reference numerals, the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

When the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262 of FIG. 234) is executed, the processes of S602 to S611 are performed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 of FIG. 68). In the process of S608, when it is determined that it is in the process of reducing working hours (S608: Yes), after executing the process of S610, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds (S652), and the process proceeds to S612. Then, the processes of S612, S613, and S618 are executed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 68) of the first control example described above, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S608, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S608: No), after executing the processing of S611, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds (S653), and the processing of S612 is performed. Go to processing.

In addition, in the processing of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is fluctuating (S602: Yes), S622 to S624 in the same manner as the normal symbol variation processing of the first control example (see S106 in FIG. 68) is executed, and then the normal electric operation setting process (S654) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the general electric operation setting process (S654) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal electric operation setting process (S654). In the normal electric operation setting process (S654), a process of setting an output solenoid signal to be output to the normal electric solenoid 209d based on the game state (whether or not it is during the time saving) and the operation interval of the general electric power is executed.

When the normal electric operation setting process (S654) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is in the time saving (S711), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving (S711: Yes), then the normal It is determined whether the value of the electric interval timer 203de is "0" (S712), and if it is determined that the value of the electric interval timer 203de is not "0" (is greater than or equal to "1") (S712: No), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is set to "40" (S713), and the process proceeds to S714. On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S711: No), the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, the value of the high output timer 203dd is set to "40" (S714), then a high output solenoid signal is output (set to ON) (S715), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is determined that the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is "0" (S712: Yes), the value of the high output timer 203dd is set to "200" (S716), and S715. to process.

Next, the general electric switching process (S263) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general power switching process (S263). When the normal power switching process (S263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the high output timer 203dd is "0" (S811), and it is determined that the value of the high output timer 203dd is "0". If so (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812), and the process proceeds to S813. On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that the value of the high output timer 203dd is not "0" ("1" or more) (S811: No), the process of S812 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S813. .

In the processing of S813, it is determined whether or not the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S813: No), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S813 that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes), then the value of the weak output timer 203dc is set to "160" (S814), The weak output solenoid is output (set to ON) (S815).

After completing the process of S815, it is next determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" (S816). : Yes), then stop the output of the weak output solenoid signal (set it to OFF) (S817), set the normal pattern to the standby state (S818), and set the value of the normal electric interval timer 203de to "200" (S819), the standby completion flag 203db is set to off (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S816 that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not "0" (S816: No), the processes of S814 to S816 are skipped and this process ends.

FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal electric timer subtraction process (S264) executed in the normal symbol control process (S155 in FIG. 233). In this normal electric timer subtraction process (S264), the subtraction process of various timers set when executing the normal symbol control process is executed.

When the normal electric timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the low output standby timer 203da is greater than "0" (S851). In the process of S851, if it is determined that the value of the low output standby timer 203da is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S851: Yes), the value of the low output standby timer 203da is subtracted by 1 (S852 ), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the weak output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853). In the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the low output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S854), and the process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not "0" ("1" or more) (S853: No), the process of S854 is skipped and the process proceeds to S855. Transition. If it is determined in the process of S851 that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not greater than "0" (it is "0"), the process proceeds directly to S855.

In the process of S855, it is determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is greater than "0" (S855). In the process of S855, if it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S855: Yes), then the value of the weak output timer 203dc is subtracted by 1 ( S856), the process proceeds to S857. On the other hand, in the process of S855, if it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process of S857 is performed. Move to

In the process of S857, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is greater than "0" (S857). In the process of S857, if it is determined that the value of the high output timer 203dd is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S857: Yes), then the value of the high output timer 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S858 ), and the process proceeds to S859. On the other hand, in the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the high output timer 203dd is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S857: No), the process of S858 is skipped, and the process of S859 is skipped. Go to processing.

In the processing of S859, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric power interval timer 203de is greater than "0" (S859). In the processing of S859, if it is determined that the value of the electric power interval timer 203de is greater than "0" ("1" or more) (S859: Yes), then the value of the electric power interval timer 203de is subtracted by 1. (S860), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the electric power interval timer 203de is not greater than "0" (is "0") (S859: No), the process of S860 is skipped, and this End the process.

As described above, according to the fifteenth control example, electric power can be supplied according to the state (attracted state, held state) to the solenoid for driving various electric accessories. This makes it possible to reduce the power used to hold the solenoid. In addition, it is possible to prevent the solenoid from generating excessive heat by reducing the excessive power consumption.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to output a control signal corresponding to the game state to each solenoid, for example, the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened. The type of output signal to the solenoid can be varied between a game state (for example, time saving state) and a game state (normal state) in which the opening of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is not frequent.

In this control example, when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a operates frequently, the electric power required to maintain the open state can be suppressed. In this control example, as the open state of the general electric (electric accessory) 640a, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (game state in which long opening is executed, that is, whether it is during time saving) and the operation interval is determined, and based on the determination result, the type of the signal output to the general electric solenoid 209d is switched, but other configurations may be used. When it is determined that the game state in which the electricity (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the general electricity (electric accessory) 640a per unit time The type of signal to be output may be switched based on the open period.

By configuring in this way, in a state where various solenoids (commercial solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) may generate excessive heat, output in advance before excessive heat is generated The type of signal can be switched.

In this control example, a push-type solenoid is used in which the movable iron core protrudes when power is supplied and an exciting current flows. Therefore, a pull-type solenoid in which the movable iron core is buried may be used.

In the fifteenth control example described above, a circuit capable of outputting a strong output signal for strongly operating the solenoid and a weak output signal for weakly operating the solenoid is used as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 (see FIG. 228). A configuration may be used, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 238(a) may be used.

Next, another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. 238(a). FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second solenoid drive circuit, which is another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 of the fifteenth control example described above. Note that the description of the same elements as those of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), in the second solenoid drive circuit, in order to vary the electric power of the general power solenoid 209d, it is configured to vary the supply voltage when energized. When the switch (SW) 2 is on (closed), the general voltage solenoid 209d is operated (strongly operated) at a voltage of 30 V, the switch (SW) 1 is turned on (closed), and the switch (SW) 2 is turned on (closed). is turned off (open), the general electric solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 1) at a voltage of 20 V, the switch (SW) 1 is turned off (open), and the switch (SW) 2 is turned on (closed). ), the normal voltage solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 2) at a voltage of 10V.

Each switch (SW1, SW2) provided in the above-described second solenoid drive circuit is configured to be switched on and off based on a signal output from main controller 110, and the contents thereof are described above. Since it is the same as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238(b), the operating mode of the common solenoid 209d when using the above-described second solenoid drive circuit will be described. FIG. 238(b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the second solenoid drive circuit and the common solenoid 209d.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both on, the general electric solenoid 209d performs strong operation, and when the switch (SW) 1 is on, the switch (SW) 2 is off, the common solenoid 209d performs weak operation 1 (L1), and when the switch (SW) 1 is off and the switch (SW) 2 is on, the common solenoid 209d performs weak operation 2 (L2). is executed, and when the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both off, the general electric solenoid 209d does not operate.

By configuring the solenoid drive circuit as in this modified example, for example, when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is opened, both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are turned on, and the general electric solenoid 209d is executed in the strong action, and when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is kept open, it is possible to use the weak action 1 and the weak action 2 properly.

As a method of selectively using weak action 1 and weak action 2, in a state where the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640 (for example, a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning port 640 causes a normal electric shock. Since there is a possibility that a force resisting the holding force of the solenoid 209d is generated, the weak operation 1 is set, and on the other hand, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, a non-time-saving state), the weak operation 2 may be set. As a result, power consumption can be suppressed, and excessive heat generation in the common solenoid 209d can also be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the operation of the common solenoid 209d using the second solenoid drive circuit, which is a modification of the solenoid drive circuit 1200, will be described. FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing the operation flow of the common solenoid 209d when the second solenoid drive circuit is used. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as in the flow of operation of the general-purpose solenoid 209d in the fifteenth control example described above (see FIG. 230) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 239, in the opening operation (long opening) of the general electric solenoid 209d when the game state is short time (short time operation), in order to open the general electric (electric accessory) 640a, a strong output signal (switch SW) 1), both weak output signals (switch (SW) 2) are turned on (80 ms) (see point c and point d in FIG. 239), and the general electric (electric accessory) 640a is kept open 239, when only the strong output signal (switch (SW) 1) is turned on, and when only the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is turned on (see point d and point e in FIG. 239). are configured to be executed alternately. As a result, it is possible to suppress bias in the circuits to be energized for operating the common solenoid 209d.

In addition, as a method of selectively using weak action 1 and weak action 2, in a state where the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 (for example, in a short time state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning hole 640 Since there is a possibility that a force resisting the holding force of the general electric solenoid 209d is generated, weak operation 1 is set, and on the other hand, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, in a non-time saving state), It may be configured to set the weak action 2. As a result, power consumption can be suppressed, and excessive heat generation in the common solenoid 209d can also be suppressed.

As described above, in this control example, the same standard is used for a plurality of solenoids, but the specification of the solenoid may be appropriately determined according to the operating environment of each solenoid.

Also, in this control example, the configuration has been described using the solenoid drive circuit of the common solenoid 209d, but the drive circuits of the other solenoids (open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) have the same configuration. is.

<Regarding a modification of the role-driven production>
Each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the character product driving effect executed in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above is operated by operating means (frame button 22, etc.). It was intended to execute the role product operation by driving the driving means (solenoid etc.) based on. On the other hand, this modified example is different in that there are provided driven accessories 725 and 726 that are movable following the actions of the above-described accessories (accessories A720 to C460). The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration used for the character object-driven presentation executed in the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above. Therefore, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As in this modification, by providing the driven accessories 725 and 726, the movement of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) whose actions are executed by being driven by the driving means (motor, etc.) is followed. Since it is possible to move the accessories (follower accessories 725 and 726) by pressing the Since it is possible to operate the roles (following roles 725 and 726) at timings different from the operating timing, it is possible to operate the operating means (frame button 22) for a player who has operated the operating means (frame button 22) multiple times. Based on the operation of the (frame button 22), it can be made to think that the accessories (follower accessories 725 and 726) have moved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the configuration and operation flow of the driven roles 725 and 726 used in this modification will be described. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the driven actors 725 and 726, and FIGS. 240(b) and (c) show the movements of the driven actors 725 and 726 following the action of the actor A720. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), the driven accessories 725 and 726 are provided with a driven accessory 725 on the left slide member 720a of the accessory A720, and a driven accessory 725 on the right slide member 720b. . Here, the configuration of the driven accessory 725 will be described.

The driven accessory 725 is pivotally fixed to the left slide member 720a by a pivot portion 725a provided at its upper end, and when the left slide member 720a stops moving (see FIG. 240(b)), the inertia It is configured to be rotatable around the shaft support portion 725a by force.

Furthermore, when the driven accessory 725 provided on the left slide member 720a and the driven accessory 726 provided on the right slide member 720b rotate together, the leading end portion 725b of each driven accessory is brought into contact. At the tip 725b of the driven role 725, a magnet is provided as a holding means for holding the contact state of each driven role (driven role 725, driven role 726). there is It should be noted that the holding means is not limited to magnets, as long as it can hold the state in which each driven accessory (driven accessory 725, driven accessory 726) is in contact with each other. For example, the tip portion 725b may be made of an adhesive material or a material with a high coefficient of friction.

Further, the left slide member 720a is provided with a regulating member 725c for regulating the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725. As shown in FIG. The regulating member 725c is variable between a projecting position for regulating the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 and a recessed position (permissive position) for allowing the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 by a driving means (solenoid, etc.) not shown. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special symbol wins a jackpot), the driven accessory 725 is configured to be changed to an allowable position where it can rotate. there is

Next, with reference to FIGS. 240(b) and 240(c), the operation flow of the driven objects 725 and 726 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240(b), when the action of the accessory A stops (or is suddenly decelerated), the driven accessories 725 and 726 rotate about the pivots 725a and 726a due to inertial force. Then, by abutting the tip portions 725b and 726b, a substantially V-shaped shape (character object synthesis form) is formed at a position covering the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Note that this character object synthesis form is held by holding means (magnets, etc.) provided at the tip portions 725b and 726b. In addition, the regulation member 725c is configured to be changed to the allowable position when the action of the accessory A is executed. The propulsive force generated by this restricts the rotating motion, and when the accessory A stops (or suddenly decelerates), it rotates.

Then, as shown in FIG. 240(c), by performing an action in the direction in which the role object A separates (by executing the return action), the tip portions 725b and 726b of the driven role objects 725 and 726 are separated. , the driven accessories 725 and 726 return to the standby position (the position shown in FIG. 240(a)) due to their own weight. In addition, since the regulation member 725c is configured to be changed to the regulation position at the timing when the driven accessories 725 and 726 return to the standby position, the reaction of the movement of the driven accessories 725 and 726 to the standby position causes Again, jumping out of the accessory A720 is suppressed.

The configuration of this modified example described above may be combined with the configuration of each control example described above. When the accessory A720 starts to repeat the operation, the restricting members 725c and 726c may be changed to the allowable positions. As a result, the driven accessory does not rotate in the normal accessory action, and can be rotated only when the repeated action is performed. Therefore, based on the player's operation of the operating means (frame button 22), it is possible to provide a new role product motion, and the player is motivated to operate the operating means (frame button 22). has the effect of being able to

In addition, in combination with the configuration of the fourteenth control example described above, the driven accessories 725 and 726 are activated only when the accessory action (strong action) that accelerates the operating speed of the driving means (motor, etc.) stops (or suddenly decelerates). It may be configured to rotate.

In addition, in this modified example, the rotation of the driven accessories 725 and 726 is regulated by varying the regulating member 725b. A holding member (magnet) or the like may be provided for each of the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b as a member for holding the movement. In this case, the driven accessories 725 and 726 can be held at the standby position by holding means (such as magnets) provided at the tip portions 725b and 726b of the driven accessories 725 and 726, respectively. Therefore, it becomes possible to use the holding means provided at the tips of the driven accessories 725 and 726 both for holding the standby position and for holding the completed accessory form, thereby reducing the number of parts. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the driven accessories 725 and 726 may be provided on the back side of the accessory A720 (at a location where the player cannot visually recognize them). As a result, the driven accessories 725 and 726 positioned at the standby position can be covered with the accessory A720, so even if the driven accessories 725 and 726 swing near the standby position, it is suppressed from being noticed by the player. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect. It should be noted that a structure other than the role product A720 may be used as long as a structure is provided that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driven role products 725 and 726 positioned at the standby position.

Also, as in this control example, when using a configuration that variably controls the regulating member, both the driven accessories 725 and 726 can be rotatable, or either one of them can be rotatable. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. For example, when a special symbol wins a jackpot, both of the driven accessories 725 and 726 are made rotatable (both the regulation members 725c and 726c are changed to the allowable position), and the completed accessory form is configured. If the special symbol is not won in the jackpot (if the winning is not notified), only one of the driven accessories is made rotatable, and the effect to arouse the player is executed. can be made

In the modified example described above, the slaves 725 and 726 are provided in the role A720, but the slaves may be provided in other roles (the role B740 and the role C460). Also, in this control example, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are operated at the same timing, but they may be operated at different timings. By complicating the action of the accessory driven by the drive means (motor or the like) in this way, the action of the driven role can be made more complicated, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example, a configuration using inertial force and gravity was described as a driven accessory that performs an action without using a driving means, but other configurations may be used. Forces may be used to configure the driven component.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<An example of a technical idea of a moving member that is moved only by a biasing force>
an urging device for generating an elastic urging force in one direction; and an urging force generated by the urging device from a retracted position positioned outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device to the display area of the liquid crystal display device. a moving member formed movably to a predetermined position located on the front side of the; a position restricting device formed capable of regulating the movement of the moving member at the retracted position; A gaming machine A1 comprising: a device;

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a driving motor that generates a driving force for moving the moving member are provided. There is a game machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the moving member is moved by motor drive, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to a high speed, but it is difficult to move the moving member at a high speed from the start. There was a problem of difficulty.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the moving member formed to be movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the biasing force in one direction is regulated (stopped) at the retracted position by the position regulating device. ). Then, when the restriction by the position restriction device is released by the release device, the moving member is arranged at the retracted position and starts to move due to the accumulated urging force.

Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be set to the target value from the time of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

Examples of the urging device include a device using the repulsive force of a magnet and a device using spring elasticity. , a device for releasing the electromagnetic attraction of the position regulating device, and the like.

The gaming machine A1 is characterized by comprising a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving at least the moving member from the predetermined position toward the retracted position, and the driving device constituting the releasing device. Game machine A2 to play.

Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is required in order to repeat the effect. Therefore, a space is required for disposing a device that generates a driving force. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device inside the game machine is limited, there is a possibility that the additional driving device may not be able to secure a sufficient space for arranging the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, since the release device is constituted by the driving device, the driving device can release the restriction on the moving member and move the moving member from the predetermined position to the retracted position. It can also be used as a return to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the installation space for the releasing device and the driving device as compared with the case where the driving device is prepared separately.

Further, after the moving member moves from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeatedly performed.

In addition, a motor, an air cylinder, etc. are illustrated as a drive device.

In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably pivotally supported on the base end side, and the position regulating device includes a first rotating body that rotates about a first axis and a first rotating body that protrudes from the first rotating body. and a pin member located eccentrically to the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member at the base end side of the moving member, and the moving member being arranged at the retracted position. A game machine A3 characterized in that a direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is perpendicular to a direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member when .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are connected. The direction is perpendicular to the direction connecting the rotating shaft and the pin member formed on the base end side of the moving member.

Therefore, by moving the moving member to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, thereby mechanically holding the moving member at the retracted position. can. As a result, for example, a structure for detecting that the moving member is placed at the retracted position and activating the position restricting device to restrict the moving member becomes unnecessary.

In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship among the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position without the driving force of the drive motor or the like. A large amount of regulatory power can be secured. Therefore, a large biasing force accumulated in the biasing device can be ensured, and the effect of starting the moving member at high speed can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion for guiding the pin member, and a straight line connecting the pin member and the first axis of the position regulating device at at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position. and the extending direction of the guide portion are aligned with each other, and the position regulating device is engaged with the driving device, and the driving force generated by the driving device is transmitted. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the pin member is formed so as to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated by the movement of the pin member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, when starting to rotate the moving member from the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion Since the direction is the same, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the rotation of the first rotating body is started.

Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device on the moving member, when shifting the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotating shaft on the base end side of the moving member, and the pin member (rotating the position restricting device), it is necessary to The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

In any one of game machines A2 to A4, an engaged state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are engaged with each other and a disengaged state in which the position regulating device and the driving device are disengaged are formed. The game machine A5 is characterized in that the disengaged state is formed at least when the moving member starts from the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the driving device form a disengaged state, thereby reducing the resistance applied to the position regulating device. can be suppressed, and as a result, the resistance of the moving member at the time of start-up can be reduced. In this case, when the moving member starts from the retracted position, no resistance is applied to the position regulating device by establishing an engaged state between the driving device and the position regulating device. Therefore, even if a large-sized driving device is selected to resist the biasing force of the biasing device, the moving member can be started at high speed, and the flexibility in designing the biasing device can be improved. That is, it becomes possible to select an urging device having a larger urging force.

In addition, as a mode in which the position restricting device and the driving device form a non-engaged state, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position restricting device, and the gear meshing with the gear is partially disengaged. is disposed in the driving device, and the driving force of the driving device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first rotating body and the second rotating body; A magnetic material is formed on the side surface of the first rotating body, and a second rotating body partially formed with a magnetic material that is attracted to the magnetic material is disposed in the driving device, the first rotating body and the second rotating body. For example, the case where the drive device is transmitted by adsorption with the

Specifically, in the case where the driving force is transmitted between the first rotating body and the second rotating body by meshing gears, the gear of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulating device and the driving device form an engaged state in the region where the gears are meshed, and the position regulating device and the driving device are in an engaged state in the region where the gears are disengaged (regions where the gears are not formed). and the device form a disengaged condition.

In the game machines A1 to A5, the game machine comprises an effect member which is swingably pivotally supported by the moving member and which is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least at a predetermined position, The member extends from the base end side to the swinging end side, which is the end opposite to the base end side, and is formed in such a manner that the extending direction is the longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal liquid crystal. The effect member is swingably pivotally supported outside the display area of the display device, and the length in the first direction is longer than the length in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction. At the retracted position, the first direction is along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is the tangential direction of the rotational locus of the moving member. A game machine A6 characterized in that the game machine A6 takes a posture in which one end in the first direction projects to the opposite side of the retracted position.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the production member is arranged at the retracted position, the production member is arranged so that the first direction is the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is considered to be a posture that follows. Therefore, even if it is difficult to form a sufficient space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. can be made easier to set up.

Further, when the effect member is arranged at a predetermined position, the attitude is changed so that the first direction is oriented tangentially to the rotating direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction is the effect end. Since it is sandwiched and protruded on the opposite side of the retracted position, the display area of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively used for presentation.

An example of a case where it is difficult to form a sufficient space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member outside the liquid crystal display device is, for example, the case where the retraction position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device. be done.

In the game machine A6, a first guide portion is provided on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A game machine A7, comprising a first protrusion, wherein the change in posture of the effect member is caused by the first protrusion being guided by the first guide.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the change in the attitude of the production member is caused by the projection of the production member being guided by the first guide part. The degree of freedom can be improved.

That is, for example, in the case where the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted by upward movement of the moving member, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of upward movement of the moving member. Whether or not the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the upward movement end can be arbitrarily selected depending on the design of the first guide portion.

Examples of the first guide portion include an elongated hole that is formed through and has a longitudinal direction, a groove that is formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. Examples of the mode in which the first projecting portion slides on the first guide portion, and a mode in which a rotating body is disposed on the first projecting portion and the rotating body rolls on the first guide portion, etc. exemplified.

In the game machine A7, the first guide portion includes a posture changing portion formed along a straight line radially extending from the swing axis of the moving member, and a posture changing portion formed along a straight line radially extending from the swing axis of the moving member and a concentric circle portion extending along a circle with the shape of the Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the presentation member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the presentation member are connected without changing the attitude with respect to the moving member. The period during which they are moved together can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line radially extending from the rotating shaft of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the attitude change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric part extends along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting part of the effect member is guided through the concentric part, the first projecting part of the effect member and the effect The effect member is moved while the relative positional relationship between the member and the pivotal support position of the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the concentric circle portion is formed on the side of the predetermined position, the effect member and the moving member can be visually recognized as one for a long period of time by the player during the rotational movement of the moving member.

In the game machine A7, the first guide portion includes a posture changing portion formed along a straight line radially extending from the swing axis of the moving member, and a posture changing portion formed along a straight line radially extending from the swing axis of the moving member A gaming machine A9, characterized in that it comprises a concentric circle portion extending along a circle having the shape of a circle, wherein the attitude changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the presentation member changes its posture with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the presentation member can be connected without changing the posture with respect to the moving member. The period during which they are moved together can be lengthened.

That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line radially extending from the rotating shaft of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the shaft portion is greatly changed, and the attitude change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along the circle centered on the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the first projecting portion of the effect member , the effect member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship with the axial support position of the effect member and the moving member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side, the posture of the performance member can be quickly changed while the performance member is visually recognized by the player.

In any one of the game machines A6 to A9, a second guide portion is formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extends along the rotation trajectory of the moving member; The member includes at least one second protrusion guided by the second guide, the second protrusion being integrally formed with the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the predetermined position. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the second projecting portion is brought into contact with one end of the second guide portion when the second guide portion is engaged.

Since the moving member is moved by the biasing force of the biasing device, it is not possible to reduce the momentum of the moving member by stopping the motor as in the case of driving the motor. It is necessary to form a mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the second projecting portion hits the end of the second guide portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

Further, since the second projecting portion is guided by the second guide portion extending along the rotational locus of the moving member, the second guiding portion and the second projecting portion optimize the rotation of the moving member. It is possible to suppress the wobbling of the moving member in the direction of the swing axis.

Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the production member may be brought into contact with each other to serve as a stopper. A severe problem arises in minutes. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally projected from the moving member, the strength problem is small and the reliability of the stopper can be improved.

By forming a plurality of pairs of the second projecting portion and the second guiding portion, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches the predetermined position. Thereby, the durability of the second projecting portion can be improved. Further, examples of the second guide portion include an elongated hole that is formed through and has a longitudinal direction, a groove that is formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. Examples of a mode in which the second protrusion slides on the second guide, a mode in which a rotating body is disposed on the second protrusion, and the rotating body rolls on the second guide, etc. exemplified.

In the gaming machine A10, the second guide part has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction, at the one end, rather than at the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end. A game machine A11 characterized in that it is formed in such a manner that the width thereof is reduced.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the second guide part is formed in such a manner that one end has a smaller groove width than the other end. That is, since a large gap is ensured between the second projecting portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, it is possible to suppress resistance when the moving member is started. Moreover, the gap formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position can be reduced, and the second protrusion can be prevented from wobbling.

Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end of the second guide portion toward the other end, or A case is exemplified in which the groove width is abruptly reduced in a part of (at least two degrees of groove width reduction are formed).

In addition, in the case where the second guide portion is formed by a through hole, and the second projection portion is inserted through the second guide portion and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second projection portion, the second guide portion may be perforated. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is reduced at one end as compared with the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling particularly in the drilling direction of the second guide portion.

In the gaming machine A11, the swinging movement of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by upward movement, and the side surface on the small diameter side of the second guide portion is extended from the one end to the other end. The gap between the second protrusion and the second protrusion is made small up to the vicinity of the part, and the gap between the second protrusion and the second protrusion is made larger at the other end than the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is , the gap between the one end and the second protrusion is made small, and the gap between the second protrusion and the second protrusion is reduced from the vicinity of the one end to the vicinity of the other end as compared with the gap. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the gap is enlarged.

According to the game machine A12, since the swinging movement of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by upward movement, when the moving member is swung from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member swings. When the second projecting portion slightly moves in the direction perpendicular to the shaft due to play with the shaft, the second projecting portion tends to come into contact with the small diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the small diameter side of the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is reduced in the initial stage of the process of the moving member swinging from the retracted position to the predetermined position. As a result, the movement of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position can be smoothed.

Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second projecting portion is likely to come into contact with the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the gap between the large diameter side of the second guide portion and the second projecting portion is finally reduced when the moving member is swung to a predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the driving device can be improved.

In any one of game machines A6 to A12, the moving member includes a main body portion extending from the base end side to the swinging end side, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. A decorative portion is provided spaced apart on the front side, and when the posture of the effect member changes, at least one of one end in the first direction and the other end on the opposite side of the one end is aligned with the main body portion and the A gaming machine A13 characterized in that it is housed between the decoration part.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the presentation member changes its posture, at least one of the two ends of the presentation member in the first direction changes from the main body portion to the decorative portion. are stored with a small gap between them. Therefore, when the presentation member changes its posture, if for some reason the presentation member is allowed to move largely in the direction of the swing axis with respect to the main body, the main body and the decorative section serve as a guide that prevents the movement. , the large movement of the effect member in the direction of the swing axis can be restricted.

According to this, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a layered relationship.

In the gaming machine A13, the movement trajectory of any portion of the effect member and the movement trajectory of any portion of the decorative member are within the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and the movement trajectory of the effect member is within the display area. A gaming machine A14 characterized in that they are overlapped when viewed in the driving axis direction.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the effect member can be reliably accommodated between the main body and the decoration part inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. As a result, compared to the case where the effect member is first stored between the main body portion and the decoration portion outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case where the fixing plate prevents displacement in the front-rear direction, A guide function for restricting the movement of the effect member in the direction of the swing axis can be exerted from an earlier stage.

As a result, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, interference between the moving members of the moving units outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device as well as interference between the moving units inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device is prevented. Interference between moving members can be prevented.

<An example of a technical idea that suppresses the wobble of the moving member>
A moving member slidably formed between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, an effect member disposed on the moving member, and the effect member and a second driving device for generating a driving force for driving the game machine, wherein the retracted position is a position separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance in the lateral direction of the game machine and from the predetermined position A position spaced apart by a predetermined distance upward in the vertical direction of the gaming machine, at least the predetermined position being the end of movement of the moving member, and at least the effect member being positioned at the predetermined position. A game machine B1 characterized by being driven.

Here, a moving member that is slidably formed and a performance member arranged on the moving member and driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slidably moved in the horizontal direction. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP-A-2012-085811). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the moving member receives the reaction force of the driving of the effect member, and the moving member moves in the sliding direction. However, there is a problem that it is necessary to continuously apply a force to the moving member to resist the force due to the reaction of the drive.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position, which is the end of movement of the moving member, is formed diagonally below the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second driving device at a predetermined position and the moving member receives the reaction force, the force due to the weight of the moving member acts toward the predetermined position and moves the moving member to the predetermined position. (because of pushing back), the moving member can be maintained at a predetermined position even if the driving force applied to the moving member from the first driving device is not required.

The vertical direction of the gaming machine means the direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the horizontal direction of the gaming machine means the direction that crosses the vertical direction of the gaming machine substantially perpendicularly. do.

As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. method, a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of the moving member, and a method of winding the belt, and the like.

In the gaming machine B1, an auxiliary member is provided with a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is arranged at least at the predetermined position, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. An overhanging portion formed inside a display area of the device, wherein the overhanging portion extends in a direction perpendicular to a plane along which the moving member slides when the moving member is arranged at least at the predetermined position. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it abuts against the auxiliary member when it swings upward.

Here, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the projecting portion of the moving member is formed so as to project inwardly of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, thereby preventing interference with other accessories. Therefore, it is required to suppress the shaking in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is positioned at a predetermined position. In the arranged state, when the projecting portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane of sliding movement of the moving member, the auxiliary member and the projecting portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobble of the projecting portion and prevent collision between the projecting portion and another accessory.

A game machine B3 characterized in that, in the game machine B2, the rigidity of the projecting portion is weakened on the base side compared to the tip side.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, since the rigidity of the root side of the overhanging portion is weakened compared to the tip side of the overhanging portion, the wobble that occurs at the tip of the overhanging portion is reduced to the overhanging portion. It is possible to weaken the degree of transmission to the root side.

Here, as a method of weakening the rigidity, a case where the projecting portion is configured with a resin material having partially different rigidity by two-color molding, a case where the thickness of the projecting portion is partially changed, etc. are exemplified. .

When the projecting portion is formed to be thin in a direction substantially perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to bending deformation of the projecting portion.

Further, when the root side of the overhang is formed to be thinner than the tip side, the wobble at the tip side of the overhang is converted into bending deformation with the root side of the overhang as a fulcrum. As a result, it is possible to suppress horizontal movement in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides on the root side of the projecting portion.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the auxiliary member has one end pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end opposite to the one end forms the display area of the liquid crystal display device. and the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member extends outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is placed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

Thus, another moving member is arranged in the same layer as that in which the moving member is arranged, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the other moving member protrudes inward of the liquid crystal display device. It is possible to produce a variety of productions in a limited space.

The auxiliary member may be pivotally supported by the base member by a rotary shaft, or may be provided with a protrusion inserted through the long hole and the protrusion may be guided through the long hole. are exemplified.

In the gaming machine B4, the projecting portion extends along the direction from the pivotal support portion of the one end of the auxiliary member to the other end when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5 characterized by comprising an extended abutting portion.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the protruding portion of the moving member has a contact portion, and the contact portion is in a state in which the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the pivot portion at one end to the other end. Therefore, in a state in which the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the contact portion can secure an area where the moving member and the auxiliary member are brought into contact with each other.

In the gaming machine B5, the projecting portion has a hand portion that is bent and extends from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip portion of the hand portion, and the movement A gaming machine B6 characterized in that, as the member slides to the retracted position, the overlapping position of the projecting portion and the auxiliary member moves to the tip side of the hand portion.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the effect member is arranged at the end portion of the overhanging portion, and the overhanging portion and the auxiliary member are aligned as the moving member slides to the retracted position. The overlapping position is moved to the distal end side of the hand portion. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, it is possible to shorten the protrusion (protrusion distance) of the projecting portion extending to the effect member with reference to the auxiliary member. As a result, even if the leading end of the projecting portion is wobbly due to the driving of the effect member, the projecting portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobble is small. As a result, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the effect of suppressing wobbling in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkably achieved.

In game machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, and has one end pivotally supported by the moving member so as to swing from one end to the opposite side. The longitudinal direction is the direction connecting the other end, which is the end of the moving member. However, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the longitudinal direction of the effect member is tilted horizontally.

Since the moving member moves obliquely downward toward the predetermined position, in order to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the moving member must be When arranged at the retracted position, it is necessary to arrange the lower end of the effect member at a position raised from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the distance that the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. rice field. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the area below the effect member is a dead space, which is wasteful.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the effect member is arranged below the moving member, and compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effect member is formed smaller. Take a horizontal lying position.

Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, even if the lower end of the effecting member is arranged at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. This distance can be absorbed by the posture change of the production member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the production member from being wasted as a dead space when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, and the production member can be formed as a large member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

In the game machine B7, a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member is provided, and the auxiliary member is arranged in the retracted position so that the movement of the auxiliary member is greater than that in the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the member is arranged at the predetermined position, it assumes a horizontally tilted posture.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the auxiliary member is arranged in the horizontal direction when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, compared to when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Since the other end of the production member is connected to the auxiliary member via the connection member, the production member is horizontally tilted as the auxiliary member is horizontally tilted. can be made

In addition, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member pivotally supported by the moving member, it is supported by a plurality of members. By dispersing them, the effect of suppressing the wobbling of the effect member and the moving member can be enhanced.

A game machine B9 characterized in that, in the game machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, since the center of gravity of the production member is formed on the other end side of the production member, the weight of the production member is effectively applied to the connecting member. can be made Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, a force is effectively applied to the auxiliary member in a direction of further tilting the auxiliary member, so that the wobble of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member and the effect member that are connected to the auxiliary member.

A game machine B10 characterized in that, in a game machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed above the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member in the vertical direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed above the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member in the vertical direction of the game machine. The height can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with the pivotal support positions of the moving member and the effect member as a boundary.

Therefore, the wobble of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member. Can cause wobble. Thus, by driving the effect member, it is possible to perform an effect that the moving member and the effect member are wobbly.

<An example of technical ideas for reducing assembly man-hours>
a base member having a pair of wall portions projecting in the same direction; a lid member abutting on the projecting end of at least one wall portion of the pair of wall portions; at least one of the pair of wall portions; The wall portion has a plurality of shaft support grooves formed in the end surface of the overhanging end, and the reflecting member is supported by being fitted in the shaft support groove and being protruded from the body portion and the body portion. and at least one rotating shaft portion that is fitted into the shaft supporting groove is fitted from the open ends of the plurality of shaft supporting grooves, and the open ends of the shaft supporting grooves are connected to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being pivotally supported by being blocked.

Here, there is a game machine provided with a movable body which is pivotally supported at both ends and formed so as to be able to change its attitude in order to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED light source (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are arranged, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the operation of inserting the movable bodies into the holes for axially supporting the movable bodies, and then In order to fix the movable body so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole, it is necessary to carry out the same number of work as the number of movable bodies, which increases the number of assembling man-hours.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft support grooves are formed in the wall of the base member, the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted in the shaft support groove, and the open end of the shaft support groove is the cover member. A plurality of reflecting members can be rotatably pivotally supported by being closed by the . By rotating these reflecting members, it is possible to change the direction of the light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting members.

Therefore, the work of inserting the reflecting member into the hole for pivotal support and the work of attaching parts (screws, retaining stoppers, etc.) for fixing the reflecting member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole after that can be eliminated. It is possible to prevent the number of assembly man-hours from increasing in proportion to the number of .

In the case of forming the shaft support groove only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is bored in the opposite side of one of the wall portions, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is obliquely inserted into the hole. Later, when the reflecting member is laid down, a shaft formed on the other side opposite to one of the reflecting members may be fitted into the shaft support groove, or a shaft pin may protrude from the other side opposite to the one of the reflecting members. For example, after the reflecting member is externally fitted on the pin, the reflecting member is laid down so that the shaft portion formed on the other side opposite to the one of the reflecting members is fitted into the shaft support groove.

A gaming machine C2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall.

Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member be formed thin, for example, if the cover member is fastened and fixed to the projecting end surface of the wall portion, the diameter of the head of the fastening screw will be too small for the thickness of the wall portion. It becomes the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the cover member is fastened to the side surface of the wall, so the wall is formed thin without being limited by the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. can do.

In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to improve the production effect of.

In the game machine C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the cover member has a plurality of shaft support holes that support the rotation shaft portion of the reflection member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, since the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted through the shaft support hole formed in the cover member, the area for supporting the rotating shaft portion is the same as that of the wall portion. can be sufficiently ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness for supporting the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the length of the axial support hole.

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, at least one of the pair of wall portions has an extension portion extending from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member includes the extension portion. A fitting portion is provided to be fitted to the setting portion, and in a state in which the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is attached to the extension portion at least in a direction in which the axial support groove is adjacent to the shaft support groove and in a direction in which the rotation is performed. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is abutted from the axial direction of the shaft portion.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extended portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the direction in which the shaft support grooves are adjacent to each other. It is possible to easily align the wall portion in the adjacent direction of the shaft support groove and the cover member.

Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extended portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned in the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion, The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced with the lid member.

In any one of game machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the respective axial centers of the pair of wall portions and the pair of adjacent reflecting members is closed by the body portions of the pair of reflecting members and in the closed state, the surfaces of the pair of reflecting members in the direction of rotation are brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the area formed by the pair of wall portions and the axial center of each of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. can be blocked by the main body, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the plurality of reflecting members.

In addition, in the closed state, the surfaces of the pair of reflecting members in the rotation direction are brought into contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main body portions of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be closed. Leakage of light can be suppressed.

Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, sliding a plate-like shutter member and arranging the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is completely opened, the player can visually recognize the entire emitted light. However, while the shutter member is sliding from a state in which the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player sees the entire light becomes longer.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C5, the reflecting member suppresses leakage of light in the closed state, and allows the light emitted to the player to pass through when the reflecting member rotates from the closed state. Here, multiple reflective members can serve the same role as the single shutter member described above by way of example. That is, each reflecting member can be formed to be smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, the time required for the player to see the entire light can be shortened by rotating the reflecting member as compared with the case of sliding the shutter member.

In addition, since the ends of the reflecting surface portions of the adjacent reflecting members are formed so as to be able to abut each other, it is possible to correct the misalignment of the posture of the reflecting member by another reflecting member. Therefore, even if there is a reflecting member with poor rotational angle accuracy among the plurality of reflecting members, the attitude of the reflecting member after rotation is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflecting member. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the quality of the presentation of the reflecting member.

In the game machine C5, the game machine C6 is characterized in that the contact portions of the mutually facing surfaces of the reflecting member are chamfered.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, the contact portions of the surfaces of the reflecting members facing each other are chamfered, so that the reflecting members can be tilted further toward the adjacent reflecting members. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members in the closed state can be made flatter. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining side surfaces of a plurality of reflecting members in the rotational direction, deviation of the pattern at the boundary between the reflecting members can be suppressed.

Examples of the chamfering method include a method of shaving a curved surface (adding R), a method of shaving a flat surface, and the like.

In any one of game machines C1 to C6, a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member slidably moved by the driving device, wherein the transmission member is adapted to rotate. The plurality of reflecting members are formed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and the plurality of reflecting members each have a transmitted portion that abuts against the transmitting member on at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the transmitted portion and the reflecting member are rotatable by sliding the transmission member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the driving device is formed in a manner that it slides vertically with respect to the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion. The transmitted portions respectively formed on the rotating shaft portions of the plurality of reflecting members are brought into contact with the transmitting member. Here, by sliding the transmitting member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflecting member is rotated in conjunction with it, so that the plurality of reflecting members can be rotated by sliding movement of one transmitting member. .

A belt and a rack gear are exemplified as the transmission member. When the transmission member is a belt, the transmitted portion is exemplified by a cylindrical portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, the transmitted portion is exemplified by a rotary gear-shaped portion.

In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion having teeth engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion is formed with teeth that can mesh with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the transmission member has the rack gear portion, and the transmitted portion is formed with teeth that are meshable with the rack gear portion of the transmission member. As a result, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted portions of the plurality of reflection members meshing with the rack gear portion are rotated, thereby preventing slippage between the transmission member and the reflection member. can be done. Therefore, a plurality of reflecting members can be synchronously rotated.

In the game machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed with a width larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the opposed transmitted portion or the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that expanded teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is set to have a greater distance than the adjacent teeth of the opposing transmitted portion or the rack gear portion. Since the expanded tooth is formed with a large width, it is possible to temporarily increase the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion when the expanded tooth is meshed.

Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even if the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member malfunctions, it is possible to prevent excessive rotation of the reflection member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of the technical idea of moving the mating member by its own driving device>
The inner surface is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, is formed so as to be able to slide back and forth between the outside and the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed in the movement direction inside the display area. and a driving device for driving the pair of moving members, wherein one of the pair of moving members is movable within a movable range. interferes with the movable range of the other moving member, which is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, moves the one moving member to bring it into contact with the other moving member, and further the A game machine D1 is formed so as to be movable by moving one moving member in the same direction to push the other moving member forward.

Here, a pair of characters are moved from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and by coming into contact with each other, the game machine makes the liquid crystal display device invisible. is known (see, for example, JP-A-2005-040413). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the motions of the pair of accessories are monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member abuts on the other moving member, and the other moving member is moved to move the other moving member. It is possible to create unexpected motions that are difficult to create with only a driving device for driving the moving member.

For example, if the moving member is driven by a single drive device, a delay associated with the deceleration time occurs when the driving direction is reversed, which causes monotonicity of the moving member. Therefore, when the driving direction of the driving device for one of the moving members is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction. As a result, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form only with a driving device that drives the other moving member.

In addition, since the pair of moving members can be moved without synchronous operation of the driving device for driving the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control load of the driving device can be reduced. .

The game machine D2 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is substantially vertical.

Here, when one of the moving members moves downward from the retracted position, the one of the moving members receives downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, when one of the moving members changes direction, the driving force required is increased by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in the substantially vertical direction, so that the one movement that makes contact in the process of moving downward from the retracted position When the direction of the member is changed, the other moving member moving upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction, thereby changing the direction of the one moving member. can shorten the time required for Note that the substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and means a direction in which a slight horizontal component is allowed.

A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, the moving direction of the pair of moving members is substantially horizontal.

When one moving member abuts the other moving member in the process of moving and the other moving member moves in the same direction to move the other moving member, the driving device for the one moving member is a pair of moving members. Since the moving member is moved together, the load on the driving device is increased.

Here, when a pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the load on the driving device for driving the moving member arranged below is greater than the load on the driving device for driving the moving member arranged on the upper side. It becomes large in comparison, and a difference arises in the life of the driving device. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device is shorter than that of the other drive device, making it difficult to schedule maintenance compared to replacing a pair of drive devices at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be able to slide substantially horizontally, so that the difference in load on the pair of drive devices is reduced. be able to.

That is, when the moving member is formed so as to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member does not receive a force due to gravity in the movable direction, so the load on the driving device does not depend on the direction of movement. Therefore, it is possible to match the replacement time for each driving device.

The direction of sliding movement of the moving member does not need to coincide with the horizontal direction, and an inclination from the horizontal direction to the extent that the moving member can stand still due to the frictional force with the driving device is allowed.

In any one of game machines D1 to D3, a base member is provided on which the moving member is arranged, and a shaft for slidably guiding the moving member is fixed to the base member. Game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft has a role of slidably guiding the moving member.

Thereby, the shaft can be used both as a member for slidably guiding the moving member and as a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

The gaming machine D4 includes a carriage portion having at least a pair of wheel portions at both ends disposed so as to sandwich the axial rod and formed to be able to roll with respect to the axial rod. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being fixed to at least one end of a moving member.

According to the game machine D5, the truck portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the truck portion has a wheel portion that can roll on the shaft, thereby suppressing the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides. can do.

In addition, since a pair of wheel portions are arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the axial rod, and they are arranged at least at both ends of the truck portion, the attitude of the axial rod and the truck portion can be maintained constant.

A gaming machine D6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the wheel portions respectively arranged on the pair of moving members are brought into contact with each other when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to increase the resistance applied to the wheel portion when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, so that it is possible to reduce the impact caused when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other.

It should be noted that the pair of wheel portions that contact each other may be formed to have different diameters. In this case, by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased.

In the game machine D6, the moving member includes a transmitting portion for transmitting the driving force of the driving device, and is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that the transmission section and the truck section are disposed at the end of the game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the transmission section for transmitting the driving force of the driving device is formed at one end of the truck section. Since the carriage portion is slidably moved while being guided by the shaft, it is possible to optimize the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the driving device.

That is, since the moving member is formed to be long, it is likely to flex, and the flexing occurs with one end portion where the carriage portion guided by the shaft rod is arranged as a fulcrum. In the case where the transmission portion is formed at the other end portion opposite to the one end portion where the carriage portion is disposed, the position of the transmission portion is likely to change due to the bending of the moving member. The engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the member and the driving device is likely to be displaced. If the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the moving member and the driving device is displaced, the resistance generated between the transmission portion and the driving device during the sliding movement of the moving member increases, which is a problem.

On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end portion where the carriage portion is arranged, the position for transmitting the driving force and the support position for the moving member are both formed at one end portion, and the moving member is Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmission part of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion of the moving member and the driving device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission portion and the driving device during the sliding movement of the moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, as an aspect of the transmission portion, for example, when a rotary gear is formed from the driving device side, a rack gear portion formed at one end portion is exemplified.

A gaming machine D8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D7, contact between the pair of moving members occurs on the side of the transmission section.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, since it is not necessary to consider deviation due to bending of the moving members in calculating the contact positions of the pair of moving members, the contact positions of the pair of moving members can be calculated. can be calculated accurately.

A gaming machine D9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at the end on the side opposite to the transmission section side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at the end opposite to the transmission section side. It can absorb the impact on the side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the driving device due to the contact between the pair of moving members.

In game machines D7 to D9, the moving member extends parallel to the direction in which the moving member slides, and the other end opposite to the one end of the moving member has the shaft rod. The moving member is rotatably supported by the other end and is in contact with the guide wall. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, wherein the pair of rotating bodies are arranged side by side in the sliding direction of the moving member and are rotated as the moving member is slid.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machines D7 to D9, the guide wall extends parallel to the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member. A pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide walls.

Here, when the moving member suddenly stops and the moving member is greatly flexurally vibrated with one end as a fulcrum, the moving member The rotating body on the side opposite to the bending direction of is pressed against the guide wall. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of bending vibration of the moving member, the bending vibration of the moving member can be suppressed more easily than when the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

Further, when the moving member is started, the rotating body and the guide wall smoothly contact each other, so that the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall and the moving member can be suppressed when the moving member is started.

As a mode of abutment between the guide wall and the rotating body, a mode in which a rack gear is formed on the guide wall and a gear that meshes with the rack gear of the guide wall is engraved on the side of the rotating body is exemplified. be done.

A game machine D11 in the gaming machine D10, wherein the rotating body has gear-shaped teeth engraved on a side surface thereof, and the guide wall has a rack gear portion that meshes with the teeth. .

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D10, a toothed portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion that meshes with the toothed portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and the bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D11 is provided with a detecting device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined based on the detection result of the detecting device. D12.

Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by an electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the voltage instability of the electric motor. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members is provided, and the detection result of the detection device Since the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

For example, when a pair of moving members are close to each other, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted based on the detection result of a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of one of the moving members, so that the pair of moving members is almost at the time of collision. A constant velocity state can be formed. As a result, it is possible to soften the impact when the pair of moving members collide.

<Feature E Group> (Attention is diverted from V Accurate Attacker during V Accurate Action)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating a predetermined lottery result on the display means. is displayed, the variable winning means is variable from a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter a game ball, wherein the variable winning means is capable of changing a predetermined condition opening and closing means for opening and closing a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter, and ball entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the specific area, based on the establishment of and a privilege state imparting means for imparting a privilege state that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means, and a predetermined a game machine E1 characterized by having a production execution means for producing a production of .

The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed by the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Based on the display of the identification information indicating the result of the predetermined lottery on the display means, the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball is easy to enter by the variable winning means. In the variable winning means, the opening/closing means opens and closes a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area is detected by the entering ball detecting means, the privilege state giving advantage to the player is imparted by the privilege state imparting means. Further, at least when the opening/closing means is operated, a predetermined effect is performed by the effect executing means. As a result, the operation of the opening/closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the game.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the effect executing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, since a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect execution means, there is an effect that the player's attention can be diverted from the opening/closing means.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the effect execution means reports, as the effect, a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable prize winning means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or the game machine E2, the effect executing means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as a effect. There is an effect that the action can be made difficult for the player to distinguish.

The game machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means is executed at least over a predetermined period before the operation of the opening/closing means and over a period during which the opening/closing means is operated.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, at least the effect execution means is executed over the period of operation from before the predetermined period of time when the opening/closing means is operated. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the operation of the opening/closing means.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means includes an opening into which a game ball can enter, a state in which the opening is closed to make it difficult for the game ball to enter, and a state in which the opening is in the open state to make it difficult for the game ball to enter. The opening and closing means has a short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and a short opening time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The game machine E5 is characterized in that either one of a long opening time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down to a specific area is executed based on a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable winning means includes an opening into which a game ball can enter, and a regulating member that changes the opening into a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. Either a short opening time that is shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or a long opening time that is longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The opening/closing means is executed based on a predetermined condition. Thereby, whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the opening can be controlled with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that game control can be easily configured.

In the gaming machine E5, a special game execution means for executing a special game for changing the variable winning means to the open state based on the fact that the lottery means has selected the specific lottery result, and the lottery means. and a type determining means for determining the type of the special game when a specific lottery result is drawn by, and the opening and closing means is based on the type of special game determined by the type determining means. The game machine E6 is characterized in that either one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined by means of.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the special game execution means executes a special game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state based on the fact that the lottery means has drawn a lottery indicating a specific lottery result, the special game is executed by the type determination means. A type is determined. Then, in the opening/closing means, one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined based on the special game type determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be easily changed according to the type of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Feature F group> (Forms a V-probable route with one attacker)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating a specific lottery result on the display means. is displayed, a variable winning means capable of changing from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter; In a gaming machine having probability setting means for setting either a normal probability or a special probability higher than the normal probability, the variable prize winning means enters a game ball when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass, a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific area and a distribution means for distributing the game ball entering the opening to either one of the area and the probability setting means, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area, the special A gaming machine F1 characterized by setting a probability.

The game machine F1 has the following effects. That is, the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed by the display means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. When identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter is changed to an open state in which game balls are easy to enter by the variable winning means. Then, the probability setting means sets the lottery probability of a predetermined lottery result by the lottery means to either the normal probability or the special probability higher than the normal probability. In the variable prize winning means, the game balls are distributed by the distributing means to either the first specific area through which the game balls entering the opening in the open state can pass or the second specific area different from the first specific area. is distributed. Further, the probability setting means sets a special probability on the condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the special probability is set by the variable prize-winning means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F1, based on the display of the identification information indicating the result of the specific lottery, a special game is provided in which the variable winning means is easily changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is established. special game execution means for executing; and type determination means for determining a type of special game to be executed by the special game execution means when the lottery means draws a lottery with the specific lottery result, Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determination means, either a first state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area or a second state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area. and a distribution setting means that is set within the period of the one special game.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, based on the fact that the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, the special game executing means executes the special game in which the variable winning means is easily changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is established. be. Then, when a specific lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, the type of the special game to be executed by the special game execution means is determined by the type determination means. Either the first state in which game balls are easily distributed to the first specific area or the second state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second specific area is determined based on the type of special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of one special game. As a result, the sorting means can be controlled according to the special game type determined by the type determining means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be performed more simply.

In the game machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening as the second state from the open state, A gaming machine F3 characterized in that a second time, which is longer than the time required for a game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area, is set as the first state from the open state.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the distribution setting means sets the first time shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening to the second state. , and the second time, which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set as the first state from the open state. Thereby, it is possible to easily control whether or not to set the special probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the sorting means is A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the variable prize winning means, when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distributing means operates for a certain period of time to distribute the game balls to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states. As a result, the player can expect that the game ball will be distributed to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the game balls passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of game balls are delivered to the player based on the game balls passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since the money is paid out by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G group> (Long press effect)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, an operation means operable by a player, and its operation. signal output means for outputting an operation signal based on the operation of the means; determination means for determining whether the operation signal output by the signal output means is received; and the operation signal by the determination means. and an effect variable means for varying the effect executed by the effect executing means based on the release timing when it is determined that the operation signal is not received after it is determined that the operation signal is received. Gaming machine G1.

The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means. Further, based on the player's operation by the operation means, the operation signal output by the signal output means is determined to have not been received after the determination means has determined that the operation signal has been received. Based on the release timing, the effect executed by the effect execution means is varied by the effect variable means. As a result, the performance can be varied in various ways by the player's operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the effect variable means determines whether or not the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period. The game machine G2 is characterized in that the performance is variable to be advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the effect variable means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period, it is more likely than when it is outside the allowable period. Since the effect is changed to be advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operating means.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized in that it has an informing means for informing the timing of the allowable period when the judging means judges that the operation signal is received. .

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, when the determination means determines that the operation signal is received, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notification means. There is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies the permissible period in a special notification mode that is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characteristic game machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means has a special notification mode in which the allowable period is easier to identify than other lottery results. , there is an effect that the player can play the game by predicting the result of the lottery according to the notification mode.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the effect variable means receives the operation signal continuously for a predetermined period or more after the determination means receives the operation signal, and then receives the operation signal. A game machine G5 characterized in that the performance is variable when the game machine runs out.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the effect variable means continuously receives the operation signal for a predetermined period or longer after the determination means receives the operation signal. After that, when it is determined that the operation signal is no longer received, the effect is changed, so that the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed more.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
Display means for displaying a game effect, operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the effect based on the result of determination by the operation determination means. effect variable means for varying the effect, effect setting means for setting effect contents to be varied by the effect variable means according to the timing of operating the operation means, and based on the operation of the operation means, advantageous to the player a period setting means for setting at least a first period in which an effect content is set and a second period in which an effect content that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first period is set; A first notification mode in which the two periods are notified in a distinguishable manner and a different notification mode from the first notification mode, and at least the same as a second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner. A game machine H1 characterized by having a notifying means for notifying during a period.

The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. Namely, the effect variable means changes the effect of the game displayed by the display means based on the determination result of the player's operation by the operation means determined by the operation determination means. Next, based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means, the effect setting means sets the contents of the effect to be varied by the effect changing means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, a first period in which the contents of presentation advantageous to the player are set, and a second period in which contents of presentation more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set. are set by at least the period setting means. A first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner, and a second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner in a different notification mode from the first notification mode. are notified by the notification means at least during the same period. As a result, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easier for the player to understand can be provided.

In the game machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within the valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, so that the operation can be performed in the first period. There is an effect that it can be configured easily.

In the game machine H2, the first notification mode is characterized in that the transition of the period is displayed by changing the pattern according to a predetermined rule to notify the current period that is set. H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is displayed with variable patterns according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode is to notify the transition of the period by varying the symbols based on a randomly set rule.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the transition of the period is notified with variable symbols based on the rule set at random. There is an effect that a wide variety of performances can be provided to the person.

<Characteristic group I> (Overflow control)
A ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance, and information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the information Lottery means for performing a lottery when a lottery condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied; A ball entry variable means for changing between a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; and state setting means for setting a special state that is set to be more easily variable than the state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means is stored in the storage means. Based on the number of pieces of information, the dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed. The game machine I1 is characterized by comprising delay means for delaying establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period when the number of stored information is equal to or less than a predetermined number.

The game machine I1 has the following effects. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Next, until the lottery condition is established, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined number by the storage means. Also, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entrance and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are varied by the ball entry variable means. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the state setting means sets a special state that is more likely to be changed to the first state than the normal state in the normal state. Further, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode so that the dynamic display period of the identification information can be easily changed based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the special state is determined. When set, at least when the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, establishment of the lottery condition is delayed by the delay means for a predetermined period. As a result, the dynamic display period can be determined with a large amount of information stored in the storage means because the delay means delays the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means selects a dynamic display mode with a longer dynamic display period than the set number when the number of the information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the set number. The game machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than when a large number of values are stored.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, when the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the set number, the dynamic display mode determining means stores more information than the set number. Since a dynamic display mode with a long dynamic display period is more likely to be determined than in the case where dynamic display is performed, there is an effect that the period during which dynamic display is not performed can be set short.

In gaming machine I1 or I2, gaming machine I3 is characterized in that said delaying means delays a period longer than a period in which said entering variable means is varied from said second state to said first state. .

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than the period in which the ball entry variable means is changed from the second state to the first state, so that the There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined with a lot of information stored.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the ball entry variable means, in the case of being changed to the first state, has a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls for which the information is stored in the storage means can be entered. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being maintained in the first state below.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the ball entry variable means is changed to the first state, the number of games equal to or less than the predetermined number of games stored in the storage means is changed. Since the first state is maintained for a period equal to or shorter than the period during which the ball can enter, there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

<Feature J group> (shaking fluctuation concealment)
Lottery means for executing a lottery, display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode to be displayed dynamically; and when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. wherein the identification information indicates the lottery result of the lottery means by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode determination means. The display mode includes a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbols are temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again as a dynamic display of one lottery result, and the pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode. A game machine J1 characterized by comprising stationary pattern display means for superimposing and displaying a stationary pattern on the front side of the identification pattern when the identification pattern is temporarily stopped in the game machine J1.

The gaming machine J1 has the following effects. Namely, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means. The dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Then, when identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The identification information indicates the result of the lottery by the lottery means by combining a plurality of identification symbols. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means includes a pseudo-continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification pattern is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again as the dynamic display of the lottery result. When the identification pattern is temporarily stopped in the quasi-continuous dynamic display mode, the stationary pattern display means superimposes and displays the stationary pattern on the front side of the identification pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the temporarily stopped identification symbols are fixed and stopped by the stationary symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

In the game machine J1, the identification pattern is dynamically displayed by slightly changing the display position periodically when the game machine J1 is temporarily stopped.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is periodically changed slightly and dynamically displayed, so that the temporary stop is made. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the static symbols are displayed after the identification symbols are temporarily stopped, and are hidden before the identification symbols start dynamic display again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the static symbols are displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbols, and are hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbols is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the identification pattern can be configured so that the player can easily see it.

A gaming machine J4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stop-displayed in a predetermined order.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are stop-displayed in a predetermined order, so there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and the pseudo-continuous display mode is the The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that it is set so that it is easy to determine when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode based on the lottery results of the lottery means. In the quasi-continuous display mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is set to be easily determined when the lottery result is a specific lottery result. effective.

<Feature K group> (Make the winning rate of the normal electric chucker and the attacker the same, and if you narrow down the attacker, the normal electric prize will be higher)
A ball entry opening into which a game can be entered, and a ball entry variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is easily entered in the entry hole and a second state in which entry is more difficult than in the first state. Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific lottery result is determined by a game machine, wherein the opening into which the game ball can enter. and opening variable means for varying the opening between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, wherein the privilege game execution means sets the variable means to the open state. A ball enters the opening when the opening is in the closed state and the ball is in the first state. The game machine K1 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the information of the acquisition means acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. A first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the ball entrance and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are varied by the ball entry variable means. The opening is varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game execution means varies the variable means to the open state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the opening is in the closed state and the ball entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening can easily enter the ball entrance. placed in each position. As a result, the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening. A game machine K2 characterized in that it is configured to guide a ball.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the opening variable means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received by the upper surface of the wall member and entered. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, it is possible to construct the game ball to easily enter the game ball, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K2, guiding means for guiding a game ball from the wall member to the ball entrance is provided.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, there is an effect that the game ball can enter the ball entrance more efficiently.

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K3, shooting means for shooting the game balls into a game area;
and a shooting force adjustment means capable of adjusting the shooting force of the game ball shot by the shooting means based on the operation of the player, and the game ball shot from the shooting means is placed in the game area. At least a first region where the ball can flow down and a second region different from the first region are formed, and the opening is a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second region can enter , and the ball entrance is arranged at a position where game balls that have flowed down either the first area or the second area can be commonly entered. Game machine K4.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machines K1 to K3, it is possible to change the state of ball entry by the shooting force adjusting means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine K4, a special ball entrance into which the game ball flowing down the second area can be entered, and a privilege giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the special ball entrance. means, a first setting state in which the game ball flowing down the second region is easily guided to the opening and is difficult to be guided to the special ball entrance, and a game ball is hardly guided to the opening and is not guided to the special ball entrance. A game machine K5 characterized by comprising a setting means capable of being set to either a second setting state in which guidance is likely to occur.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, it is possible to vary the state of the game and provide the player with a fresh game.

The game machine K6 is characterized in that in the game machine K5, the setting means is configured to be able to set from the outside of the game machine.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, there is an effect that the setting can be changed by the setting means, and the taste of the game can be adjusted.

In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, a first adjustment state in which a game ball that has flowed down the second region is easily guided to the opening and is not easily guided to the ball entrance side, and a first adjustment state in which the game ball is not easily guided to the opening. , and a second adjustment state in which the ball is easily guided to the ball entrance side. According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K4 to K5, there is an effect that the gambling nature of the game can be adjusted by adjusting the adjustment means.

<Characteristic group L> (Loop twice with V attacker)
A first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means capable of changing from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the first ball-entering. a first determination means for determining based on the entry of a game ball into the means; A special state setting means for setting a special state that is easily changed, a second determination means for making a determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and a determination result of the second determination means. A third ball entering means for allowing the ball to enter when the second determination result is obtained, a specific area through which the game ball entered by the third ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area. bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player has played the game; and right storage means capable of storing at least two rights for which the judgment is executed by the second judgment means by the special state setting means. and determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the determination result of the second determining means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine that displays various effect images including variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to increase the interest of the game. The variable effect is a effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (starting winning) is established in the starting port. A total of nine symbols or the like displayed on the squares of ×3 are variably displayed, and when the variative display is stopped, the symbols or the like to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position form a predetermined combination. In such a case, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given to the player.

Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability of being awarded a predetermined game value such as a big hit by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them are equipped with a probability variation function. In some cases, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given at least twice (for example, JP-A-9-140880), which is intended to improve the interest of the game.

However, the game machine described above is novel only in that it wins twice when it enters the variable probability, and the other game characteristics are the same as those of the conventional game machine, and there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game. rice field.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the predetermined first determination result is selected by the first determination means, thereby providing a special state in which the determination by the second determination means is likely to be received, and furthermore, the second determination means After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by the second judging means, the judging by the second judging means is carried out after providing an amusing game property in which a big win is given for the first time by passing the game ball through the specific area. By storing the right to do so, even if the special state is once shifted to the normal state, the determination by the stored second determination means can be executed. Therefore, when the game state is far from the big win (shifted from the special state to the normal state), the player is given at least another chance to win the big win, so that the player can enjoy the game until the end while expecting the big win. There is an effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the second ball-entering means is arranged upstream of the third ball-entering means, and during at least a part of the period during which a game ball can enter the third ball-entering means , and the first state.

In the gaming machine L1 described above, in order to ensure that the determination by the second determination means is performed in the special state, the control is performed so that the second ball entry means is in the second state in which the ball is easily entered. A problem arose that the ball entering the third ball-entering means was blocked by the second ball-entering means in the state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the second ball-entering means is closed (retracted) during the period in which the third ball-entering means is allowed to enter. , the ball can be smoothly entered into the third ball entering means without hindrance.

In the game machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball-entering means to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means determines when the special state is set. Based on this, the game machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is set so as to be easy to determine until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine L2 described above is capable of smoothly entering the game ball into the third ball entering means. At the same time, a configuration for ensuring reserved memory of the design had to be achieved.

On the other hand, the game machine L3 has control for setting the period of dynamic display for changing the second ball entering means to the second state shorter in the special state than in the normal state.

With this control, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, predetermined conditions (for example, opening of the third ball-entering means, elapse of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of balls entering the second ball-entering means, reaching the upper limit of reserved memory, etc.) is established, the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means is prioritized, and after the prescribed condition is established, the entry of the game ball into the third ball entry means is prioritized. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played smoothly.

In the game machine L2, a third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball-entering means to the second state, and a display capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. means, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has passed, and variable control means for varying the second ball-entering means to the second state when the identification information indicating the determination result for varying to the second state is displayed; The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the second ball-entering means is varied to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is established based on the setting of the special state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control to change the second ball-entering means to the second state for a long period of time until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as the machine L3 can be obtained.

A gaming machine L5 in the gaming machine L3 or L4, characterized in that the predetermined condition is established before the third ball entering means becomes capable of entering a ball.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to reliably satisfy the predetermined condition before the third ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball. It is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the means.

In any one of game machines L3 to L5, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of said second determination means on said display means; and a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determining means determines at least the first time after the special state is set. A game machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set for the dynamic display of (1).

With the gaming machine L5 described above, a smooth game is possible with respect to the ball entering the third ball entering means. However, in the gaming machine according to the present technical idea, it is possible to store at least two rights to execute the judgment by the second judgment means in the game in the special state. A new problem arises that depending on the timing, it is not possible to store at least two rights for execution of determination by the second determination means. In other words, if a big hit based on the determination result of the second determination means is provided before the second ball-entering means is set to the second state as the determination result of the third determination means during the special state, the special game is the second. A problem arises in that the second ball-entering means ends before the second state is reached, and the right to newly execute the determination by the second determination means cannot be stored.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first second dynamic display (second In order to set the period of 2 special symbol variable display) longer than the dynamic display (ordinary symbol variable display) time, the dynamic display is completed before the first second dynamic display is completed, and the second dynamic display is completed. The second ball-entering means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned new problem and ensure the characteristic playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in the game machines L1 to L6, the third ball entry means causes the game balls to pass through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of the game balls enter.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entry means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation where the third ball-entering means ends immediately and the player loses interest, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L7, the third ball entry means allows the game balls to pass through the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls enter the state 1 in which the ball can be entered. A gaming machine L8 characterized by:

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entry means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation where the third ball-entering means ends immediately and the player loses interest, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L7 or L8, the third ball entry means includes regulation means for regulating the passage of game balls to the specific area, and the entry of the predetermined number of game balls causes the regulation means to A game machine L9 characterized by comprising variable means for changing to a released state in which a game ball can pass through a specific area.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L7 or L8, the game balls entering the third ball entering means do not pass through the specific area until the number reaches a predetermined number, so the third ball entering means It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ends immediately and the player loses interest, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A variable member that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which game balls cannot enter the specific area in any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6; Based on the variable control means for varying the variable member and the judgment result of the first judgment means being the specific judgment result, the ball can be entered into the third ball entry means, and the first judgment means When it is determined that the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member to be variable to the regulated state for a period during which the third ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball, When the second determination means determines that the second determination result is obtained, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period during which the game ball can enter the specific area. A gaming machine L10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the ball into the third ball-entering means even when the first judging means gives a specific judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which a ball is entered into the third ball-entering means regardless of the determination result of either the first determining means or the second determining means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not to set the special state by the special state setting means based on the result of the second determination. Characteristic game machine L11.

According to the game machine L11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines L1 to L10, it is determined whether or not to set the special state when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. Therefore, by grasping that there is a possibility of entering a special state due to the fact that the third ball-entering means has become possible, the player can have expectations for the previous game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the result of the second determination or the result of determination that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state itself in which the determination by the second determination means is performed becomes an advantageous state for the player. Amusement machines can be provided.

A gaming machine L13 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game also based on the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, a privilege game is executed even with the first determination result, so it is possible to provide an interesting gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means allows a game ball to enter a fourth ball entering means different from the third ball entering means as the privilege game. Characteristic game machine L14.

According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, a game is played toward four ball entering means. Since a ball shooting game is played, it is possible to provide a game machine full of interest.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means comprises a ball entry portion into which the game ball can enter and a guiding position capable of guiding the game ball to enter the ball entry portion. A gaming machine L15 characterized by comprising a non-guiding position at which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a guiding member that can be changed to a non-guiding position.

In order to make the best use of the playability of the gaming machine of this technical idea, there is a problem that the second ball-entering means must be configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball in the first state and easy to enter in the second state.

According to the game machine L15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L14, a guide member is provided in the second ball-entering means, and the guide member can be changed between the guide position and the non-guide position. By doing so, it becomes difficult to enter a ball in the first state and easy to enter a ball in the second state, and there is an effect that it is possible to take advantage of the game characteristics of the game machine.

In the game machine L15, the guide member has a first area capable of receiving a falling game ball and a second area capable of allowing a game ball rolling from the first area to roll into the ball entry portion. , and is configured so that a game ball that rolls to the second area can enter the ball entry portion.

According to the game machine L16, in addition to the effects of the game machine L15, the guide member is composed of the first area and the second area, and the ball can be entered from the second area to the ball entry section. Even if the ball entry part is provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball falling on the game board to enter the game board in the non-guiding position, the ball cannot enter the ball entering part when the guiding member is in the guiding position. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier and that the game characteristics of the game machine can be utilized.

In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the induction member is in the second state for a period longer than the rolling period required for the game ball received in the first area to enter the ball entering portion. , and when the special state is not set, the state is changed to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period.

According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L16, the period in which the induction member is varied from the non-guiding position to the guiding position is set so that the game ball on the guiding member enters when the special state is set. Since it is possible to set a period in which it is easy for a ball to enter the area and a period in which it is difficult for the game ball on the induction member to enter the ball in the area if no special state is set, this game machine can be used. There is an effect that it becomes possible to take advantage of the playability.

In any one of game machines L1 to L17, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means; A second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period in which information is dynamically displayed; and pre-privilege game execution means for executing a pre-game, wherein the second dynamic display period determination means determines the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. and the length of the pre-privilege game period is determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. It is something to do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by:

In the gaming machine of this technical idea, when the judgment result of the second judging means is the second judgment result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately, but the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determining means is dynamically displayed, there is a problem that it is desirable to make the player expect as much as possible until just before the big winning game is provided. Surfaced. In other words, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means will be displayed before the pre-privilege game based on the second determination result is executed. There is a problem that the player recognizes it and loses interest in the game during the execution of the pre-privilege game.

According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result until the jackpot game is provided, and the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result the length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than the are made equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the judgment result of the second judging means until the end of the pre-privilege game.

A second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result, wherein the predetermined determination result is the A game machine L19, wherein the determination result of the second determination means is a determination result that the second privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L18, it is possible to display the big win based on the judgment by the second judging means at the same timing, so that the player can enjoy the dynamic display until the end. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By differentiating the privilege given to the player for the big win based on the second determination result and the big win based on the predetermined determination result, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine L19, an effect executing means for executing effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying the effect executed by the effect executing means, The effect executing means displays a second determination result effect corresponding to the second determination result and a pre-privilege game effect corresponding to the pre-privilege game on the display body, and the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L20, wherein at least a part of the second determination result effect is used when the effect corresponding to the determination result obtained is displayed on the display body.

Generally, in a game machine, an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations is executed using a display (for example, a liquid crystal device) so that the player can grasp it. Then, the player is happy and sad while grasping the content of the effect display displayed on the display body. Also in the game machine of this technical concept, there has been a demand for an effect display suitable for game playability.

According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L19, part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game will be executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game will be executed. By using the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game is to be executed only by a part of the effect contents displayed on the display body, and the effect contents displayed to the player. It is possible to make the player interested in all of them, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine L20, the second determination result effect includes a second determination result dynamic display effect corresponding to the time when the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and a second determination result dynamic display effect corresponding to the time when the second identification information is confirmed and displayed. and a second determination result dynamic display finalization effect corresponding to the fact that the effect execution means executes the effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L21 characterized by using at least an effect during dynamic display of the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L20, when executing an effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the effect during the dynamic display of the second determination result is partly included. By using this, a common effect will be performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determining means is started, and the player will be able to see which part of the effect content displayed on the display body is just the start part. It is not possible to grasp whether the special game will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all the contents of the presentation displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be. Moreover, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege game effect includes a pre-privilege in-game effect corresponding to the time when the pre-privilege game is being performed, and a privilege game confirmation effect corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the specific area. When the effect execution means executes the effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the effect during the game before the privilege game is used at least for a part thereof. Game machine L22.

According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L21, in the case of executing the performance corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed, the pre-privilege in-game performance is used as part of it. As a result, a common effect is performed in the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can determine which privilege game is played only by the final stage of the effect content displayed on the display. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in all the contents of the presentation displayed without being able to grasp whether it will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game. Moreover, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

In gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect executing means performs a first notification effect for notifying that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means is the A second notification effect for notifying that the second privilege game is determined to be executed is executed, and after the effect execution means executes the effect, the first notification effect or the second notification effect A game machine L23 characterized in that the timing of executing and is set to be the same.

According to the game machine L23, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines L20 to L22, the timing of displaying the effect of notifying the determination result of the second determination means is made to be the same, so that the player can grasp the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being played, and the interest in the game can be improved.

By providing two or all of the configurations of game machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be obtained.

<Feature M group> (performs hiding during Let's Mambo)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first condition, information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination based on the information stored in the information storage means determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means based on the establishment of a second condition; and the identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means. a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed; a preliminary determination means for determining the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied; specific effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means; With respect to the information determined to execute the specific performance by the specific performance determination means, from a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied and information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied. and a specific performance regulation means for regulating execution of the specific performance with respect to the information stored before the information that is stored later and triggered the determination of the execution of the specific performance. A gaming machine M1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine that displays various effect images including variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to increase the interest of the game. The variable effect is a effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (starting winning) is established in the starting port. A total of nine symbols or the like displayed on the squares of ×3 are variably displayed, and when the variative display is stopped, the symbols or the like to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position form a predetermined combination. In such a case, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability of being awarded a predetermined game value such as a big hit by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them are equipped with a probability variation function. In some cases, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given at least twice (for example, JP-A-9-140880), which is intended to improve the interest of the game. However, the gaming machine described above only makes the player interested in the big win, and there is a problem that the fluctuation display, which is a failure, reduces the interest in the game. There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege granting means grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The pre-determination means determines the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is established. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute the specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means. It is determined by the determination means whether or not a predetermined condition is established for the information determined to execute the specific effect by the specific effect determination means. The information stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied and before the information that triggered the determination of execution of the specific effect is subjected to a specific Execution of performance is regulated by specific performance regulation means.

As a result, the execution of the specific performance is regulated for the information stored after the information in which the predetermined condition is established among the information for which the specific performance has been determined, so that the specific performance continues. A specific effect can be executed again after making the user think that the effect executed by pressing has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

Dynamic display mode determination for determining one dynamic display mode as a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the game machine M1 based on the information stored in the information storage means. wherein the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the information is for determining a specific dynamic display mode. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the information stored in the information storage means. The determining means determines that a predetermined condition is established when the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the information is information for determining a specific dynamic display mode. As a result, by displaying the specific dynamic display mode, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that the specific presentation has ended.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determination means determines execution of the specific effect based on the determination by the prior determination means that the information is for determining the specific dynamic display mode. A game machine M3 characterized in that it

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the pre-determination means determines that the information determines the specific dynamic display mode. Since it is determined by the determination means, the player is made to recognize early that a specific dynamic display mode will be executed in any one of continuous holding fluctuations when a specific performance is executed, and the amusement of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is started for the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 characterized by having start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determination means determines to execute a specific effect, the already stored information is Since the information for starting execution of the specific performance is determined by a predetermined lottery by the start information determining means, the number of times the specific performance is continuously executed can be randomized and various performances can be provided to the players. has the effect of

In any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulation means stores information after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is established, and execution of the specific effect is determined. The information that is stored consecutively for a predetermined number of times from the information that is stored next to the information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition among the information that is stored before the information that triggers the information. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that it regulates the specific effect with respect to.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulation means is stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is established. Among the information stored before the information that triggered the determination of the execution of a specific effect, the information that is determined to satisfy a predetermined condition is consecutively stored a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information. Since the specific performance is regulated by the specific performance regulating means with respect to the information stored in the game, the continuous number of specific performances is regulated, and the player's expectation that the specific performance will be executed again can be increased. has the effect of

The game machine M6, wherein the specific effect regulation means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery in the game machine M5.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M5, the predetermined number of times is determined by a lottery by the specific regulation means, so that the number of times the specific performance is regulated can be made random and the interest of the player is improved. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines M1 to M6 is characterized by having suggestive effect executing means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect with respect to the dynamic display of the information for which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Gaming machine M7.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggested effect is provided as a suggested effect for the dynamic display of the information for which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect control means. Since it is executed by the executing means, there is an effect that the player can have an expectation that the specific effect will continue by the suggestive effect.

<N group of features> (The number of times of incubation after Let's Mambo is determined by the number of holds at the start of Let's Mambo)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a first condition, information storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination based on the information stored in the information storage means determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means based on the establishment of a second condition; and the identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed;
Prior determination means for determining the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied; a performance determining means for determining execution of a continuous performance for executing a specific performance each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed for the information that is displayed; At a predetermined opportunity until the end of the dynamic display of the discriminated information, a suggestion is made to the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the discriminated information. A game machine N1 characterized by having a suggestive effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine such as a pachinko machine that displays various effect images including variable effects on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to increase the interest of the game. The variable effect is a effect that is performed when a starting condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (starting winning) is established in the starting port. A total of nine symbols or the like displayed on the squares of ×3 are variably displayed, and when the variative display is stopped, the symbols or the like to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position form a predetermined combination. In such a case, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given to the player. Many of such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability variation) that increases the probability of being awarded a predetermined game value such as a big hit by satisfying a predetermined condition, and some of them are equipped with a probability variation function. In some cases, a predetermined game value such as a big win is given at least twice (for example, JP-A-9-140880), which is intended to improve the interest of the game. However, the gaming machine described above only makes the player interested in the big win, and there is a problem that the fluctuation display, which is a failure, reduces the interest in the game. There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games.

According to the gaming machine N1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the information storage means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The information stored in the information storage means is judged by the advance judgment means before the second condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means, execution of continuous performance for executing a specific performance each time the dynamic display of identification information is executed for the information already stored in the information storage means. is determined by the performance determining means. At a predetermined opportunity until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to execute the continuous performance by the performance determination means, the motion of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information. The suggestive effect determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect for the target display. As a result, since the suggestive performance is executed even after the continuous performance is finished, the player can be made to think that the continuous performance is continuing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of consecutive performances is greater than the actual number of consecutive performances, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine N1, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means as the dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. determining means, and the effect determining means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means by the prior determining means, the continuous A gaming machine N2 characterized in that it is determined to execute an effect.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the advance determining means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is information determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the continuous effect is executed by the effect determining means. Since the target display mode is performed, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly recognize that the specific dynamic display mode is to be performed by the start of the continuous presentation.

In the game machine N1 or N2, the game machine N3 is characterized in that the suggestive effect is an effect that is also executed for a predetermined period before the start of the continuous effect.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1 or N2, the suggestive performance is executed for a predetermined period before the start of the continuous performance, so that the continuous performance is started by executing the suggestive performance. There is an effect that the player can expect the

In any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the game machine is characterized by comprising a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of consecutive times by lottery when the suggestive effect determining means determines that the suggestive effect is to be executed. N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines N1 to N3, when the suggestion performance determination means determines that the suggestion performance is executed, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number determination means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestive effect is performed can be made random, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristics P group> (A series of presentation modes are started by button operation, and the presentation mode is changed by invalid operation)
production means capable of executing production, production execution means capable of causing the production means to execute a specific production in accordance with a predetermined first production pattern, operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means; signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means; and the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. a possible state determining means for determining whether or not the effect executing means is capable of causing the effect executing means to start executing the specific effect, and the possible state determining means by the possible state determining means Based on the fact that it is determined, the production control means for starting the execution of the specific production by the production execution means, and the information based on the fact that it is determined that the possible state determination means is not the possible state Specific condition a specific condition determining means for determining the establishment of a specific condition, and an effect for changing a first effect pattern of the specific effect to a different second effect pattern based on the determination that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining means. A gaming machine P1 characterized by having variable means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a player operates an operation means (such as a production button) to execute a role-driven production that moves a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position. There is (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as the production button) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the performance driven performance), a new performance driven performance is produced. There is a problem that the performance effect of the performance driven performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means (performance button, etc.) is lowered. In addition, there is a problem that the action (for example, action time, etc.) of the ornament cannot be matched to the taste of the player, and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, a specific effect is executed in a predetermined first effect pattern by the effect executing means in the effect means capable of executing the effect, and the player can operate. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output by the predetermined signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the variable state determination means determines whether or not it is possible to cause the effect means to start executing the specific effect. Execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means is started by the effect control means based on the fact that the variable state determination means determines that it is in the possible state. On the other hand, based on the fact that the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established based on the information based on the fact that the possible state determination means determines that the state is not possible, the effect variable means changes the first effect pattern of the specific effect. It is changed to a different second effect pattern.

Thus, it is possible to change the performance pattern of the specific performance from the first performance pattern to the second performance pattern based on the determination that the specific performance based on the operation of the operating means cannot be executed. Therefore, the effect pattern of the specific effect to be executed next can be varied based on the operation of the operation means that was unable to execute the specific effect, so that the effect to be executed based on the operation of the operation means can be changed. There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine P1, the second performance pattern is set with a performance period shorter than that of the first performance pattern.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second effect pattern is set in a shorter effect period than the first effect pattern, the effect period of the specific effect can be shortened by executing the second effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means in a single period, so that the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operating means is obtained. be. Furthermore, even when the operating means are continuously operated for a short period of time, the chances of starting the execution of the specific effect increase, and the player feels that the specific effect can be started by operating the operating means. can be given more, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect patterns are selected from at least two effect parts among the plurality of effect parts. A game machine P3 characterized in that it is one that executes an effect for.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect pattern causes at least two effect parts to execute effects among the plurality of effect parts, the operation Various effects can be executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect execution means causes any one of the plurality of effect parts to perform the A game machine P4 characterized by being capable of executing a specific performance.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the specific effect is executed in an arbitrary effect part among the plurality of effect parts by the effect execution means.

As a result, various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine P4, the possible state determining means determines the possible state when there is at least one effect section capable of starting the effect in the effect pattern by the effect executing means. A game machine P5 characterized by.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is at least one effect part capable of starting the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means, the possible state determination means determines that the possible state is present.

Thereby, when at least one of the plurality of effect sections is in the enabled state, the specific effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means in a single period, so that the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operating means is obtained. be.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the specific condition is characterized in that the number of times the possible state determination means determines that the possible state is not established is set as at least one establishment condition. Game machine P6.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the possible state is not established is set as at least one of the conditions for establishing the specific condition.

Thereby, the specific condition is established based on the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the state is not possible, that is, the number of times that the specific performance is not executed by the performance executing means despite the operation of the operating means. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively operate the operating means, and it is possible to enhance the player's desire to play.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P6, the specific condition is set to at least one fulfillment condition of the number of times the possible state determination means determines that the possible state is not possible within a predetermined period of time. A game machine P7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P6, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination means determines that the possible state is not possible within a predetermined period is set as at least one of the establishment conditions under which the specific condition is established.

As a result, the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means despite the number of times the possible state determination means determines that the possible state is not possible within a predetermined period, that is, the operation means is operated within the predetermined period. It is possible to establish a specific condition based on the number of times that a request has not been made. Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively operate the operating means, and it is possible to enhance the player's desire to play.

Effect pattern selection for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of different second effect patterns based on determination that the specific condition has been established by the specific condition determination means in any one of the game machines P1 to P7. A game machine P8 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of different second effect patterns by the effect pattern selection means based on the fact that the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established.

Thus, when the effect pattern of the specific effect is changed, a plurality of effect patterns can be executed, so various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine P8, the performance pattern selecting means selects the second performance pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the possible state is not possible.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P8, the second production pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the game machine P8 is not in the possible state is selected. The game can be executed in a way that is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine P8 or P9, wherein the plurality of different second effect patterns are set such that at least the effect periods are different.

According to the game machine P10, in addition to the effects of the game machine P8 or P9, a plurality of different second effect patterns are set with at least different effect periods. You can have different periods of time. As a result, it is possible to vary the number of times the specific performance can be executed in a single period, so that there is an effect that the performance effect of the performance executed based on the operation of the operating means can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P10, the effect means has at least a movable member, and the effect execution means controls the movable member to correspond to the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern. A gaming machine P11 characterized by being movable in a corresponding movable pattern.

According to the gaming machine P11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means has at least a movable member, and the effect execution means moves the movable member in a movable pattern corresponding to each of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern.

As a result, it is possible to cause the movable member that moves based on the operation of the operation means to execute the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. has the effect of

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect units capable of executing effects, and the effect execution means executes the specific effect for each of the plurality of effect units. A gaming machine P12 characterized in that it can be executed, and the plurality of effect sections are set with different effect periods as the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine P12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect executing means executes a specific effect for each of the plurality of effect parts. A different performance period is set for each of the plurality of performance sections.

As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a plurality of effect parts having different effect periods based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine P12 has elapsed period determination means for determining the elapse of the operation period set in each of the plurality of effect sections, and the possible state determination means determines the elapsed period among the plurality of effect sections. A game machine P13 characterized in that a means determines that an effect portion in which the operation period has passed is in the possible state.

According to the gaming machine P13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the elapse of the performance period set for each of the plurality of performance sections is determined by the elapsed period determination means, and the performance section determined that the operation period has passed is determined to be in the possible state by the possible state determination means. As a result, among a plurality of effect parts set with different effect periods, the effect part whose operation period has elapsed can start to operate at the timing when the operation means is operated, and the game can be played even if the operation means is operated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which the performance is not executed on the machine side.

<Feature Q group> (Variable effect execution timing by invalid button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means. and a plurality of effect means capable of executing effects, and at least one of the plurality of effect means with a predetermined first effect pattern based on the predetermined signal being determined by the signal determination means. and an effect executing means capable of causing two or more of the effect means to execute a specific effect, wherein the effect executing means is provided in advance when the two or more effect means execute the specific effect. At least one of the two or more effect means is caused to wait for execution of effect for a predetermined waiting period, and the signal discriminating means receives the predetermined signal during the standby period. A game machine Q1, characterized in that it causes at least one of the waiting means for effecting to start executing the effect based on the action.

In a game machine such as a game machine or a pachinko machine, a player operates an operation means (a production button, etc.) to execute a role-driven production in which a plurality of decorations are moved from a standby position to a predetermined operation position. There is a thing (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97827).

In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as the production button) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the performance driven performance), a new performance driven performance is produced. There is a problem that the performance effect of the performance driven performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means (performance button, etc.) is lowered. Further, it is conceivable to operate the other decorations when the operating means is operated while one of the plurality of decorations is operating. Even in this case, if all of the ornaments are activated due to the operation of the operation means being executed multiple times in a short period of time, even if the player operates the operation means (such as the effect button), There is a problem that a new role-driven effect cannot be executed and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Based on the fact that a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, a specific effect is given to at least two or more effect means among a plurality of effect means capable of executing the effect in accordance with a predetermined first effect pattern. It is executed by the performance executing means.

Then, when the specific performance is executed by the two or more performance means, at least one performance means out of the two or more performance means is put on standby for execution of the performance for a predetermined waiting period, The performance execution means starts the execution of the performance for at least one waiting performance means based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discrimination means during the waiting period.

Thus, even when execution of a specific effect is started for a plurality of effect means by operating the operation means, at least one effect means is waiting for execution of the specific effect, and the operation means is on standby during the standby period. Since the standby is terminated and the specific performance is executed by the operation, even if the player operates the operation means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period in which the execution of the specific performance is not started, and the operation is performed. The performance effect of the performance executed based on the operation of the means can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the game machine Q1, the standby period is longer than the shortest period in which the signal output means can output the predetermined signal for each operation when the operation means is operated continuously. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being set by.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the signal output means can output a predetermined signal in response to each operation when the operation means are operated continuously during the standby period. Since the period is set to be longer than the shortest period, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period even when the operation means is operated continuously.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, interval determination means for determining an interval at which the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal, storage means capable of storing information determined by the interval determination means, and storage in the storage means and period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the received information.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the interval determination means determines the interval at which the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal. Information determined by the interval determination means is stored in the storage means. The waiting period is variably set by the period setting means based on the information stored in the storage means.

As a result, although the interval at which the player operates the operation means differs depending on the player, the interval at which the operation is performed is determined by the interval determination means, and the information is stored. , frequency, etc. can be stored. Furthermore, since the waiting period is variably set by the setting means based on the information stored in the storage means, the waiting period can be varied according to the situation in which the player operates the operating means, thereby making it more suitable for the player. It can be in the state of a game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved. note that. Even if the information is not stored in the storage means, the setting means variably sets the standby period directly based on the information determined by the interval determination means, and the appropriate standby period is set each time the operation is performed. Even if it is configured, there is an effect that it can be set so as to perform a more optimal effect.

In any one of game machines Q1 to Q3, valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validating the discrimination when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means; and invalidity determining means for determining the information determined by the signal determining means before the predetermined signal is set before the period is set.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the valid period during which the discrimination is valid is set by the valid period setting means. Before the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, the information that the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means is determined by the invalid determining means.

Thus, when the operation means is operated, even if the operation is operated before the effective period for judging the operation as valid is set, the invalid determination means makes the determination. There is an effect that it is possible to determine that there is a habit of starting the operation of the operation means from before.

The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the gaming machine Q5 further comprises regulation means for regulating waiting by the effect execution means based on the fact that the information judged by the invalidity judgment means is the specific information.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidity determining means is the specific information, the waiting by the effect executing means is restricted by the restricting means. If the information determined by the means is specific information (for example, invalidity was not determined during a predetermined period (such as 5 seconds) before the start of the valid period), the waiting is restricted by the restriction means. The specific performance is started by operating the operation means at the same timing without setting the performance means waiting for the specific performance by judging in advance that the player is likely not to operate the means continuously. This has the effect of providing the player with an effect with a greater sense of unity.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the effect means has at least a plurality of movable members capable of moving within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means includes at least two movable members among the plurality of movable members. can be moved based on the first effect pattern.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a plurality of movable members capable of moving at least a predetermined range are provided as effect means. At least two or more movable members among the plurality of movable members are moved by the effect execution means based on the first effect pattern.

As a result, it is possible to move a plurality of movable members by one operation, so that there is an effect that a powerful presentation can be provided to the player.

<Characteristics R group> (Rewind control of a series of production modes by button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means. and, based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the effect means is caused to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern. possible effect execution means, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect execution means, based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means, the second The game machine R1 is characterized by comprising an effect variable means for causing the specific effect to be executed by the effect execution means in a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern.

A game machine such as a game machine or a pachinko machine, in which a player operates an operation means (such as a production button) to execute a performance that drives a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position. There is (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

In such a conventional gaming machine, even if the player operates the operating means (such as the production button) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the performance driven performance), a new performance driven performance is produced. There is a problem that the performance effect of the performance driven performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means (performance button, etc.) is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, the signal output means outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the specific effect by the effect means capable of executing the effect with the predetermined first effect pattern is executed by the effect executing means.

Then, when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, at least the first effect pattern is reversed from the predetermined effect position of the first effect pattern based on the fact that the signal determining means has determined the predetermined signal. It is varied by the effect variable means so that the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in the second effect pattern which executes a part.

Thus, when the specific performance is executed in the first performance pattern by the operation of the operation means, even if the operation means is further operated, the specific performance is executed by changing to the second performance pattern. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which there is no reaction to the operation of the operation means, and to enhance the effect of the presentation executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the second production pattern is composed of a production pattern in which at least part of the first production pattern is executed in a reverse direction.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the second production pattern is composed of a production pattern in which at least a part of the first production pattern is executed in the opposite direction, so that the production of the first production pattern is achieved. It can be executed by setting the data in the opposite direction, and there is an effect that different effects can be easily executed.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the effect variable means changes the first effect pattern in the opposite direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A game machine R3 characterized in that at least part of it is executed as the second effect pattern.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1 or R2, the effect variable means is executed at the timing when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Since at least a part of the first performance pattern is executed as the second performance pattern, the second performance pattern is smoothly connected to the second performance pattern at the timing when the operating means is operated, and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be suppressed. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect variable means, when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern and the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal, The game machine R4 is characterized in that the specific performance is executed with the first performance pattern from the performance position of the first performance pattern corresponding to the performance position executed with the second performance pattern.

According to the game machine R4, in any one of the game machines R1 to R3, the effect variable means, when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, when the signal determining means determines a predetermined signal, is to execute the specific effect with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position executed with the second effect pattern. The second performance pattern corresponding to the rewinding of the performance pattern is finished, and the first performance pattern in the forward direction is set, and the direction of execution of the first performance pattern can be switched by the player's operation, and the interest of the game can be further improved. has the effect of

In any one of the game machines R1 to R4, the second effect pattern is set in a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the reverse direction during a predetermined specific effect period, and the effect variable The means, based on the execution of the second effect pattern for the specified period, performs the specified effect with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern has ended. The game machine R5 is characterized in that it is a machine for executing an effect.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the reverse direction during the effect period of the predetermined specific period, and the effect variable means is configured so that the second effect pattern is set during the specific period. Based on the execution, the specific performance is executed with the first performance pattern from the performance position of the first performance pattern corresponding to the performance position where the second performance pattern has ended, so that the specific performance is more closely related to the first performance pattern. There is an effect that the switching to the second production pattern can be performed smoothly, and an production that suppresses discomfort can be provided.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5 has an execution period determination means for determining an elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the effect variable means receives the determination result of the execution period determination means. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the specific performance is executed in the second performance pattern based on the above.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines R1 to R5, the elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means is determined by the execution period determination means. Since the effect variable means executes the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, the first effect pattern can be automatically switched to the second effect pattern. , there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation.

In the gaming machine R6, the effect means is movable means capable of moving within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means has a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position as the specific effect. The movable means executes an effect reciprocating to and from the effect position, and the effect variable means causes the specific effect to move from the first effect position to the second effect position by the execution period determination means. A game machine R7 characterized in that, when it is determined that it is a period during which an effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effects of the game machine R6, the following effects are produced. That is, the performance execution means causes the movable means to execute a performance reciprocating between a predetermined first performance position and a second performance position different from the first performance position as the specific performance. The effect variable means performs the specific effect in the second effect pattern when the execution period determining means determines that the specific effect is a period during which the effect is being executed from the first effect position to the second effect position. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determining means determines that the elapsed period during which the specific effect is being executed has not passed a predetermined period, the variable regulation for regulating the execution of the effect varying means. A game machine R8 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R6 or R7, when it is determined by the execution period determining means that the elapsed period during which the specific rendering is being executed has not passed the predetermined period, the rendering is variable. Since the execution of the means is regulated by the variable regulation means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the production pattern is frequently switched and the entertainment of the production is spoiled.

In any one of the game machines R5 to R8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect for the plurality of effect means, and the effect variable means determines the execution period among the plurality of effect means. A gaming machine R9 characterized in that it causes at least one of said effect means to execute said specific effect in said second effect pattern based on a determination result by said means.

According to the game machine R9, in addition to the effects of the game machines R5 to R8, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means for the plurality of effect means. The effect variable means causes at least one effect means to execute a specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result by the execution period determination means among the plurality of effect means.

As a result, a plurality of effect means can be changed to the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determination means, and various effects can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R9, the effect execution means executes the specific effect for the plurality of effect means, and the effect variable means selects the second effect among the plurality of effect means. The game machine R10 is characterized in that the performance means having a short performance period executed as a pattern is caused to execute the specific performance in the second performance pattern.

According to the game machine R10, in addition to the effects of the game machines R1 to R9, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect execution means executes a specific effect for a plurality of effect means, and the effect variable means is for effect means having a short effect period executed as the second effect pattern among the plurality of effect means. Since the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, there is an effect that an invalid state when the operation means is operated can be suppressed.

<Feature S group> (Coordinate multiple movable positions and movable non-execution timing according to the edge of the production)
A performance means capable of executing a performance, a specific performance executing means for causing the performance means to execute a specific performance in a predetermined period, an operation means capable of being operated by a player, and the operation means being operated. signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the above; signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means; a plurality of movable members movable within a predetermined movable range; moving means for moving at least one movable member among the plurality of movable members based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when a specific effect is being executed; and the signal a movable mode variable means for varying the movable mode of the movable member to be moved when the specific effect being executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the determination means is within a specific elapsed period; and prohibiting means for prohibiting movement by said moving means based on said signal determining means determining said predetermined signal when said specific elapsed period has passed. S1.

A game machine such as a game machine or a pachinko machine, in which a player operates an operation means (such as a production button) to execute a performance that drives a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operation position. There is (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that if the decoration body is operated based on the operation of the operating means regardless of the duration of the presentation, the game loses sharpness and the player's interest cannot be improved. In addition, when all of the plurality of decorations are in an operating state, even if the player operates the operating means (such as the effect button), the operation of the new decoration cannot be executed. There is a problem that the performance effect of the performance that operates the decoration executed based on the operation of the means (performance button, etc.) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in a period predetermined by the effect means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discrimination means.

When the specific effect is executed, at least one movable member among the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means. A movable mode of a movable member to be moved when a performance elapsed period of a specific performance being executed when a predetermined signal is discriminated by a signal discriminating means is within a specified elapsed period is varied by a movable mode varying means. On the other hand, when the specific elapsed time has passed, the prohibiting means prohibits movement by the movable means based on the signal discriminating means discriminating a predetermined signal.

As a result, when the performance elapsed period of the specific performance is within the specified elapsed period, the movable state of the movable member is varied based on the operation of the operating means, and when the specified elapsed period is exceeded, it is based on the operation of the operating means. Since the movement of the movable member is prohibited, it is possible to perform an effective effect in which the movable member is moved only within a specific elapsed period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sharp performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S1, the movable mode changing means moves the plurality of movable members to respective predetermined positions when the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal within the specific elapsed time period. A game machine S2 characterized in that it is movable by a movable means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the movable mode changing means predetermines a plurality of movable members when the signal determining means determines a predetermined signal within a specific elapsed period. Since it is moved by the movable means to each of the predetermined positions, the movable member can be made to perform a certain movement by operating the operating means within the specific performance period. There is an effect that a novel impression can be given to the player.

In the game machine S1 or S2, the movable means selects at least one movable member out of a plurality of movable members based on the fact that a predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminator even after a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period. to a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is based on the fact that the signal discrimination means does not discriminate a predetermined signal even after a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period has passed. Since at least one movable member among a plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position, even a player who operates the operation means less frequently can enjoy the specific performance effectively. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines S1 to S3, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result determined by the determination means. and a privilege granting means for granting, wherein the specific effect is to execute a notification effect based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. Based on the fact that the determination means has determined that the result of determination is a specific determination result, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. A notification effect based on the determination result by the determination means is executed in a specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the notification effect executed in the specific effect, and the player's interest in the specific effect can be increased.

In the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is to execute the notification effect within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has passed.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is executed within a predetermined period of time after the specific elapsed period has passed, so the notification effect is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to notify the player that the notification effect is about to be executed by executing the effect by the movable member in accordance with the timing.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the movable means is moved by the movable means to the initial position before the movement based on the execution of the prohibition by the prohibition means. A gaming machine S6 characterized by:

According to the game machine S6, in addition to the effects of the game machines S1 to S6, based on the execution of the prohibition by the prohibition means, the movable means is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the performance using the movable member has ended.

<Characteristic T group> (The stroke is variable by varying the output for driving by repeatedly pressing the button.)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means. a movable member capable of moving within a predetermined movable range; and movable means for moving the movable member based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means. a movement signal output means for outputting a movement signal for varying an amount of movement of the movable member in a unit period by the movement means; and selection means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a player operates an operation means (such as a production button) to execute a role-driven production that moves a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position. There is (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that the performance effect of the accessory-driven presentation is reduced because the operation mode of the ornament is monotonous. Further, even if the player operates the operation means (such as the effect button) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the role-driven effect), a new role-driven effect is not executed. , there is a problem that the production effect of the performance driven performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means (production buttons, etc.) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, the signal output means outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. A movable member that can move within a predetermined movable range is moved by the movable means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means.

The movable signal output means outputs a movable signal for varying the amount of movement of the movable member in a unit period by the movable means. The selection means selects the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means.

As a result, the type of the movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is varied based on the operation of the operating means, so that the movable state of the movable member can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine T1 has an interval determining means for determining an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means, and the selecting means selects a predetermined interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determining means. The game machine T2 is characterized in that, when the interval is less than or equal to the predetermined interval, a movement signal with a smaller movement amount is selected than when the interval is greater than or equal to the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the interval determining means determines the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. When the interval at which the predetermined signal is discriminated by the interval determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, the selection means selects a movable signal with a smaller movable amount than when the interval is equal to or greater than the predetermined interval.

As a result, when the frequency of operation of the operating means is high, by reducing the amount of movement of the movable member, it is possible to suppress the problem of breakage of the movable member.

In the gaming machine T2, the selection means selects a movement signal indicating a large movement amount even if the distance determined by the predetermined signal by the distance determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined distance when a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine T3 is characterized by selecting the .

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is established, even if the interval determined by the predetermined signal by the interval determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined interval, the movable amount is increased. Since a large movable signal is selected by the selection means, even if the operation frequency is high, a large movable amount signal is selected when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the performance of the movable member becomes monotonous. has the effect of suppressing

A gaming machine T4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines T1 to T3, the moving means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the moving signal is composed of a signal having a predetermined frequency. .

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. There is an effect that the movable control of the can be easily performed.

In the gaming machine T4, the movable signal is such that a signal with a high frequency increases the amount of movement, and a signal with a low frequency decreases the amount of movement.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effect of the game machine T4, the movable amount is increased by a signal with a high frequency, and the movable amount is decreased by a signal with a low frequency, so there is an effect that the movable amount can be easily controlled. .

In any one of game machines T3 to T4, the game machine has a plurality of the movable members, and the movable means capable of moving each of the plurality of movable members, wherein the movable signal output means is the signal discrimination means. A gaming machine T6 characterized in that, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by, the movable member to be moved is determined based on a preset movable condition, and the movable signal is output.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of either the game machine T3 or T4, each of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means, and when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, preset Since the movable member to be moved is determined based on the obtained movable condition and the movable signal is output by the movable signal output means, the movable member can be easily controlled.

A gaming machine T7 characterized in that, in the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined power value.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined power value, so that the movable member can be controlled. There is an effect that it can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine T7, the selection means selects a first power value and its first power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. and a second power value lower than the above value, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determination means, the first power value and the second power value are selected. A gaming machine T8 characterized by alternate selection.

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7, the selection means selects the first electric power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. and a second power value lower than the first power value, and when a predetermined signal is received by the signal discriminating means and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first power value and the second power value are selected. and are alternately selected, it is possible to vary the amount of movement of the movable member even when the operation means is operated continuously.

<Characteristic group U> (Heat generation is prevented by varying the driving power of the solenoid at the start of driving and after driving)
a driving member that can be driven at least to a first position and a second position different from the first position; a driving means for driving to a position and driving from the second position to the first position when the supplied electric power value becomes equal to or lower than the second electric power value; and a power supply for supplying electric power to the driving means. means, when starting to drive the driving member from the first position to the second position, the electric power value supplied to the driving means by the electric power supply means is equal to or greater than the first electric power value to start driving. and controlling the power value supplied by the power supply means to be equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive starting power in a state in which the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position. and a supply power control means for controlling the power value.

Here, in some game machines such as pachinko machines, a movable body (accessory, etc.) is moved from a standby position to a predetermined operating position by driving a solenoid, and is held at the predetermined operating position (for example, , JP-A-2008-301906).

In such a conventional game machine, the same electric power is used to drive the solenoid when moving the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operating position and when holding the movable body at the predetermined operating position. In this case, the energy (electric power) required to hold the movable body at the predetermined operating position is smaller than that for moving the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operating position. The movable body is held with the same energy (electric power) as when moving to the position. As a result, when the holding time of the movable body becomes longer, energy (electric power) is unnecessarily supplied to the solenoid, resulting in problems such as an increase in power consumption, heat generation, and breakage of the solenoid.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the drive member is driven from the first position to the second position by supplying power equal to or greater than the first power value to the drive means, and the power supplied to the drive means The drive member is driven from the second position to the first position when the value is less than or equal to the second power value. When the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position, the power supply control means controls the power value supplied from the power supply means to the drive means to be the drive start power equal to or greater than the first power value. and, in a state in which the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied from the power supply means is controlled to a power value equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive starting power.

Thus, when starting to drive the driving member from the first position to the second position, the driving starting power equal to or greater than the first electric power value for driving the driving member from the first position to the second position is applied to the driving means. supplied to On the other hand, when the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, a power value equal to or greater than the second power value at which the driving member is not driven to the first position and less than the drive starting power is applied to the driving means. supplied. Therefore, it is possible to drive the driving member from the first position to the second position and hold the driving member at the second position with less power than the power required to drive the driving member, thereby reducing power consumption. effective.

A gaming machine U1 is provided with ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and provision means for providing a predetermined game value based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means. , by driving the driving member to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and by driving the driving member to the second position, the A gaming machine U2 characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than when the driving member is driven to the first position.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined game value is imparted by the imparting means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball. The ball-entering means makes ball-entering difficult by driving the driving member to the first position, and makes ball-entering easy by driving the driving member to the second position. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the driving member is driven to the first position or to the second position, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the power supply means includes first power supply means for supplying the drive start power to the drive means, and power supply means for supplying the drive means with the second power value or more and less than the drive start power. and second power supply means for supplying a power value, wherein the power supply control means controls the first power supply when starting to drive the drive member from the first position to the second position. means to supply power to the driving means, and in a state in which the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the driving means. A gaming machine U3 characterized in that it controls to supply

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the power supply means includes a first power supply means for supplying drive starting power to the drive means and a second power supply means for supplying a power value equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive start power to the drive means. means and When starting to drive the driving member from the first position to the second position, power is supplied from the first power supply means to the driving means by the supply power control means, and the driving member is maintained between the first position and the second position. is driven, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means. Accordingly, the power supply control means may perform control so as to select power to be supplied to the drive means from either the first power supply means or the second power supply means depending on the situation. , the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine U3, the supply power control means supplies power from the first power supply means to the drive means when a holding period for holding the drive member at the second position is shorter than a predetermined period. After controlling as above, the power supplied to the driving means is controlled to a power value equal to or lower than the second power value without controlling to supply power from the second power supply means to the driving means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by:

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, when the holding period for holding the drive member at the second position is shorter than the predetermined period, the supply power control means reduces the drive means from the first power supply means. After the power is supplied to the second power supply means, the power supplied to the drive means becomes a power value equal to or lower than the second power value without power being supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. As a result, it is possible to omit the control of supplying power from the second power supply means to the drive means, so that there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the game machine U3 or U4, the power supply control means supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means after controlling the first power supply means to supply power to the drive means. In the case of controlling as above, it is preferable to perform control so as not to supply power from the first power supply means to the driving power means before controlling to supply power from the second power supply means to the driving means. Characteristic game machine U5.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U3 or U4, after power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means, the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive power means. After the power is no longer supplied, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the simultaneous supply of power from the first power supply means and the second power supply means to the driving means, and to prevent (suppress) the destruction of the driving means. effective.

In any one of game machines U3 to U5, the power supply control means includes first instruction means for outputting an instruction signal for causing the first power supply means to supply power to the driving means, and the first instruction means. a first supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the first power supply means to the drive means based on an instruction signal from the second power supply means for supplying power to the drive means from the second power supply means; second instruction means for outputting an instruction signal; second supply control means for controlling power supply from the second power supply means to the driving means based on the instruction signal from the second instruction means; A gaming machine U6 comprising timing instruction means for instructing control timings of said first supply control means and said second supply control means based on instruction signals from said first instruction means and said second instruction means. .

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines U3 to U5, the following effects are produced. That is, the supply power control means includes first supply control means for controlling power supply from the first power supply means to the driving means based on the instruction signal from the first instruction means, and the instruction from the second instruction means. a second supply control means for controlling the supply of power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the signal, wherein the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is timing; indicated by an indicating means; As a result, even if the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are not synchronized (deviated), the timing instruction means instructs the first supply control means and the second supply control means. There is an effect that control timing can be synchronized and power can be supplied to the drive means at appropriate timing.

In the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means instructs the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effects of the game machine U6, the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is instructed every predetermined period by the timing instruction means. As a result, since the control timing can be instructed to the first supply control means and the second supply control means every predetermined period, the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is executed without delaying the predetermined period or more. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine U6 or U7, clear signal output means for outputting a clear signal instructing to forcibly turn off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means, and from the clear signal output means A gaming machine U8 comprising clear means for forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means based on the reception of the clear signal.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U6 or U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a clear signal is output from the clear signal output means, and when the clear signal is received by the clear means, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are forcibly turned off. As a result, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means can be turned off collectively, and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be stopped collectively. be.

The gaming machine U9 is characterized in that the game machine U8 is provided with noise removing means capable of removing noise in the signal output from the clear signal means to the clear means.

According to the game machine U9, in addition to the effects of the game machine U8, noise in the signal output from the clear signal means to the clear means can be removed by the noise removal means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the clearing means from malfunctioning due to noise and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means from being erroneously stopped.

In any one of the game machines U6 to U9, the first supply control means supplies power from the first power supply means to the drive means when the voltage of the instruction signal from the first instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage. When the voltage of the instruction signal from the second instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means receives from the second power supply means A game machine U10, characterized in that it is in a conducting state in which electric power is supplied to the driving means.

According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first supply control means receives the first instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the first supply control means is brought into a conducting state, and power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means. be done. Further, when the second supply control means receives the second instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is brought into a conductive state, and the power is supplied from the second power supply means to the driving means. be done. As a result, since the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be controlled by voltage, there is an effect that the power required for control for supplying power to the drive means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines U1 to U10, the power supply control means operates when power within a predetermined range is supplied. a noise removing means capable of removing noise in the power supplied from the means to the power supply control means.

According to the gaming machine U11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the noise removal means removes noise in the power supplied from the control power supply means to the supply power control means which is operated by being supplied with power within a predetermined range. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the destruction of the power supply control means due to the supply of power exceeding the predetermined range to the power supply control means. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent malfunction of the supply power control means due to supply of power within a predetermined range to the supply power control means due to noise.

In any one of the game machines U1 to U11, the drive means includes a coil capable of generating a magnetic force by being supplied with electric power to drive the drive member, and one end of the coil connected to the power supply means. and a demagnetization line connected to the coil in parallel to the power line, the demagnetization line extending from the other end of the coil to the one end of the coil. A gaming machine U12 characterized by comprising rectifying means for rectifying current in a direction to which it faces.

According to the gaming machine U12, in addition to the effects of any one of the games U1 to U11, the following effects are produced. A magnetic force is generated by supplying electric power to the coil of the driving means, and the driving member is driven. As a power supply line for the drive means, one end of the coil is connected to the power supply means, the other end is grounded, and a demagnetization line is connected in parallel with the coil to the power supply line. The current flowing through the degaussing line is rectified in the direction from the other end side of the coil to the one end side by the rectification means. Thus, when power is supplied from the power supply means, power is supplied to the coil without current flowing through the demagnetization line, and magnetic force is generated in the coil. On the other hand, when the power supply to the coil is cut off, the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil can be consumed as power through the demagnetization line, and the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil damages the power supply control means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent (suppress) this.

In any one of game machines U1 to U12, the power supply means includes second power supply means for supplying a power value equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive start power, and the second power supply means a third power supply means for supplying a power value that is the drive starting power when summed with the power value to be supplied, wherein the power supply control means moves the driving member from the first position to the second position; When starting to drive to the second position, control is performed so that power is supplied to the driving means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the first position and the second position are controlled. A gaming machine U13 is characterized in that, in a state in which the driving member is driven between the second power supply means and the driving means, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the driving means.

According to the gaming machine U13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second power supply means of the power supply means supplies a power value equal to or greater than the second power value and less than the drive starting power to the driving means, and the third power supply means and the second power supply means of the power supply means A power value that sums to the drive start power is supplied to the driving means. When the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position by the supply power control means, power is supplied to the drive means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the drive means is driven to the first position. and the second position, power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. As a result, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less power than the power required to drive the drive member, thereby reducing power consumption. has the effect of

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, game machines are known in which an effect is executed to move a decoration body from a standby position to a predetermined operating position by a player operating operating means (effect buttons, etc.). For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2015-097827).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises operation means that can be operated by the player, and signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means. , a signal discrimination means for discriminating a signal output by the signal output means; a plurality of effect means capable of executing effects; an effect execution means capable of causing at least two or more of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined first effect pattern; When the specific effect is executed by two or more effect means, at least one of the two or more effect means is caused to wait for execution of the effect for a predetermined waiting period, Based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means during the waiting period, at least one of the effect means on standby is caused to start executing the effect.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in the waiting period, when the operation means is operated continuously, the signal output means outputs the predetermined value for each operation. It is set to a period longer than the shortest period in which the signal can be output.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, an interval determining means for determining an interval at which the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal, and The apparatus has storage means capable of storing information, and period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the information stored in the storage means.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein when the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means, an effective period for validating the judgment is set. valid period setting means for setting; and invalidity determination means for determining information that the predetermined signal has been determined by the signal determination means before the valid period is set by the valid period setting means. .
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating standby by the effect executing means based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidity determining means is specific information. have.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output a signal discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by means; a plurality of effect means capable of executing an effect; an effect executing means capable of causing at least two or more of the plurality of effect means to execute a specific effect in a effect pattern, wherein the effect executing means is capable of executing the two or more effects. When the means executes the specific effect, at least one of the two or more effect means is caused to wait for execution of the effect for a predetermined waiting period, and during the waiting period. Second, when the predetermined signal is received by the signal discriminating means, at least one of the effect means on standby is caused to start executing the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1, the waiting period is such that when the operation means are continuously operated, the signal output means The period is set to be longer than the shortest period in which the predetermined signal can be output in response to the operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, an interval determining means for determining an interval at which the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal; The apparatus has storage means capable of storing information determined by the interval determination means, and period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validating the discrimination, and before the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, and invalidity determination means for determining information determined by the signal determination means for the predetermined signal. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, based on the fact that the information determined by the invalidity determination means is specific information, the effect execution means It has regulation means for regulating waiting. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production can be enhanced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
113 Audio lamp control device (effect executing means)

Claims (1)

a production executing means capable of executing production;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
When the operation means is operated, if it is in a first state in which the effect can be executed in a predetermined mode, it can be set so that the effect is executed in a first pattern, and the operation means is operated. If it is a second state in which it is impossible to execute the performance in the predetermined mode, the performance is executed in a second pattern different from the first pattern until a predetermined condition is satisfied. and a settable production control means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of effects, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect for an arbitrary effect out of a plurality of effects based on the operation of the operation means. and
At least two effects among the plurality of effects that can be executed by the effect execution means are set so that execution periods of the effects are different from each other,
The first pattern is executed in a predetermined manner regardless of the number of operations of the operation means,
A gaming machine, wherein the second pattern is set to be executable at a predetermined timing after the performance is started in the first pattern.

Images